ford galaxy manual

FORD GALAXY / S-MAX Owner's Manual

The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest ofcontinuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any timewithout notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in aretrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.Errors and omissions excepted.© Ford Motor Company 2011

All rights reserved.Part Number: (CG3533en) 10/2011 20110816105629

IntroductionAbout This Manual...........................................7Symbols Glossary.............................................7Parts and Accessories.....................................7

At a GlanceAt a Glance........................................................10

Child SafetyChild Seats........................................................22Booster Seats..................................................23Child Seat Positioning..................................24ISOFIX Anchor Points....................................27Child Safety Locks.........................................28

Occupant protectionPrinciple of Operation..................................29Fastening the seat belts...............................31Seat belt height adjustment......................32Seat belt reminder.........................................32Using seat belts during pregnancy..........33Disabling the passenger airbag................33

Keys and Remote ControlsGeneral Information on Radio

Frequencies..................................................35Programming the remote control............35Changing the remote control

battery............................................................35

LocksLocking and Unlocking.................................38Global Opening and Closing.....................40Keyless Entry.....................................................41

Engine immobiliserPrinciple of Operation..................................45Coded keys.......................................................45Arming the engine immobiliser................45Disarming the engine immobiliser...........45

AlarmPrinciple of Operation..................................46Arming the alarm...........................................48Disarming the alarm.....................................48

Steering WheelAdjusting the Steering Wheel...................49Audio Control..................................................49

Wipers and WashersWindscreen Wipers........................................51Autowipers.........................................................51Windscreen Washers....................................52Adjusting the windscreen washer

jets...................................................................52Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........52Headlamp Washers.......................................53Checking the Wiper Blades........................53Changing the Wiper Blades........................53Technical Specifications.............................55

LightingLighting Control..............................................56Daytime Running Lamps.............................57Autolamps.........................................................57Automatic Main Beam Control.................57Front Fog Lamps............................................59Rear Fog Lamps.............................................59Adjusting the Headlamps - Vehicles

With: Adaptive Front Lighting/XenonHeadlamps...................................................59

Headlamp Levelling......................................59Adaptive Headlamps...................................60Hazard Warning Flashers............................62Direction Indicators.......................................62Interior Lamps.................................................62Removing a Headlamp................................63Changing a Bulb.............................................64Bulb Specification Chart..............................73

1

Table of Contents

Windows and MirrorsPower Windows..............................................75Exterior Mirrors.................................................77Electric exterior mirrors.................................77Auto-Dimming Mirror....................................79Rear Quarter Windows.................................79Blind Spot Monitor........................................80

Instrument ClusterGauges...............................................................83Warning Lamps and Indicators................85Audible Warnings and Indicators.............88

Information DisplaysGeneral Information.....................................89Trip Computer.................................................98Personalised Settings................................100Information Messages................................102

Climate ControlPrinciple of Operation..................................112Air Vents............................................................112Manual Climate Control..............................113Automatic Climate Control........................115Heated Windows and Mirrors..................120Auxiliary Heater.............................................120

SeatsSitting in the Correct Position..................126Manual Seats.................................................126Power Seats....................................................127Head Restraints.............................................129Rear Seats.......................................................129Heated Seats..................................................134Ventilated Seats............................................134Front Seat Armrest......................................135

Convenience featuresSun Shades.....................................................136

Instrument Lighting Dimmer....................137Clock..................................................................137Cigar Lighter...................................................138Ashtray.............................................................138Auxiliary Power Points................................138Cup Holders....................................................139Glove Box.........................................................139Storage compartments.............................140Map Pockets....................................................141Seat Back Trays..............................................141Glasses Holder...............................................142Memory Function.........................................142Childminder Mirror.......................................143CD changer.....................................................143Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket..............144USB port..........................................................144Floor Mats.......................................................144

Starting and Stopping theEngine

General Information....................................145Ignition Switch...............................................145Keyless Starting............................................145Steering Wheel Lock....................................147Starting a Petrol Engine.............................147Starting a Petrol Engine - E85.................148Starting a Diesel Engine.............................149Diesel Particulate Filter..............................149Switching Off the Engine..........................150Engine Block Heater....................................150

Start-StopPrinciple of Operation.................................152Using start-stop............................................152

Eco ModePrinciple of Operation.................................154Using Eco mode............................................154

2

Table of Contents

Fuel and RefuellingSafety Precautions.......................................155Fuel Quality - Petrol.....................................155Fuel Quality - E85.........................................155Fuel Quality - Diesel....................................155Catalytic Converter......................................156Fuel filler flap.................................................156Refuelling........................................................158Refuelling - E85............................................158Fuel Consumption.......................................158Technical Specifications............................158

TransmissionManual Transmission..................................163Automatic Transmission............................163

BrakesPrinciple of Operation................................166Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock

Brakes...........................................................166Parking Brake.................................................166Electric Parking Brake.................................167

Stability ControlPrinciple of Operation.................................170Using Stability Control................................170

Hill Start AssistPrinciple of Operation..................................171Using hill start assist.....................................171

Active suspensionPrinciple of Operation.................................174Using active suspension.............................174

Parking AidsPrinciple of Operation.................................175Using the Parking Aid..................................175

Rear view cameraPrinciple of Operation..................................177Using the Rear View Camera....................177

Cruise ControlPrinciple of Operation................................180Using Cruise Control...................................180

Adaptive cruise control(ACC)

Principle of Operation.................................182Using Adaptive Cruise Control................183Forward alert function................................187

Speed LimiterPrinciple of Operation................................188Using the speed limiter..............................188

Driver AlertPrinciple of Operation................................190Using driver alert..........................................190

Lane Departure WarningPrinciple of Operation.................................192Using lane departure warning.................192

Load CarryingGeneral Information....................................194Luggage Anchor Points..............................195Sliding Loadspace Floor.............................197Rear Under Floor Storage.........................198Cargo Nets......................................................199Luggage Covers............................................202Roof Racks and Load Carriers................202Load Retaining Fixtures............................204Dog Guard......................................................208

TowingTowing a Trailer...............................................211

3

Table of Contents

Tow Ball.............................................................211Retractable tow ball....................................214

Driving HintsRunning-In.......................................................218Cold Weather Precautions........................218Driving Through Water................................218

Roadside EmergenciesFirst Aid Kit......................................................219Warning Triangle...........................................219

FusesFuse Box Locations.....................................220Changing a Fuse............................................221Fuse Specification Chart...........................222

Vehicle recoveryTowing Points.................................................231Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels......231

MaintenanceGeneral Information...................................233Opening and Closing the Bonnet...........233Under Bonnet Overview - 1.6L EcoBoost

SCTi (Sigma)............................................235Under Bonnet Overview - 2.0L

Duratec-HE (MI4)...................................236Under Bonnet Overview - 2.0L EcoBoost

SCTi (MI4)..................................................237Under Bonnet Overview - 2.3L

Duratec-HE (MI4)...................................238Under Bonnet Overview - 1.6L

Duratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel.................239Under Bonnet Overview - 2.0L

Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel................240Under Bonnet Overview - 2.2L

Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel................242Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi

(Sigma).......................................................243Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L Duratec-HE

(MI4)/2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4)............243

Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi(MI4)............................................................243

Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi(DV) Diesel/2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel/2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel............................................................243

Engine Oil Check..........................................244Engine Coolant Check...............................244Brake and Clutch Fluid Check.................245Power Steering Fluid Check.....................245Washer Fluid Check....................................245Technical Specifications...........................246

Vehicle CareCleaning the Exterior..................................249Cleaning the Interior...................................249Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............250

Vehicle batteryJump-Starting the Vehicle........................251Changing the Vehicle Battery..................252Battery connection points........................252

Wheels and TyresGeneral Information...................................253Changing a Road Wheel...........................253Tyre Repair Kit...............................................256Tyre Care........................................................260Using Winter Tyres......................................260Using Snow Chains....................................260Tyre Pressure Monitoring System.........260Technical Specifications...........................262

Vehicle identificationVehicle Identification Plate......................265Vehicle Identification Number...............266

Capacities and Specific-ations

Technical Specifications...........................267

4

Table of Contents

Audio introductionImportant audio information....................271

Audio unit overviewAudio unit overview.....................................272

Audio system securitySecurity code.................................................275Lost security code........................................275Entering a security code............................275Incorrect security code...............................275

Audio unit clock and datedisplays

Setting the clock and date on the audiounit................................................................276

Audio unit operationOn/off control................................................277Bass/treble control......................................277Balance/fade control..................................277Audio menu control.....................................277Station preset buttons...............................279Waveband button........................................279Autostore control........................................280Traffic information control......................280Station tuning control.................................281

Audio unit menusAutomatic volume control.......................283Digital signal processing (DSP).............283Audio distortion reduction (CLIP).........283Alternative frequencies.............................284Regional mode (REG)...............................284News broadcasts.........................................285

Compact disc playerLoading compact discs.............................286Track selection.............................................286

Loading the compact disc changer......286Unloading the compact disc

changer........................................................287Compact disc playback.............................287Fast forward/reverse..................................287Shuffle/random............................................287Compact disc track compression.........288Compact disc track scanning.................288Ejecting compact discs.............................289Repeat compact disc tracks...................289MP3 file playback........................................289MP3 display options..................................290Ending compact disc playback..............290

Auxiliary input (AUX IN)socket

Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket..............291

Audio troubleshootingAudio troubleshooting...............................292

TelephoneGeneral Information...................................293Bluetooth setup...........................................293Telephone setup..........................................293Telephone controls.....................................294Using the telephone - Vehicles Without:

Navigation System..................................295Using the telephone - Vehicles With:

Navigation System..................................297

Voice controlPrinciple of Operation...............................300Using voice control.....................................300Audio unit commands................................301Telephone commands...............................310Navigation system commands...............315Climate control commands.....................315

5

Table of Contents

ConnectivityGeneral Information....................................318Connecting an external device................319Connecting an external device - Vehicles

With: Bluetooth.........................................319Using a USB device.....................................320Using an iPod.................................................322

Navigation introductionRoad Safety...................................................326

Navigation systemGetting started..............................................327

AppendicesType approvals.............................................329Type approvals.............................................329Type approvals.............................................329Type approvals.............................................330Electromagnetic compatibility................331

6

Table of Contents

ABOUT THIS MANUALThank you for choosing Ford. Werecommend that you take some time toget to know your vehicle by reading thismanual. The more that you know about it,the greater the safety and pleasure youwill get from driving it.

WARNINGAlways drive with due care andattention when using and operatingthe controls and features on your

vehicle.

Note: This manual describes productfeatures and options available throughoutthe range, sometimes even before they aregenerally available. It may describe optionsnot fitted to your vehicle.Note: Some of the illustrations in thismanual may be used for different models,so may appear different to your vehicle.However, the essential information in theillustrations is always correct.Note: Always use and operate your vehiclein line with all applicable laws andregulations.Note: Pass on this manual when sellingyour vehicle. It is an integral part of thevehicle.

SYMBOLS GLOSSARYSymbols in this handbook

WARNINGYou risk death or serious injury toyourself and others if you do notfollow the instructions highlighted

by the warning symbol.

CAUTIONYou risk damaging your vehicle if youdo not follow the instructionshighlighted by the caution symbol.

Symbols on your vehicle

When you see these symbols, read andfollow the relevant instructions in thishandbook before touching or attemptingadjustment of any kind.

PARTS AND ACCESSORIESNow you can be sure that your Fordparts are Ford partsYour Ford has been built to the higheststandards using high quality Ford OriginalParts. As a result, you can enjoy driving itfor many years.Should the unexpected occur and a majorpart needs replacing, we recommend thatyou accept nothing less than Ford OriginalParts.The use of Ford Original Parts ensures thatyour vehicle is repaired to its pre-accidentcondition and maintains its maximumresidual value.Ford Original Parts match Ford's stringentsafety requirements and high standardsof fit, finish and reliability. Quite simply,they represent the best overall repair value,including parts and labour costs.

7

Introduction

Now it is easier to tell if you have reallybeen given Ford Original Parts. The Fordlogo is clearly visible on the following partsif they are Ford Original Parts. If yourvehicle has to be repaired, look for theclearly visible Ford branding and make surethat only Ford Original Parts have beenused.

Look for the Ford logo on thefollowing partsSheet metal• Wing• Bonnet• Doors• Luggage compartment lid or tailgate

E94714

Bumper and radiator grille• Radiator grille• Front and rear bumper

Exterior mirror

E94716

Glass• Rear window• Glass roof• Side glass• Windscreen

8

Introduction

E94717

Lighting• Rear lamps• Headlamp

E94718

9

Introduction

Instrument panel overview - left-hand drive

A

W TU Q PS R OV

B EC F G IH J K L M ND

E74123

10

At a Glance

Instrument panel overview - right-hand drive

QP RSTUWO V

LKM ABE GDCHN I J F

E75798

Lighting controls. See Lighting Control (page 56).AAir vents. See Air Vents (page 112).BDirection indicators. See Direction Indicators (page 62). Telephone controlbuttons. See Telephone controls (page 294). Voice control buttons. SeeUsing voice control (page 300). Lane departure warning control buttons. SeeLane Departure Warning (page 192).

C

Audio controls. See Audio Control (page 49).DInstrument cluster. See Gauges (page 83).E

11

At a Glance

Information display controls. See Information Displays (page 89).FWiper lever. See Windscreen Wipers (page 51).GAudio unit. See Audio unit overview (page 272).HNavigation unit. See separate handbook.HStability control (ESP) switch. See Using Stability Control (page 170).Start-stop switch. See Using start-stop (page 152).

I

Parking aid switch. See Using the Parking Aid (page 175).JHazard warning flasher switch. See Hazard Warning Flashers (page 62).KPassenger airbag deactivation warning lamp. See Disabling the passengerairbag (page 33).

L

Storage compartment. See Storage compartments (page 140).MHeated windscreen and heated rear window switches. See Heated Windowsand Mirrors (page 120).

N

Climate controls. See Manual Climate Control (page 113). See AutomaticClimate Control (page 115).

O

Cigar lighter. See Cigar Lighter (page 138).PStart button. See Keyless Starting (page 145).QIgnition switch.RCruise control and speed limiter switches. See Using Cruise Control (page180). Adaptive cruise control (ACC) switches. See Using Adaptive CruiseControl (page 183). Speed limiter switches. See Using the speed limiter(page 188).

S

Steering wheel adjustment lever. See Adjusting the Steering Wheel (page49).

T

Driver knee airbag. See Principle of Operation (page 29).UHorn.VCruise control and speed limiter switches. See Using Cruise Control (page180). Adaptive cruise control (ACC) switches. See Using Adaptive CruiseControl (page 183). Speed limiter switches. See Using the speed limiter(page 188).

W

12

At a Glance

Electric child safety locks

E124779

See Child Safety Locks (page 28).

Keyless entry

E78276

Passive locking and unlocking requires avalid passive key to be located within oneof the three external detection ranges.

Unlocking the vehicle

E78278

Pull a door handle to unlock all the doorsand the luggage compartment lid anddisarm the alarm.

Locking the vehicle

E87384

E87435

13

At a Glance

See Keyless Entry (page 41).

Adjusting the steering wheelWARNING

Never adjust the steering wheelwhen the vehicle is moving.

1

2

2

E95178

3E95179

See Adjusting the Steering Wheel(page 49).

Autowipers

E70315

BA

C

High sensitivityAOnBLow sensitivityC

Adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensorusing the rotary control.

See Autowipers (page 51).

Changing the wiper bladesCAUTION

You can use the service position inwinter to provide easier access to thewiper blades for freeing them from

snow and ice. The windscreen wipers willreturn to their normal position as soon asyou switch on the ignition so make surethat the outside of the windscreen is freefrom snow and ice before you switch onthe ignition.

E75184

14

At a Glance

A

E75188

Switch off the ignition and move the wiperlever to position A within three seconds.Release the lever when the windscreenwipers have moved to the service position.

See Changing the Wiper Blades (page53).

Autolamps

E70719

The headlamps will come on and go offautomatically depending on the ambientlight.

See Lighting Control (page 56).

Automatic main beam controlWARNING

The system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention. A manual

override may be necessary if the systemfails to switch the main beam on or off.

The system will automatically switch onmain beam if it is dark enough and no othertraffic is present. If it detects anapproaching vehicle’s headlamps or taillamps, or street lighting ahead the systemwill switch off main beam before it candistract other road users. Dipped beamswill remain on.

See Automatic Main Beam Control(page 57).

Direction indicators

E70727

Note: Tap the lever up or down to make thedirection indicators flash only three times.

Electric windowsNote: To reduce wind noise or buffetingwhen just one window is open, open theopposite window slightly.

See Power Windows (page 75).

15

At a Glance

Electric folding mirrors

E72623

See Electric exterior mirrors (page 77).

Reverse mirror dippingDepending on the selected mirror position,the relevant exterior mirror will dipwhenever you select reverse gear, givingyou a view of the kerb.When you first use this feature, the mirrorswill dip to a preset position. You canprogramme the degree of dipping.

See Electric exterior mirrors (page 77).

Blind spot information system(BLIS)

WARNINGDo not use the system as areplacement for using the side andrear view mirrors, and looking over

your shoulder before changing lanes. Thesystem is not a replacement for carefuldriving and is only to be used as an aid.

The system displays a yellow indicatorlocated in the exterior mirrors.

E124736

See Blind Spot Monitor (page 80).

Information displays

E70499

Use the arrow buttons to navigate throughthe menus and press OK to make aselection.

See Information Displays (page 89).

16

At a Glance

Manual climate controlCooling the interior quickly

E71381

Heating the interior quickly

E71377

Recommended settings for cooling

E131534

Open the centre and side air vents.Direct the centre air vents upwards and theside air vents toward the side windows.

Recommended settings for heating

E131535

Close the centre air vents and open theside air vents.

Direct the side air vents toward the sidewindows.

Defrosting and demisting thewindscreen

E71382

See Manual Climate Control (page 113).

Automatic climate control

E70304

See Automatic Climate Control (page115).

Engine idle speed after startingThe engine may idle at a higher speed thannormal immediately after starting fromcold.

See Starting and Stopping the Engine(page 145).

Keyless starting

E85766

17

At a Glance

Press the start button.

Stopping the engine when the vehicleis moving

WARNINGSwitching off the engine when thevehicle is still moving will result in aloss of brake and steering assistance.

The steering will not be locked, but highereffort will be required. When the ignition isswitched off some electrical circuits,warning lamps and indicators may also beOFF.

Press and hold the start button for twoseconds, or press three times within threeseconds.

See Keyless Starting (page 145).

Diesel particulate filter (DPF)WARNING

Do not park or idle your vehicle overdry leaves, dry grass or othercombustible materials. The DPF

regeneration process creates very highexhaust gas temperatures and the exhaustwill radiate a considerable amount of heatduring and after DPF regeneration, andafter you have switched the engine off.This is a potential fire hazard.

See Diesel Particulate Filter (page 149).

Fuel filler flap

E86613

Press the flap to open it. Open the flap fullyuntil it engages.

E139202

A

A

Insert the fuel nozzle up to and includingthe first notch on the nozzle A. Keep itresting on the cover of the fuel pipeopening.

18

At a Glance

WARNINGWe recommend that you remove thefuel nozzle slowly to allow anyresidual fuel to drain into the fuel

tank. Alternatively you can wait 10 secondsbefore removing the fuel nozzle.

E119081

Slightly raise the fuel nozzle to remove it.

See Fuel filler flap (page 156).

Manual transmissionSelecting reverse gear

E99067

On some vehicles it is necessary to raisethe collar whilst selecting reverse gear.

See Manual Transmission (page 163).

Automatic transmissionNote: Do not press the brake pedal whenremoving the key from the ignition switch.

Selector lever positions

WARNINGApply the brakes before moving theselector lever and keep them applieduntil you are ready to move off.

E80836S

ParkPReverseRNeutralNDriveDManual shifting and sport modeS

See Automatic Transmission (page163).

Electric parking brake (EPB)Releasing the EPB manuallyNote: To release the EPB, the ignition mustbe in position II.

19

At a Glance

E70529

Hold the brake pedal depressed and pressdown the switch.

Automatic release - Drive away release(DAR)Note: On vehicles with automatictransmission, the driver's door must beclosed and the driver's seatbelt must befastened before the DAR will operate.Engage first or reverse gear, move off asnormal, the EPB will be releasedautomatically.

See Electric Parking Brake (page 167).

Rear view cameraWARNING

The camera does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.

The camera is a visual aid for use whenreversing.

S-MAX

E99105

Galaxy

E124349

See Rear view camera (page 177).

Speed limiterThe system allows you to set a speed, towhich the vehicle then becomes limited.

See Speed Limiter (page 188).

20

At a Glance

Driver alertWARNING

The system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.

The system calculates an alertness scorewhich can be displayed on the informationdisplay. If the system detects that you arebecoming drowsy or there is deteriorationin your driving style then warnings will beissued.

See Driver Alert (page 190).

Lane departure warningWARNING


Activate the system using the switches onthe indicator stalk.

E131360

A

B

System onASystem offB

See Lane Departure Warning (page 192).

Towing the vehicle on four wheelsCAUTION

For certain engine and transmissioncombinations, it is recommended notto tow the vehicle with the drive

wheels on the ground.

See Towing the Vehicle on FourWheels (page 231).

21

At a Glance

CHILD SEATS

E133140

E68916

WARNINGSSecure children that are less than150 centimetres (59 inches) tall in asuitable, approved child restraint, in

the rear seat.Extreme Hazard! Do not use arearward facing child restraint on aseat protected by an air bag in front

of it!Read and follow the manufacturer’sinstructions when you are fitting achild restraint.Do not modify child restraints in anyway.Do not hold a child on your lap whenthe vehicle is moving.

WARNINGSDo not leave unattended children inyour vehicle.If your vehicle has been involved inan accident, have the child restraintschecked by properly trained

technicians.

Note: Mandatory use of child restraintsvaries from country to country.Only child restraints certified toECE-R44.03 (or later) have been testedand approved for use in your vehicle. Achoice of these are available from yourDealer.

Child restraints for different massgroupsUse the correct child restraint as follows:

Baby safety seat

E68918

Secure children that weigh less than 13kilograms (29 pounds) in a rearward facingbaby safety seat (Group 0+) in the rearseat.

22

Child Safety

Child safety seat

E68920

Secure children that weigh between 13 and18 kilograms (29 and 40 pounds) in a childsafety seat (Group 1) in the rear seat.

BOOSTER SEATS

WARNINGSDo not install a booster seat or abooster cushion with only the lapstrap of the seat belt.Do not install a booster seat or abooster cushion with a seat belt thatis slack or twisted.Do not put the seat belt under yourchild’s arm or behind its back.Do not use pillows, books or towelsto boost your child’s height.Make sure that your children sit in anupright position.Secure children that weigh morethan 15 kilograms (33 pounds) butare less than 150 centimetres (59

inches) tall in a booster seat or a boostercushion.

CAUTIONWhen using a child seat on a rear seat,make sure that the child seat reststightly against the vehicle seat. It may

be necessary to lift or remove the headrestraint. See Head Restraints (page 129).

Booster seat (Group 2)

E70710

We recommend that you use a boosterseat that combines a cushion with abackrest instead of a booster cushion only.The raised seating position will allow youto position the shoulder strap of the adultseat belt over the centre of your child’sshoulder and the lap strap tightly acrossits hips.

23

Child Safety

Booster cushion (Group 3)

E68924

CHILD SEAT POSITIONING

WARNINGSPlease consult your Dealer for thelatest details relating to Fordrecommended child seats.When you are using a group 0 or 0+child seat with a support leg on asecond row seat, make sure that you

locate the support leg securely on theunder floor storage compartment cover.Make sure that you install the foam spacercorrectly inside the storage compartment,using any screws or fastenings providedand, that you position the cover correctly.

If the under floor storagecompartment foam spacer isdamaged or missing, remove the

storage compartment cover and extendthe leg to the base of the compartment. Ifit is not possible to locate the leg securelyon the base of the compartment, forexample because of the shape or lengthof the leg, replace the foam spacer andcompartment cover or select a differentseating position in the vehicle.

WARNINGSIf you want to use a group 1 child seatwith a support leg, consult the childseat manufacturer's website or

fitting instructions, to make surecompatibility with the vehicle and fordetails of any special fitting instructionsregarding the removal of the stowagecompartment cover.

On certain vehicles it is not possibleto open or remove the left-handcompartment cover. See Storage

compartments (page 140). For group 0 or0+ child seats, this does not prevent thesupport leg being located on the cover.However, if any larger child seat that youmay wish to use requires you to removethe cover and extend the leg to the baseof the compartment, either select adifferent seating position in the vehicle ora different child seat.

When using a forward facing childseat on a second or third row seat,always remove the head restraint

from that seat. See Head Restraints(page 129).

When using a child seat with a seatbelt, make sure that the seat belt isnot slack or twisted.

Note: When using a child seat on a frontseat, always adjust the front passenger seatto its fully rearwards position. If it provesdifficult to tighten the lap section of the seatbelt without slack remaining, adjust theseatback to the fully upright position andraise the height of the seat. See ManualSeats (page 126). See Power Seats (page127).Note: When using a child seat on a secondrow seat, adjust the second row seat to themost practical position for the driver. SeeRear Seats (page 129).

24

Child Safety

Child seat positions

Mass group categories

Seating positions3210+0

22 - 36 kg15 - 25 kg9 - 18 kgUp to 13 kgUp to 10 kg

Booster seat or cushionChildsafety seatBaby safety seat

UF¹UF¹UF¹XXFront passenger seatwith airbag ON

U¹U¹U¹U¹U¹Front passenger seatwith airbag OFF

UUUUUSecond row seats

UUUUUThird row Galaxy

UFUFUFL, UFL, UFThird row S-MAX

X Not suitable for children in this mass group.U Suitable for universal category child restraints approved for use in this mass group.U¹ Suitable for universal category child restraints approved for use in this mass group.However, we recommend that you secure children in a government approved childrestraint, in the rear seat.L Suitable only for the following rearward facing child restraints: Roemer Baby-Safe(E1-04301146), Roemer Baby-Safe Plus (E1-04301146), Britax Cosy Tot (E1-04301146),Britax Cosy Tot Premium (E1-04301146), Maxi-Cosi Cabrio (E4-44R-043517).UF Suitable for universal category forward facing child restraints approved for use in thismass group.UF¹ Suitable for universal category forward facing child restraints approved for use inthis mass group. However, we recommend that you secure children in a governmentapproved child restraint, in the rear seat.

ISOFIX child seats


Seating positions10+

Forward facingRear facing

9 - 18 kgUp to 13 kg

Not ISOFIX equippedSize classFront seat

25

Child Safety


Seating positions10+

Forward facingRear facing

9 - 18 kgUp to 13 kg

Seat type

A, B, B1, C, D*C, D, E*Size classSecond row seats

IL, IUF***IL**Seat type

Not ISOFIX equippedSize classThird row rear seats

Seat type

IL Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraints systems of the semi-universal category.Please consult child restraints systems suppliers' vehicle recommendation lists.IUF Suitable for ISOFIX forward facing child restraints systems of universal categoryapproved for use in this mass group and ISOFIX size class.*The ISOFIX size class for both universal and semi-universal child restraints systemsis defined by the capital letters A to G. These identification letters are displayed on ISOFIXchild restraints.**At time of publishing the recommended Group O+ ISOFIX baby safety seat is the BritaxRomer Baby Safe. Please consult your Dealer for the latest details relating to Fordrecommended child seats.***At time of publishing the recommended Group 1 ISOFIX child seat is the Britax RomerDuo. Please consult your Dealer for the latest details relating to Ford recommended childseats.

26

Child Safety

ISOFIX ANCHOR POINTS

WARNINGUse an anti-rotation device whenusing the ISOFIX system. Werecommend the use of a top tether

or support leg.

Note: When you are purchasing an ISOFIXrestraint, make sure that you know thecorrect mass group and ISOFIX size classfor the intended seating locations. SeeChild Seat Positioning (page 24).Your vehicle is fitted with ISOFIX anchorpoints that accommodate universallyapproved ISOFIX child restraints.The ISOFIX system comprises two rigidattachment arms on the child restraint thatattach to anchor points on the outboardrear seats, where the cushion and backrestmeet. Tether anchor points are fittedbehind the outboard rear seats for childrestraints with a top tether.

Top tether anchor points

E75532

Attaching a child seat with toptethers

WARNINGDo not attach a tether strap toanything other than the correcttether anchor point.

Note: Where applicable, remove theluggage cover to ease installation. SeeLuggage Covers (page 202).1. Remove the head restraint. See Head

Restraints (page 129).WARNING

Make sure that the top tether strapis not slack or twisted and is properlylocated on the anchor point.

2. Route the tether strap to the anchorpoint.

E75531

3. Push the child seat back firmly toengage the ISOFIX lower anchor points.

4. Tighten the tether strap in line with thechild seat manufacturer's instructions.

27

Child Safety

CHILD SAFETY LOCKS

WARNINGYou cannot open the doors frominside if you have put the child safetylocks on.

Manual child safety locksNote: On vehicles with keyless entry, usethe spare key. See Keyless Entry (page41).

E78298

Left-hand sideTurn anti-clockwise to lock and clockwiseto unlock.

Right-hand sideTurn clockwise to lock and anti-clockwiseto unlock.

Electric child safety locksNote: Pressing the switch will also disablethe rear electric window switches.

E124779

28

Child Safety

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONAirbags

WARNINGSDo not modify the front of yourvehicle in any way. This couldadversely affect deployment of the

airbags.Original text according to ECER94.01: Extreme Hazard! Do not usea rearward facing child restraint on

a seat protected by an airbag in front of it!Wear a seat belt and keep sufficientdistance between yourself and thesteering wheel. Only when you use

the seat belt properly, can it hold you in aposition that allows the airbag to achieveits optimum effect. See Sitting in theCorrect Position (page 126).

Have repairs to the steering wheel,steering column, seats, airbags andseat belts carried out by a properly

trained technician.Keep the areas in front of the airbagsfree from obstruction. Do not affixanything to or over the airbag covers.Do not poke sharp objects into areaswhere airbags are fitted. This coulddamage and adversely affect

deployment of the airbags.Use seat covers designed for seatswith side airbags. Have these fittedby a properly trained technician.

Note: You will hear a loud bang and see acloud of harmless powdery residue if anairbag deploys. This is normal.Note: Only wipe airbag covers with a dampcloth.

Driver and front passenger airbags

E74302

The driver and front passenger airbags willdeploy during significant frontal collisionsor collisions that are up to 30 degrees fromthe left or the right. The airbags will inflatewithin a few thousandths of a second anddeflate on contact with the occupants,thus cushioning forward body movement.During minor frontal collisions, overturns,rear collisions and side collisions, the driverand front passenger airbags will notdeploy.

Driver knee airbag

CAUTIONDo not attempt to open the driverknee airbag cover.

The driver knee airbag will deploy duringfrontal collisions or collisions that are upto 30 degrees from the left or the right. Theairbag will inflate within a few thousandthsof a second and deflate on contact withthe occupants, thus providing a cushionbetween the driver’s knees and the steeringcolumn. During overturns, rear collisionsand side collisions, the knee airbag will notdeploy.For item location: See At a Glance (page10).

29

Occupant protection

Note: The knee airbag has a lowerdeployment threshold than the frontairbags. During a minor collision, it ispossible that only the knee airbag deploys.

Side airbags

E72658

Side airbags are fitted inside the seatbackof the front seats. A label indicates thatside airbags are fitted to your vehicle.The side airbags will deploy duringsignificant lateral collisions. The airbagswill inflate within a few thousandths of asecond and deflate on contact with theoccupants, thus providing protection forthe chest and shoulder areas. During minorlateral collisions, overturns, front collisionsand rear collisions, the side airbags will notdeploy.

Curtain airbags

E75004

Curtain airbags are fitted inside the trimpanels over the front and rear sidewindows. Moulded badges in the B-pillartrim panels indicate that curtain airbagsare fitted to your vehicle.The curtain airbags will deploy duringsignificant lateral collisions. The airbag willinflate within a few thousandths of asecond and deflate on contact with theoccupants, thus providing protection forthe head. During minor lateral collisions,front collisions, rear collisions, or overturnsthe curtain airbags will not deploy.

Seat beltsWARNINGS

Wear a seat belt and keep sufficientdistance between yourself and thesteering wheel. Only when you use

the seat belt properly, can it hold you in aposition to achieve its optimum effect. SeeSitting in the Correct Position (page126).

Never use a seat belt for more thanone person.Use the correct buckle for each seatbelt.Do not use a seat belt that is slackor twisted.Do not wear thick clothing. The seatbelt must fit tightly around your bodyto achieve its optimum effect.Position the shoulder strap of theseat belt over the centre of yourshoulder and position the lap strap

tightly across your hips.

30

Occupant protection

The driver and front passenger seat beltretractors are fitted with a seat beltpretensioner. Seat belt pretensioners havea lower deployment threshold than theairbags. During minor collisions, it ispossible that only the seat beltpretensioners will deploy.

Status after a collision

WARNINGSeat belts subjected to strain, as aresult of an accident, should berenewed and the anchorages

checked by a properly trained technician.

FASTENING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNINGInsert the tongue into the buckle untilyou hear a distinct click. You havenot fastened the seat belt properly

if you do not hear a click.

Note: The seat belt tongues are designedso that you can only insert them into thecorrect buckle.

E74124

E74127

Pull the belt out steadily. It may lock if youpull it sharply or if the vehicle is on a slope.Press the red button on the buckle torelease the belt. Let it retract completelyand smoothly.

Second row centre seat belt

E74125

2

1

3

31

Occupant protection

The retractor for the rear centre seat beltis located in the roof.To fasten the seat belt:1. Pull the belt out steadily. It may lock if

you pull it sharply or if the vehicle is ona slope.

2. Insert the smaller tongue into the blackbuckle to the right of the centre seat.

3. Pull the larger tongue across the lapand insert it into the buckle to the leftof the centre seat.

Note: If in constant use, you can leave thebelt buckled in the black buckle. When it isnot in use, or when you fold or move the rearseats, you should release the belt from theblack buckle.

E74128

Press the red button on the left buckle torelease the belt. Let it retract.Press the button on the side of the blackbuckle to release the belt. Let it retractcompletely and smoothly to the retractorin the roof.

SEAT BELT HEIGHTADJUSTMENT

E73135

To raise the height, grasp the D-ring andmove the pivot up.To lower the height, grasp the D-ring, holdthe locking button on the height adjusterpressed and move the pivot down.Note: Lifting the slider slightly whilepressing the locking button makes it easierto release the locking mechanism.

SEAT BELT REMINDER

WARNINGThe occupant protection system willonly provide optimum protectionwhen you use the seat belt properly.

The seat belt reminder warninglamp illuminates and an audiblewarning will sound if the driver's

or front seat passenger's seat belt has notbeen fastened and the vehicle exceeds arelatively low speed. It will also illuminateif the driver's or front seat passenger's seatbelt is unfastened when the vehicle ismoving. The audible warning and warninglamp will go off after seven minutes.

32

Occupant protection

Deactivating the seat beltreminderSee your dealer.

USING SEAT BELTS DURINGPREGNANCY

E68587

WARNINGPosition the seat belt correctly foryour safety and that of your unbornchild. Do not use only the lap strap

or the shoulder strap.

Position the lap strap comfortably acrossyour hips and low beneath your pregnantabdomen. Position the shoulder strapbetween your breasts, above and to theside of your pregnant abdomen.

DISABLING THE PASSENGERAIRBAG

WARNINGMake sure that the passenger airbagis disabled when using a rearwardfacing child restraint on the front

passenger seat.

E71313

Fitting the passenger airbagdeactivation switch

WARNINGIf you need to fit a child restraint ona seat protected by an operationalairbag in front of it, have a passenger

airbag deactivation switch fitted. Ask yourdealer for further information.

Note: The key switch is located in the glovecompartment with an airbag deactivationlamp in the instrument panel.If the airbag warning lamp illuminates orflashes when you are driving, this indicatesa malfunction. See Warning Lamps andIndicators (page 85). Remove the childrestraint and have the system checkedimmediately.

Disabling the passenger airbag

A BE71312

DisabledAEnabledB

33

Occupant protection

Turn the switch to position A.When you switch the ignition on, check thatthe passenger airbag deactivation warninglamp illuminates.

Enabling the passenger airbagWARNING

Make sure that the passenger airbagis enabled when you are not using achild restraint on the front passenger

seat.

Turn the switch to position B.

34

Occupant protection

GENERAL INFORMATION ONRADIO FREQUENCIES

CAUTIONSThe radio frequency used by yourremote control can also be used byother short distance radio

transmissions (e.g. amateur radios,medical equipment, wireless headphones,remote controls and alarm systems). If thefrequencies are jammed, you will not beable to use your remote control. You canlock and unlock the doors with the key.

Check your vehicle is locked beforeleaving it unattended. This willsafeguard against any potential

malicious frequency blocking.

Note: You could unlock the doors if youpress the buttons on the remote controlunintentionally.The operating range between your remotecontrol and your vehicle varies dependingon the environment.

PROGRAMMING THE REMOTECONTROLYou can programme a maximum of eightremote controls to use with your vehicle(including any supplied with your vehicle).

Programming a new remotecontrol1. Insert the key in the ignition.2. Cycle the key from position 0 to II and

then back to 0 four times within sixseconds.

3. Leave the key in position 0 and pressany button on the remote controlwithin 10 seconds. You will receiveconfirmation via a chime or LED thatprogramming has been successful.

Note: Further remote controls may beprogrammed at this stage.4. Press any button on each additional

remote control within 10 seconds ofeach other.

Reprogramming the unlockingfunctionNote: When you press the unlock buttoneither all the doors are unlocked or only thedriver’s door is unlocked. Pressing the unlockbutton again unlocks all the doors.Press and hold the unlock and lock buttonson the remote key simultaneously for atleast four seconds with the ignition off. Thedirection indicators will flash twice toconfirm the change.To return to the original unlocking function,repeat the process.

CHANGING THE REMOTECONTROL BATTERY

E107998

Make sure that you dispose ofold batteries in anenvironmentally friendly way.

Seek advice from your local authorityregarding recycling.

Remote control with a folding keyblade

E1288092

1

35

Keys and Remote Controls

1. Insert a screwdriver in the positionshown and gently push the clip.

2. Press the clip down to release thebattery cover.

E128810

3. Carefully remove the cover.

E128811

4. Turn the remote control over to removethe battery.

5. Install a new battery (3V CR 2032) withthe + facing upwards.

6. Replace the battery cover.

Remote control without a foldingkey blade

1

2

1

E87964

1. Press and hold the pushbuttons on theedges to release the cover. Carefullyremove the cover.

2. Remove the key blade.

E105362

3

3. Twist a flat bladed screwdriver in theposition shown to separate the twohalves of the remote control.

36


E119190

4

4. Carefully insert the screwdriver in theposition shown to open the remotecontrol.

E125860

5

CAUTIONDo not touch the battery contacts orthe printed circuit board with thescrewdriver.

5. Carefully prise out the battery with thescrewdriver.

6. Install a new battery (3V CR 2032) withthe + facing downwards.

7. Assemble the two halves of the remotecontrol.

8. Install the key blade.

37


LOCKING AND UNLOCKING

CAUTIONCheck your vehicle is locked beforeleaving it unattended.

Central lockingYou can only centrally lock the doors if theyare all closed.Note: The driver’s door can be unlockedwith the key. This needs to be used if theremote control is not functioning.Note: Central locking also locks andunlocks the fuel filler flap.

Double lockingWARNING

Do not activate double locking whenpersons or animals are inside thevehicle. You will not be able to

unlock the doors from the inside if you havedouble locked them.

E71961

Double locking is a theft protection featurethat prevents someone from opening thedoors from the inside. You can only doublelock the doors if they are all closed.

Locking and unlockingconfirmationWhen you unlock the doors, the directionindicators will flash once.When you lock the doors, the directionindicators will flash twice.

Locking and unlocking the doorswith the key

B

E71962

A

B

A

UnlockALockB

Double locking the doors with thekeyTurn the key to the lock position twicewithin three seconds to double lock thedoors.

38

Locks

Locking and unlocking the doorsand the luggage compartment lidwith the remote control

E87379

A B C

UnlockALockBLuggage compartment lid unlock(press twice)

C

Locking the doors and the luggagecompartment lid with the remotecontrolPress button B once.

Double locking the doors and theluggage compartment lid with theremote controlPress button B twice within three seconds.

Locking and unlocking the doorsfrom insideDriver's door

A

B

E71958

Lock all doorsAUnlock all doorsB

Front and rear passenger doors

E98653

To lock the front and rear passenger doorsindividually, press the button and close thedoor when leaving the vehicle.

39

Locks

Luggage compartment lidOpening the luggage compartment lid

E125429

Opening the luggage compartment lidwith the remote controlPress button C on the remote control twicewithin three seconds.

Closing the luggage compartment lid

E71960

A recessed grip is incorporated inside theluggage compartment lid to facilitateclosing.

Automatic relockingThe doors will relock automatically if youdo not open a door within 45 seconds ofunlocking the doors with the remotecontrol. The door locks and the alarm willreturn to their previous state.

Reprogramming the unlockingfunctionThe unlocking function may bereprogrammed so that only the driver’sdoor is unlocked. See Programming theremote control (page 35).

GLOBAL OPENING ANDCLOSINGYou can also operate the electric windowswith the ignition off via the global openingand global closing function.Note: Global closing will only operate if youhave set the memory correctly for eachwindow. See Power Windows (page 75).

Global opening

E71955

To open all the windows, press and holdthe unlock button for at least threeseconds. Press either the lock or theunlock button again to stop the openingfunction.

40

Locks

Global closingVehicles without keyless entry

WARNINGTake care when using global closing.In an emergency, press a buttonimmediately to stop.

E71956

To close all the windows, press and holdthe lock button for at least three seconds.Press any button again to stop the closingfunction. The anti-trap function is alsoactive during global closing.

Vehicles with keyless entry

E87384

WARNINGTake care when using global closing.In an emergency, press the buttonon the driver’s door handle to stop.

Note: Global closing can be activated usingthe button on the driver’s door handle.Global opening and closing can also beactivated using the buttons on the passivekey.To close all the windows, press and holdthe button on the driver’s door handle forat least two seconds. The anti-trapfunction is also active during global closing.

KEYLESS ENTRYGeneral information

WARNINGThe keyless entry system may notfunction if the key is close to metalobjects or electronic devices such as

mobile phones.

Note: If the door handles are pulledrepeatedly during a short period of timewithout the presence of a valid passive key,the system will become inoperable for 30seconds.The passive entry system will not functionif:• The passive key frequencies are

jammed.• The passive key battery is flat.Note: If the passive entry system does notfunction, you will need to use the key bladeto lock and unlock your vehicle.The keyless system allows the driver tooperate the vehicle without the use of akey or remote control.

41

Locks

E78276

Passive locking and unlocking requires avalid passive key to be located within oneof the three external detection ranges.These are located approximately one anda half metres from the driver and frontpassenger door handles and the luggagecompartment lid.

Passive keyThe vehicle can be locked and unlockedwith the passive key. The passive key canalso be used as a remote control. SeeLocking and Unlocking (page 38).

Locking the vehicleWARNING

The vehicle does not lock itselfautomatically. If no locking button ispressed, the vehicle will remain

unlocked.

Note: The ignition will automatically switchoff when you lock your vehicle from theoutside. This is to prevent the vehicle batteryfrom discharging.Note: If locking from the luggagecompartment lid, the passive key must bewithin the luggage compartment liddetection range.

E87384

E87435

Locking buttons are located on each of thefront doors and the luggage compartmentlid.To activate central locking and arm thealarm:• Press a locking button once.To activate double locking, to arm thealarm and the interior sensors:• Press a locking button twice within

three seconds.Note: Once activated, the vehicle willremain locked for approximately threeseconds. This is to allow you to pull a doorhandle and check if the vehicle is locked.When the delay period is over, the doors canbe opened again, provided the passive keyis within the respective detection range.

42

Locks

Luggage compartment lidNote: The luggage compartment lid cannotbe closed and will pop back up if the passivekey is located inside the luggagecompartment.Note: If a second valid passive key islocated within the luggage compartmentlid detection range, the luggagecompartment lid can be closed.

Unlocking the vehicleNote: If the vehicle remains locked forlonger than five days, the system will enteran energy-saving mode. This is to reducethe discharge of the vehicle battery. Whenthe vehicle is unlocked while in this mode,the reaction time of the system may be alittle longer than normal. Unlocking thevehicle once will deactivate theenergy-saving mode.

E78278

Pull one of the door handles or the luggagecompartment lid handle.Note: A valid passive key must be locatedwithin the detection range of that door.One long flash of the direction indicatorsconfirms that all the doors, the luggagecompartment lid and the fuel filler flaphave been unlocked and that the alarmhas been disarmed.

Unlocking only the driver's doorIf the unlocking function is reprogrammedso that only the driver’s door is unlocked (See Keys and Remote Controls (page35). ), note the following:If the driver’s door is the first door which isopened, the other doors and the luggagecompartment lid will remain locked. All theother doors can be unlocked from insidethe vehicle by pressing the unlock buttonnext to the driver’s door handle. Doors canbe unlocked individually by pulling theinterior door handles on those doors.If the front passenger door or one of therear doors is the first door which is opened,all the doors and the luggagecompartment lid will be unlocked.

Disabled keysAny keys left inside the vehicle interiorwhen it is locked will be disabled.A disabled key cannot be used to turn theignition on or start the engine.In order to use these passive keys again,they have to be enabled.To enable all your passive keys, unlock thevehicle using a passive key or the remotecontrol unlocking function.All passive keys will then be enabled if theignition is turned on or the vehicle is startedusing a valid key.

43

Locks

Locking and unlocking the doorswith the key blade

1

2

1

E87964

1. Carefully remove the cover.2. Remove the key blade and insert it into

the lock.

44

Locks

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONThe engine immobiliser is a theft protectionsystem that prevents someone fromstarting the engine with an incorrectlycoded key.

CODED KEYSNote: Do not shield your keys with metalobjects. This may prevent the receiver fromrecognising your key as a valid one.Note: Have all of your remaining keyserased and recoded if you lose a key. Askyour dealer for further information. Havereplacement keys recoded together withyour existing keys.If you lose a key, you can obtain areplacement from your Ford Dealer. Ifpossible, provide them with the keynumber from the tag provided with theoriginal keys. You can also obtainadditional keys from your Ford Dealer.

ARMING THE ENGINEIMMOBILISERThe engine immobiliser is armedautomatically a short time after you haveswitched the ignition off.

DISARMING THE ENGINEIMMOBILISERThe engine immobiliser is disarmedautomatically when you switch the ignitionon with a correctly coded key.If the message Immobiliser activeappears in the information display, yourkey has not been recognised. Remove thekey and try again.

If you are unable to start the engine with acorrectly coded key, this indicates amalfunction. The message Immobiliseractive will appear in the informationdisplay when you switch on the ignition.Have the immobiliser checkedimmediately.

45

Engine immobiliser

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONAlarm systemYour vehicle may be equipped with one ofthe following alarm systems:• Perimeter alarm.• Perimeter alarm with interior sensors.• Category one alarm with interior

sensors and battery back-up sounder.• Category one alarm with interior

sensors, battery back-up sounder andtilt sensors.

Perimeter alarmThe perimeter alarm is a deterrent againstunauthorised access to your vehiclethrough the doors and the bonnet. It alsoprotects the audio unit.

Interior sensorsVehicles without overhead console

E71401

Vehicles with overhead console

E131656

WARNINGThe sensors must not be covered up.Do not activate the alarm with fullguard if any persons, animals or other

moving objects are inside the vehicle.

The sensors act as a deterrent againstunauthorised intrusion by sensing anymovement within the vehicle.

Battery back-up sounderThe battery back-up sounder is an extraalarm system which will sound a sirenwhen the alarm is triggered. It is armeddirectly when you lock the vehicle. Thesounder has its own battery and will soundan alarm siren even if someonedisconnects the vehicle battery or thebattery back-up sounder itself.

Tilt sensorsThe tilt sensors detect if someoneattempts to steal a wheel or tow thevehicle away by sensing changes in theinclination of the vehicle.Note: When travelling on a ferry with thealarm armed, deactivate the tilt sensors byselecting reduced guard. This will preventthe alarm from being triggered by themovement.

Triggering the alarmOnce armed, the alarm is triggered in anyof the following ways:• If someone opens a door, the tailgate

or the bonnet without a valid key orremote control.

• If someone removes the audio ornavigation system.

• If the ignition is turned to position I, IIor III without a valid key.

• If the interior sensors detect movementwithin the vehicle.

46

Alarm

• On vehicles with a battery back-upsounder, if someone disconnects thevehicle battery or the battery back-upsounder itself.

• If the tilt sensors detect a change in theinclination of the vehicle.

If the alarm is triggered, the alarm horn willsound for 30 seconds and the hazardwarning flasher will flash for five minutes.Any further attempts to perform one of theabove will trigger the alarm again.

Full and reduced guardFull guardFull guard is the standard setting.In full guard, the interior and tilt sensorsare activated when you arm the alarm.Note: This may result in false alarms ifanimals or moving objects are inside thevehicle or, on vehicles with tilt sensors, whentravelling on a ferry.Note: False alarms can also be triggeredby the auxiliary heater See Auxiliary Heater(page 120). If you are using the auxiliaryheater, direct the air flow towards thefootwell.

Reduced guardIn reduced guard, the interior and tiltsensors are deactivated when you arm thealarm.Note: You can set the alarm to reducedguard for the current ignition cycle only. Thenext time you switch on the ignition, thealarm will be reset to full guard.

Ask on ExitYou can set the information display to askyou each time which level of guard youwish to set.

If you select Ask on Exit, the messageReduced guard? appears in theinstrument cluster display each time youswitch the ignition off.If you wish to arm the alarm with reducedguard, press the OK button when thismessage appears.If you wish to arm the alarm with full guard,leave the vehicle without pressing the OKbutton.

Selecting full or reduced guardNote: Selecting Reduced does not set thealarm permanently to reduced guard. It setsit to reduced guard only for the currentignition cycle. If you regularly set the alarmto reduced guard, select Ask on Exit.

E70499

E74509

Full Guard

Alarm

ReducedAsk on Exit

47

Alarm

1. Press the right arrow button on thesteering wheel to enter the main menu.

2. Highlight Setup with the up and downarrow buttons and press the right arrowbutton.

3. Highlight Alarm and press the rightarrow button.

4. Highlight Reduced or Full guard. Ifyou prefer to be asked each time youswitch off the ignition, select Ask onExit.

5. Press the OK button to confirm theselection.

6. Press the left arrow button to exit themenu. To return to the trip computerdisplay directly, hold the left arrowbutton pressed.

Information messagesSee Information Messages (page 102).

ARMING THE ALARMTo arm the alarm, lock the vehicle. SeeLocks (page 38).

DISARMING THE ALARMVehicles without keyless entryPerimeter alarmDisarm and silence the alarm by unlockingthe doors with the key and switching theignition on with a correctly coded key, orunlocking the doors or the luggagecompartment lid with the remote control.

Category one alarmDisarm and silence the alarm by unlockingthe doors with the key and switching theignition on with a correctly coded keywithin 12 seconds, or unlocking the doorsor the luggage compartment lid with theremote control.

Vehicles with keyless entryNote: A valid passive key must be locatedwithin the detection range of that door forkeyless entry. See Keyless Entry (page 41).

Perimeter alarmDisarm and silence the alarm by unlockingthe doors and switching the ignition on, orunlocking the doors or the luggagecompartment lid with the remote control.

Category one alarmDisarm and silence the alarm by unlockingthe doors and switching the ignition onwithin 12 seconds, or unlocking the doorsor the luggage compartment lid with theremote control.

48

Alarm

ADJUSTING THE STEERINGWHEEL

WARNINGNever adjust the steering wheelwhen the vehicle is moving.

Note: Make sure that you are sitting in thecorrect position. See Sitting in the CorrectPosition (page 126).

1

2

2

E95178

3E95179

WARNINGMake sure that you fully engage thelocking lever when returning it to itsoriginal position.

AUDIO CONTROL

E72288

A

C

BD

E

Volume upASeek upBVolume downCSeek downDModeE

ModePress and hold the mode button to selectthe audio source.Press the mode button to:• tune the radio to the next preset

station• play the next CD• play the other side of a cassette tape• accept an incoming telephone call.• end a telephone call.

49

Steering Wheel

SeekPress a seek button to:• tune the radio to the next station up or

down the frequency band• play the next or the previous CD track• fast forward or rewind the cassette

tape.Press and hold a seek button to:• tune the radio up or down the

frequency band• seek through a CD track.

50

Steering Wheel

WINDSCREEN WIPERS

B

C

D

AE70696

Single wipeAIntermittent wipeBNormal wipeCHigh speed wipeD

Intermittent wipe

E70315

BA

C

Short wipe intervalAIntermittent wipeBLong wipe intervalC

AUTOWIPERS

CAUTIONSDo not switch autowipers on in dryweather conditions. The rain sensoris very sensitive and the wipers may

operate if dirt, mist or flies hit thewindscreen.

Replace the wiper blades as soon asthey begin to leave bands of waterand smears. If you do not replace

them, the rain sensor will continue todetect water on the windscreen and thewipers will operate, even though themajority of the windscreen is dry.

Fully defrost the windscreen in icyconditions before you switchautowipers on.Switch autowipers off before youenter a car wash.

E70315

BA

C

High sensitivityAOnBLow sensitivityC

If you switch autowipers on, the wipers willnot cycle until water is detected on thewindscreen. The rain sensor will thencontinuously measure the amount of wateron the windscreen and adjust the speedof the wipers automatically.

51

Wipers and Washers

Adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensorusing the rotary control. With lowsensitivity, the wipers will operate whenthe sensor detects a lot of water on thewindscreen. With high sensitivity, thewipers will operate if the sensor detects asmall amount of water on the windscreen.

WINDSCREEN WASHERS

WARNINGDo not operate the windscreenwashers for more than 10 secondsor when the reservoir is empty.

Note: The washer jets are heated when theignition is on.

E70776

ADJUSTING THE WINDSCREENWASHER JETS

E73425

The eye ball jets can be adjusted preciselyusing a pin.

REAR WINDOW WIPER ANDWASHERSIntermittent wipe

E70777

Reverse gear wipeThe rear window wiper will operateautomatically when you select reverse gearif the wiper lever is in position B, C or D.

52

Wipers and Washers

WasherWARNING

Do not operate the rear windowwasher for more than 10 seconds orwhen the reservoir is empty.

E70777

Pull the lever fully towards the steeringwheel and hold it to operate the washer.

HEADLAMP WASHERSThe headlamp washers will operate withthe windscreen washers when theheadlamps are on.Note: To stop the washer fluid reservoiremptying quickly, the headlamp washerswill not operate every time that you use thewindscreen washers.

CHECKING THE WIPERBLADES

E66644

Run the tip of your fingers over the edge ofthe blade to check for roughness.Clean the wiper blade lips with waterapplied with a soft sponge.

CHANGING THE WIPERBLADESWindscreen wiper blades

CAUTIONSSet the windscreen wipers in theservice position to change the wiperblades.You can use the service position inwinter to provide easier access to thewiper blades for freeing them from

snow and ice. Make sure that the outsideof the windscreen is free from snow andice before using the wipers.

Note: The windscreen wiper blades aredifferent lengths. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 55). If you installwiper blades of the wrong length, the rainsensor may not work correctly.

53

Wipers and Washers

Set the windscreen wipers in the serviceposition.

E75184

A

E75188

Switch off the ignition and move the wiperlever to position A within three seconds.Release the lever when the windscreenwipers have moved to the service position.Lift the wiper arms.

E728991

2

Install in the reverse order.Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locksinto place.

Rear window wiper blades

E93783

1

2

E93784

3

5

4

E93785

54

Wipers and Washers

6

E93786

Install in the reverse order.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSWindscreen wiper blade lengths

Dimension in mm (inches)Item

Right-handLeft-hand

700 (27.6)750 (29.5)Vehicles with autowipers

650 (25.6)750 (29.5)Vehicles without autowipers

55

Wipers and Washers

LIGHTING CONTROLLighting control positions

E70718

A B C

OffASide and tail lampsBHeadlampsC

Parking lampsCAUTION

Prolonged use of the parking lampswill discharge the battery.

Switch off the ignition.

Both sidesSet the lighting control to position B.

One side

E75505

A

B

Right-hand sideALeft-hand sideB

Main and dipped beam

E70725

Pull the lever fully towards the steeringwheel to switch between main and dippedbeam.

Headlamp flasherPull the lever slightly towards the steeringwheel.

56

Lighting

Home safe lightingSwitch the ignition off and pull thedirection indicator lever towards thesteering wheel to switch the headlampson. You will hear a short tone. Theheadlamps will go off automatically afterthree minutes with any door open, or 30seconds after the last door has beenclosed.With all doors closed, but within the 30second delay, opening any door will resultin the three minute timer starting again.The home safe lights can be cancelled byeither pulling the direction indicator levertowards the steering wheel again or byturning the ignition switch on.

DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPSThe lamps will illuminate when the ignitionis on.

AUTOLAMPS

E70719

Note: If you have switched autolamps on,you can only switch the main beam on whenautolamps has switched the headlamps on.

The headlamps will come on and go offautomatically depending on the ambientlight.

AUTOMATIC MAIN BEAMCONTROL

WARNINGSThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention. A manual

override may be necessary if the systemfails to switch the main beam on or off.

A manual override may be requiredwhen approaching other road userssuch as cyclists.Do not use the system in fog.

CAUTIONSIn cold and severe weather conditionsthe system may not function. Amanual override may be necessary in

these cases.Reflective road signs may be detectedas oncoming traffic and theheadlamps may be switched to

dipped beam.If the lights of oncoming vehicles arehidden by obstacles (for exampleguard rails) the system may not

deactivate the main beam.Always fit Ford Original Parts whenreplacing headlamp bulbs. Otherbulbs may reduce system

performance.Check and replace wiper bladesregularly to ensure the camera sensorhas a clear view through the

windscreen. Replacement wiper bladesmust be the correct length.

57

Lighting

Note: Keep the windscreen free fromobstructions such as bird droppings, insectsand snow or ice.The system will automatically switch onmain beam if it is dark enough and no othertraffic is present. If it detects anapproaching vehicle’s headlamps or taillamps, or street lighting ahead the systemwill switch off main beam before it candistract other road users. Dipped beamswill remain on.A camera sensor is centrally mountedbehind the windscreen of the vehicle, andmonitors conditions continuously to decidewhen to switch the main beam off and on.Once the system is active the main beamwill switch on if:• It is dark enough to require the use of

main beams and• there is no traffic or street lighting

ahead and• vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h

(25 mph).The main beam will switch off if:• The ambient light is high enough that

main beam is not required.• An approaching vehicle's headlamps

or tail lamps are detected.• Street lighting is detected.• Vehicle speed falls below 25 km/h (16

mph).• The camera sensor is too hot or

becomes blocked.

Activating the systemSwitch on the system using the informationdisplay and autolamps. See InformationDisplays (page 89). See Autolamps(page 57).

E70719

Turn the switch to the autolamps position.Note: The system may take a short time toinitialise after first switching the ignition on,especially in very dark conditions. The mainbeam will not automatically switch onduring this period.

Setting the system sensitivityThe system has three sensitivity levelswhich can be accessed via the informationdisplay. See Information Displays (page89).The sensitivity determines the speed atwhich the main beam will be restored afterdetected traffic leaves the field of view.

Manually overriding the system

E70725

58

Lighting

Use the main beam lever to switchbetween main beam and dipped beam.Note: This is a temporary override and thesystem will return to automatic operationafter a short period.To permanently deactivate the system usethe information display menu or turn thelighting control switch from autolamps toheadlamps.

FRONT FOG LAMPS

E70721

WARNINGOnly use the front fog lamps whenvisibility is considerably restricted byfog, snow or rain.

REAR FOG LAMPS

E70720

WARNINGSOnly use the rear fog lamps whenvisibility is restricted to less than 50metres (164 feet).Do not use the rear fog lamps whenit is raining or snowing and visibilityis more than 50 metres (164 feet).

ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS- VEHICLES WITH: ADAPTIVEFRONT LIGHTING/XENONHEADLAMPSTo adjust the headlamps for driving on theleft or right hand side of the road, see yourdealer.

HEADLAMP LEVELLINGNote: Vehicles with Xenon headlamps areequipped with automatic headlamplevelling.

E70722A B

Raised headlamp beamsALowered headlamp beamsB

You can adjust the level of the headlampbeams according to the vehicle load.

59

Lighting

Recommended headlamp levelling switch positions

Switch positionLoad in luggagecompartment

Load

Third row seatsSecond rowseatsFront seats

0---1-2

0 (0.5)**-2-1-2

1 (0.5)**--31-2

3 (0.5)**Max*-31-2

4 (1.5)**Max*--1* See Vehicle Identification Plate (page 265).** Vehicles with active suspension.

ADAPTIVE HEADLAMPS

E72897

A

B

A

B

60

Lighting

without AFSAwith AFSB

The AFS adjusts the headlamp dippedbeam depending on vehicle direction andspeed. It improves visibility when you aredriving at night and helps to reduceheadlamp glare for oncoming drivers.The system will not operate when thevehicle is stationary, when you haveswitched on the daytime running lamps orwhen you have selected reverse gear.

A message will appear in the informationdisplay if the system malfunctions. SeeInformation Messages (page 102). Theheadlamps will move to a fixed central ordipped position. Have the system checkedas soon as possible.

Cornering lamps

E72898

B

A

B

A

Headlamp beamACornering lamp beamB

The cornering lamps illuminate the insideof a corner when you are turning.

61

Lighting

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

E71943

For item location: See At a Glance (page10).

DIRECTION INDICATORS

E70727

Note: Tap the lever up or down to make thedirection indicators flash only three times.

INTERIOR LAMPSCourtesy lamp

CBA

E71945

OffADoor contactBOnC

If you set the switch to position B, thecourtesy lamp will come on when youunlock or open a door or the luggagecompartment lid. If you leave a door openwith the ignition switch off, the courtesylamp will go off automatically after sometime to prevent the vehicle battery fromdischarging. To switch it back on, switchon the ignition for a short time.The courtesy lamp will also come on whenyou switch off the ignition. It will go offautomatically after a short time or whenyou start or restart the engine.If you set the switch to position C with theignition switch off, the courtesy lamp willcome on. It will go off automatically aftera short time to prevent the vehicle batteryfrom discharging. To switch it back on,switch on the ignition for a short time.

Reading lamps

E71946

If you switch off the ignition, the readinglamps will go off automatically after sometime to prevent the vehicle battery fromdischarging. To switch them back on,switch on the ignition for a short time.

62

Lighting

LED interior lighting

B

A

E131657

Individual lamp on and off switchAMaster on and off switchB

You can control all lamps using switch B.Note: If all lamps have been switched onby the driver's control, they cannot beswitched off independently.The lamps will come on when you unlockor open a door or the luggagecompartment lid. If you leave a door openwith the ignition switch off, all lamps willgo off automatically after some time toprevent the vehicle battery fromdischarging. To switch them back on,switch on the ignition for a short time.If you press and hold switch B for 3seconds all lamps will stay off regardlessof the doors or luggage compartment lidposition. Press the switch briefly again toreverse.

Vanity mirror lamps

A

B

E72900

OffAOnB

If you switch off the ignition, the vanitymirror lamps will go off automatically aftera short time to prevent the vehicle batteryfrom discharging. To switch them back on,switch on the ignition for a short time.

REMOVING A HEADLAMP

WARNINGHave Xenon bulbs changed by aproperly trained technician. There isa risk of electric shock.

1. Open the bonnet. See Opening andClosing the Bonnet (page 233).

63

Lighting

E72257

Note: When you remove the headlamp,make sure that the front screw remains inthe headlamp moulding.2. Remove the screws.

E88875

3. Disconnect the electrical connector.4. Pull the headlamp as far as possible

towards the centre of the vehicle anddisengage it from the lower fixing point.

5. Lift the outer side of the headlamp andremove it.

Note: When fitting the headlamp, makesure that you reconnect the electricalconnector properly.

Note: When fitting the headlamp, makesure that you fully engage the headlamp inthe lower fixing point.Note: When fitting the headlamp, makesure that the front screw is located in theheadlamp moulding before you install it.Note: When fitting the headlamp, tightenthe front screw first and then the rear screw.

CHANGING A BULB

WARNINGSSwitch the lights and the ignition off.

Let the bulb cool down beforeremoving it.Have Xenon bulbs changed by aproperly trained technician. There isa risk of electric shock.

CAUTIONSDo not touch the glass of the bulb.

Only fit bulbs of the correctspecification. See BulbSpecification Chart (page 73).

Note: The following instructions describehow to remove the bulbs. Fit replacementsin the reverse order unless otherwise stated.

HeadlampNote: Remove the covers to gain access tothe bulbs.

64

Lighting

A B C D

E72258

Direction indicatorAHeadlamp main beamBHeadlamp dipped beamCCornering lampD

Direction indicator1. Remove the headlamp. See

Removing a Headlamp (page 63).

2

3

E72259

2. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwiseand remove it.

3. Gently press the bulb into the bulbholder, turn it anti-clockwise andremove it.

Headlamp main beam1. Remove the headlamp. See


3

2

E72261

2. Disconnect the electrical connector.3. Release the clip and remove the bulb.

Headlamp dipped beam1. Remove the headlamp. See


3

2

E72260

2. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwiseand remove it.

3. Remove the bulb.

Cornering lamp1. Remove the headlamp. See


65

Lighting

3

2

E72262

2. Disconnect the electrical connector.3. Release the clip and remove the bulb.

Daytime running lampsNote: These are not serviceable items,please consult your dealer if they fail.

E126170

Side repeater

E72263

1. Carefully remove the side repeater.

E72291

2. Remove the bulb holder.3. Remove the bulb.

Approach lampNote: Position the mirror glass as farinwards as possible.

66

Lighting

1

E72264

1. Insert a screwdriver into the gapbetween the mirror housing and themirror glass and release the metalretaining clip.

E72265

2

3

2. Remove the lamp.3. Remove the bulb.

Front fog lamp and side lamp (S-MAX)1. Remove the headlamp to access the

fog lamp. See Removing aHeadlamp (page 63).

E126440

3

2

4

5

6

2. Disconnect the electrical connector.Note: You cannot separate the fog lampbulb from the bulb holder.3. Turn the fog lamp bulb holder

anti-clockwise and remove it.4. Disconnect the electrical connector.5. Turn the side lamp bulb holder

anti-clockwise and remove it.6. Remove the side lamp bulb.

67

Lighting

Front fog lamp and side lamp(Galaxy)

E126538

3

2

4

1

1. Remove the screw.2. Remove the lamp.3. Disconnect the fog lamp electrical

connector.Note: You cannot separate the fog lampbulb from the bulb holder.4. Turn the fog lamp bulb holder

anti-clockwise and remove it.

6

5

E72269

5. Turn the side lamp bulb holderanti-clockwise and remove it.

6. Remove the side lamp bulb.

Rear lamps (S-MAX)Direction indicator, tail and brake lampNote: These are not serviceable items,please consult your dealer if they fail.

E126274

Reversing lamp, tail lamp and fog lamp

E72271

1. Remove the trim panel.

68

Lighting

E74076

2. Remove the wing nuts.3. Remove the lamp.4. Disconnect the electrical connector.

E126303

5. Remove the screws.6. Remove the bulb holder.7. Gently press the bulb into the bulb

holder, turn it anti-clockwise andremove it.

Rear lamp (Galaxy)Direction indicator, tail and brake lamp

E75380


E72791

2. Remove the wing nuts.

69

Lighting

E72792

3. Remove the lamp.4. Disconnect the electrical connector.

E72793

Note: On some vehicles the tail lamps areLED. These are not serviceable items, pleaseconsult your dealer if they fail.5. Remove the screw.6. Remove the bulb holder.7. Gently press the bulb into the bulb


Reversing lamp, tail lamp and fog lamp

E72794


E72795

2. Remove the wing nuts.3. Remove the lamp.4. Disconnect the electrical connector.

E126393

5. Remove the screw.

70

Lighting

6. Remove the bulb holder.7. Gently press the bulb into the bulb


Central high mounted brake lampNote: These are not serviceable items,please consult your dealer if they fail.

Number plate lamp

3

2

1

E72789

1. Carefully release the spring clip.2. Remove the lamp.3. Turn the bulb anti-clockwise and

remove it.

Interior lampsVehicles with LED lampsNote: These are not serviceable items,please consult your dealer if they fail.

Vehicles without interior sensors

3

2

E72788

1. Carefully prise out the lens.2. Remove the lens.3. Remove the bulb.

Vehicles with interior sensors

2

3

E72787


71

Lighting

Reading lampsVehicles without interior sensors

33

2

E72796


Vehicles with interior sensors

22

1

E72786

1. Carefully prise out the lamp.2. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise

and remove it.

E739393

3. Remove the bulb.

Vanity mirror lamp

E72785

1. Carefully prise out the lamp.2. Remove the bulb.

72

Lighting

Luggage compartment lamp andtailgate lamp

E72784

1. Carefully prise out the lamp.2. Remove the bulb.

BULB SPECIFICATION CHART

Power (watt)SpecificationLamp

21PY21WFront direction indicator

55H1Headlamp main beam

55H7Headlamp dipped beam

55H1Cornering lamp

5W5WSide repeater

5W5WApproach lamp

35H8Front fog lamp (S-MAX)

55HB4Front fog lamp (Galaxy)

5W5WSide lamp

21PY21WRear direction indicator

21P21WRear fog lamp

21P21WReversing lamp

5W5WNumber plate lamp

10FestoonInterior lamp

73

Lighting

Power (watt)SpecificationLamp

5BA9sReading lamp

5W5WVanity mirror lamp

6W6WLuggage compartment lamp

74

Lighting

POWER WINDOWS

WARNINGDo not operate the electric windowsunless they are free from obstruction.

Note: If you operate the switches oftenduring a short period of time, the systemmight become inoperable for a certain timeto prevent damage due to overheating.Note: You can operate the windows forseveral minutes after you switch off theignition. They will be deactivated as soonas a door is opened.Note: If you operate both the switch on therelevant door and the switch for thatwindow on the driver’s door at the sametime, the window will stop moving.Switch on the ignition to operate theelectric windows.

Global opening and global closingYou can also operate the electric windowswith the ignition off via the global openingand global closing function. See GlobalOpening and Closing (page 40).Note: Global opening and global closingwill open or close the windowsautomatically only on vehicles equippedwith four electric windows.Note: Global closing will only operate if youhave set the memory correctly for eachwindow.

Driver’s door switches

E121510

You can operate all the windows with theswitches on the door trim panel of thedriver’s door.

Front and rear passengers’ doorswitches

E70849

Opening and closing the windowsautomaticallyPress or lift the switch to the second actionpoint and release it. Press or lift it again tostop the windows.

75

Windows and Mirrors

Safety switch for rear windowsWARNING

On some vehicles, pressing theswitch will also lock the rear doorsfrom inside. See Child Safety

Locks (page 28).

Note: You can always operate the rearwindows from the driver’s door.

E121511

A switch in the driver’s door disables therear electric window switches.The light in the switch illuminates and thelights in the rear window switches go offwhen the rear windows are disabled.

Anti-trap functionWARNING

Careless closing of the windows canoverride the protection function andcause injuries.

The electric windows will stopautomatically while closing and reversesome distance if there is an obstacle in theway.

Overriding the anti-trap function

CAUTIONWhile you close the window for thethird time, the anti-trap function isdisabled. Make sure there are no

obstacles in the way of the closing window.

To override this protection function whenthere is a resistance, for example, in thewinter, proceed as follows:1. Close the window twice until it reaches

the resistance and let it reverse.2. Close the window a third time to the

resistance. The anti-trap function isdisabled and you cannot close thewindow automatically. The windowwill override the resistance and you canclose it fully.

3. If the window does not close after thethird attempt, have it checked by aproperly trained technician.

Resetting the memory of theelectric windows

WARNINGThe anti-trap function is deactivateduntil you have reset the memory.

After the battery has been disconnectedfrom the vehicle you must reset thememory separately for each window:1. Lift the switch until the window is fully

closed. Hold the switch lifted for onemore second.

2. Release the switch and lift it again, twoor three times, for one more second.

3. Open the window and try to close itautomatically.

4. Reset and repeat procedure if thewindow does not close automatically.

76

Windows and Mirrors

Safety modeWARNING

The anti-trap function is not activeduring this procedure.

If the system detects a malfunction, itenters a safety mode. The windows willmove for only about 0.5 seconds at a timeand then stop again. Close the windowsby pressing the switch again when thewindows stop moving. Have this checkedimmediately.

EXTERIOR MIRRORS

WARNINGDo not overestimate the distance ofthe objects that you see in theconvex mirror. Objects seen in

convex mirrors will appear smaller andfurther away than they actually are.

Manual folding mirrorsFoldingPush the mirror towards the door windowglass.

UnfoldingMake sure that you fully engage the mirrorin its support when returning it to itsoriginal position.

ELECTRIC EXTERIORMIRRORS

A CB

E70846

Left-hand mirrorAOffBRight-hand mirrorC

Mirror tilting positions

E70847

The electric exterior mirrors are fitted witha heating element that will defrost ordemist the mirror glass. See HeatedWindows and Mirrors (page 120).

77

Windows and Mirrors

Electric folding mirrorsAutomatic folding and unfoldingNote: If the mirrors have been folded usingthe manual fold button they can only beunfolded using the manual fold button.The mirrors will fold automatically whenyou lock the vehicle with the key, theremote control or a keyless entry systemrequest. The mirrors will unfold when youunlock the vehicle with the key, the remotecontrol, a keyless entry system request,the driver's interior door handle or startingthe engine.

Manual folding and unfoldingThe electric folding mirrors operate withthe ignition on.Note: You can operate the mirrors (mirrortilting and folding) for several minutes afteryou switch off the ignition. They will bedeactivated as soon as a door is opened.

E72623

Press the button to fold or unfold themirrors.

If you press the switch again while themirrors are moving, they will stop andreverse the direction of movement.Note: When the mirrors are operated oftenduring a short period of time, the systemmay become inoperable for a period of timeto prevent damage due to overheating.

Reverse mirror dippingDepending on the switch position (A or C),the relevant exterior mirror will dipwhenever you select reverse gear, givingyou a view of the kerb.Note: You can disable this feature byleaving the switch in position B.The exterior mirror will return to the originalposition:• If the vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h

(6 mph).• Approximately 10 seconds after reverse

gear has been disengaged.• If the switch is returned to position B.When you first use this feature, the mirrorwill dip to a preset position. This positioncan be adjusted using the followingsequence:1. Turn the ignition on. Do not start the

engine.2. Select the desired exterior mirror (A or

C).3. Select reverse gear, the selected

exterior mirror will adjust to a presetposition.

4. Adjust the mirror to the required dippedposition.

5. Disengage reverse gear or press andhold the desired memory pre-setbutton until a single chime sounds toconfirm. See Memory Function (page142).

The settings will be stored automatically.

78

Windows and Mirrors

AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR

E71028

The auto-dimming mirror will adjustautomatically when hit by glaring lightfrom behind. It will not work when you haveselected reverse gear.

REAR QUARTER WINDOWSManual rear quarter windowsOpening

1

E72126

2

E95383

Closing

1

E95384

79

Windows and Mirrors

2

E95385

Note: Make sure that the lever is securelyengaged in its catch.

Electric rear quarter windowsSwitch on the ignition to operate the rearquarter windows.

E72127

BLIND SPOT MONITORBlind spot information system(BLIS)

WARNINGSThe system is not designed toprevent contact with other vehiclesor objects. The system only provides

a warning to assist you in detectingvehicles in the blind spot zones. Thesystem will not detect obstacles,pedestrians, motorcyclists or cyclists.

Do not use the system as areplacement for using the side andrear view mirrors, and looking over

your shoulder before changing lanes. Thesystem is not a replacement for carefuldriving and is only to be used as an aid.

The system is a convenience feature thataids the driver in detecting vehicles thatmay have entered the blind spot zone (A).The detection area is on both sides of thevehicle extending rearwards from theexterior mirrors to approximately 3 metres(10 feet) beyond the bumper. The systemwill alert you if certain vehicles enter theblind spot zone whilst driving.

A

A

E124788

80

Windows and Mirrors

Using the systemThe system displays a yellow indicatorlocated in the exterior mirrors.

E124736

Note: Both indicators will illuminate brieflywhen you switch the ignition on to confirmthat the system is operational.Note: On vehicles with automatictransmission, the system is active only in S,D and N.The system is only active when you exceed10 km/h (6 mph). The system istemporarily deactivated when you selectreverse gear.

System detection and alertsThe system will trigger the alert for vehiclesthat enter the blind spot zone from the rearor merge from the side. Vehicles that youpass, or vehicles that enter the blind spotzone from the front, will only trigger thealert after the vehicle has remained in theblind spot zone for a short period of time.Note: Vehicles that pass through the blindzone quickly (typically less than 2 seconds)will not trigger the alert.The system consists of two radar sensorseach located behind the rear wheelshidden behind the bumpers.

CAUTIONSDo not place items such as bumperstickers in this area.Repairs to these areas using body fillerwill affect the performance of thesystem.

E124741

Detection limitationsThere may be certain instances wherevehicles entering and exiting the blind spotzones may not be detected.Instances which may cause non-detection:• Debris build up on the rear bumper

panels in the area of the sensors.• Certain manoeuvring of vehicles

entering and exiting the blind zone.• Vehicles passing through the blind zone

at high speed.• Severe weather conditions.• Several vehicles passing through the

blind zone following each other closely.

False alertsNote: False alerts are temporary and willself correct.There may be certain instances when thesystem will alert with no vehicle present inthe blind zone.

81

Windows and Mirrors

Circumstances where false alerts mayoccur:• Road guardrails.• Motorway concrete walls.• Construction areas.• Sharp turns around a building.• Bushes and trees.• Cyclists and motorcyclists.• Coming to a stop with a vehicle directly

behind but very close.

Turning the system on and offNote: The on or off position will remain untilmanually changed.You can turn the system on and off usingthe information display. See InformationDisplays (page 89).When you turn the system off no furtheralerts will be received. The BLIS warningindicator will illuminate. See WarningLamps and Indicators (page 85).

Detection errorsNote: The alert indicator in the mirror willnot illuminate.If the system senses a fault on eithersensor, the system warning symbol willilluminate and remain on. The informationdisplay will confirm the fault and indicatewhether the left or right side is affected.

Blocked sensor

WARNINGPrior to the system recognizing ablocked condition and issuing awarning, the number of missed

objects will increase.

CAUTIONThe sensors may not detect vehiclesin heavy rain or other conditions thatcause disruptive reflections.

Note: Keep the rear bumper areasurrounding the sensors free from dirt, iceand snow.If a sensor becomes blocked the systemperformance may degrade. A blockedsensor message may be displayed.The system will automatically return tonormal operation once two other vehicleshave been detected on both sides.

Trailer towing false alerts

CAUTIONVehicles fitted with a trailer towmodule not approved by us may notcorrectly be detected. Switch the

system off to avoid false alerts. SeeInformation Displays (page 89).

If the vehicle is fitted with a trailer towmodule approved by us, the system willdetect a connected trailer and deactivate.A confirmation message will be shown inthe information display. See InformationMessages (page 102). The BLIS warningindicator will illuminate. See WarningLamps and Indicators (page 85).

82

Windows and Mirrors

GAUGESType 1 and 2

BA C D

E72984

TachometerAEngine coolant temperature gaugeBFuel gaugeCSpeedometerD

83

Instrument Cluster

Type 3

A B

CDEE130765

TachometerASpeedometerBEngine coolant temperature gaugeCFuel gaugeDMessage centre. See Information Displays (page 89).E

Engine coolant temperature gaugeNote: On type 3 this gauge is shown withinthe message centre and will not bedisplayed unless required. See InformationDisplays (page 89).Shows the temperature of the enginecoolant. At normal operating temperature,the indicator will remain in the centresection.

CAUTIONDo not restart the engine until thecause of overheating has beenresolved.

If the indicator moves towards 120°C, theengine is overheating. Stop the engine,switch the ignition off and determine thecause once the engine has cooled down.See Engine Coolant Check (page 244).

84

Instrument Cluster

Fuel gaugeNote: On type 3 this gauge is shown withinthe message centre.The arrow adjacent to the fuel pumpsymbol tells you on which side of yourvehicle the fuel filler cap is located.

WARNING LAMPS ANDINDICATORSThe following warning lamps andindicators will illuminate briefly when youswitch the ignition on to confirm that thesystem is operational:• ABS• Airbag• Blind spot monitor• Brake system• Coolant temperature• Electric parking brake (EPB)• Engine• Frost• Ignition• Oil pressure• Stability control (ESP)If a warning or indicator lamp does notilluminate when the ignition is switchedon, this indicates a malfunction. Have thesystem checked by properly trainedtechnician.

ABS warning lampIf it illuminates when you aredriving, this indicates amalfunction. You will continue

to have normal braking (without ABS).Have the system checked by a properlytrained technician as soon as possible.

Airbag warning lampIf it illuminates when you aredriving, this indicates amalfunction. Have the system

checked by a properly trained technician.

Blind spot monitor indicator

E124823

It will illuminate when thisfeature is switched off or inconjunction with a message.

See Blind Spot Monitor (page 80). SeeInformation Messages (page 102).

Brake system lampIt illuminates when the parkingbrake is engaged.

WARNINGReduce your speed gradually andstop your vehicle as soon as it is safeto do so. Use your brakes with care.

If it illuminates when you are driving, checkthat the parking brake is not engaged. Ifthe parking brake is not engaged, thisindicates a malfunction. Have the systemchecked by a properly trained technicianimmediately.

Coolant temperature warninglamp

CAUTIONDo not resume your journey if itilluminates despite the level beingcorrect. Have the system checked by

a properly trained technician immediately.

85

Instrument Cluster

If it stays on after starting orilluminates when driving, thisindicates a malfunction. Stop

your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do soand switch the engine off. Check thecoolant level. See Engine Coolant Check(page 244).

Direction indicatorsFlashes during operation. Asudden increase in the rate offlashing warns of a failed

indicator bulb. See Changing a Bulb(page 64).

Engine warning lampIf it illuminates with the enginerunning, this indicates amalfunction. If it flashes when

you are driving, reduce the speed of yourvehicle immediately. If it continues toflash, avoid heavy acceleration ordeceleration. Have the system checked bya properly trained technician immediately.

CAUTIONIf the engine warning lamp illuminatesin conjunction with a message, havethe system checked as soon as

possible.

Electric parking brake (EPB)warning lamp

It will illuminate when an EPBwarning message is displayed inthe information display. See

Electric Parking Brake (page 167).

Forward alert indicator

E124824

It will illuminate when thisfeature is switched off. SeeForward alert function (page

187).

Front fog lamp indicatorIt will illuminate when you switchthe front fog lamps on.

Frost warning lampWARNING

Even if the temperature rises toabove 4ºC (39.2°F) there is noguarantee that the road is free of

hazards caused by inclement weather.

It will illuminate and glow amberwhen the outside airtemperature is between 4ºC

(39.2ºF) and 0ºC (32ºF). It will glow redwhen the temperature is below 0ºC(32ºF).

Glow plug indicatorSee Starting a Diesel Engine(page 149).

Headlamp indicatorIt will illuminate when you switchthe headlamp dipped beam orthe side and tail lamps on.

Ignition warning lampIf it illuminates when you aredriving, this indicates amalfunction. Switch off all

unnecessary electrical equipment. Havethe system checked by a properly trainedtechnician immediately.

86

Instrument Cluster

Lane departure warning indicatorIt will illuminate when thisfeature is switched off or inconjunction with a message. The

indicator will go out when you switch thesystem back on or when you switch theignition off. See Lane Departure Warning(page 192). See Information Messages(page 102).

Low fuel level warning lampIf it illuminates, refuel as soon aspossible.

Main beam indicatorIt will illuminate when you switchthe headlamp main beam on. Itwill flash when you use the

headlamp flasher.

Message indicatorIt will illuminate when a newmessage is stored in theinformation display. See

Information Messages (page 102).

Oil pressure warning lampCAUTION

Do not resume your journey if the oilpressure warning lamp illuminatesdespite the oil level being correct.

Have the system checked by a properlytrained technician immediately.

If the lamp stays on after startingor illuminates during a journey,this indicates a malfunction.

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe todo so and switch the engine off. Check theengine oil level. See Engine Oil Check(page 244).

Rear fog lamp indicatorIt will illuminate when you switchthe rear fog lamps on.

Seat belt reminderSee Seat belt reminder (page32).

Shift indicatorIt will illuminate to inform youthat shifting to a higher gear maygive better fuel economy and

lower CO2 emissions. It will not illuminateduring periods of high acceleration, brakingor when the clutch pedal is pressed.

Stability control (ESP) warninglamp

While driving, it flashes duringactivation of the system. Afterswitching on the ignition, if it

does not illuminate or illuminatescontinuously while driving, this indicates amalfunction. During a malfunction, thesystem switches off. Have the systemchecked by a properly trained technicianas soon as possible.

If you switch ESP off, the warning lamp willilluminate. The lamp will go out when youswitch the system back on or when youswitch the ignition off.

Start-stop indicatorIt will illuminate to inform youwhen the engine shuts down orin conjunction with a message.

See Using start-stop (page 152). SeeInformation Messages (page 102).

87

Instrument Cluster

AUDIBLE WARNINGS ANDINDICATORSSwitching the chimes on and offYou can deactivate certain chimes.To set which chimes should sound:

E70499



3. Highlight Chimes and press the rightarrow button.

4. Highlight the chime and press the OKbutton to switch the chime on and off.

5. Press the left arrow button to exit themenu. Press and hold the left arrowbutton to return to the main menudisplay.

88

Instrument Cluster

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNINGDo not operate the informationdisplay controls when the vehicle ismoving.

Note: The information display will remainon for several minutes after you switch offthe ignition.Various systems on your vehicle can becontrolled using the buttons on yoursteering wheel. Corresponding informationis displayed in the information display.For detailed instructions on audio,navigation, phone etc. refer to theappropriate manual.

Controls

E70499

Press the up and down arrow buttons:• to scroll through the trip computer

displays• to scroll through and highlight the

options within a menu.Press the right arrow button:• to enter the main menu from the trip

computer displays• to enter a sub-menu.Press the left arrow button to exit a menu.Hold the left arrow button pressed at anytime to return to the main menu display(escape button).Note: The system will return to the tripcomputer displays automatically if you donot press any button for a period of time.Press the OK button to choose andconfirm a setting.

Instrument cluster functions

Type 3Type 2Type 1Function

XXXTrip computer

XXXInformation messages

XXXClock setup

XX-Display settings

XX-Park heater setup

89

Information Displays

Type 3Type 2Type 1Function

X--Navigation control

X--CD control

X--CD changer control

X--Radio control

X--Phone control

X--Auxiliary input control

Type 1

E80604

Press the up and down arrow buttons onthe steering wheel to scroll through the tripcomputer displays. See Trip Computer(page 98).

90


Menu structure

Information

Reset trip

BLIS

ECO MODE

Trip OdoAvg FuelAvg SpeedAll values

MessagesAuto StartStop

Gear ShiftingAnticipationSpeedFor more Info

Clock Set Clock24 Hour Mode12 Hour ModeE131626

Type 2

E74426

6.3Average Fuel

09:00

234.2 km

123456 km

l100km

Press the up and down arrow buttons onthe steering wheel to scroll through the tripcomputer displays. See Trip Computer(page 98).

91


Menu structure

Reset Trip

BLISESP

Trip OdoAvg fuelAvg speedAll

Gear shiftingAnticipationSpeedFor more Info

EnglishDeutschItalianoFrançaisEspañolTürkçePyccкийNederlandsPolski

PortuguêsSvenska

Configure

Language

Measure unit

Display

Set Clock24 Hour Mode12 Hour Mode

Always offOn guidanceAlways on

Messages

Tyre Press.Auto StartStop

MetricImperial

Help ScreenRadio InfoPhone InfoNAV info

Information

Clock

Setup

ECO MODE

BAE131627

92


Chimes

Forw Alert

Low Fuel

Home lightGeneral warn.General info.

Low

OffHighNormal

Off

ManualAuto

Hill Launch

Check

High loadLow load

Tyre Pressure

Full guard

Ask on exitReduced

Alarm

Aux. Heater

Parkheater

BA

E87753

Set Time

SaturdaySunday

FridayThursday

MondayTuesdayWednesday

Set Time

SaturdaySunday

FridayThursday

MondayTuesdayWednesday

Time 1

Time 2

OnceActive now

93


Type 3

E88048

Use the controls to scroll through the menudisplays.

Device listThe highlighted icon shows the currentmenu in use.

Navigation

CD

CD changer

Radio

Phone

Trip computer

Settings

Auxiliary input

94


Menu structure

CD

Navigation HomeDestinat. mem.Destinat. A-ZLast destinat.Cancel guidan.

DestinationsDestinationsDestinations

Folder / Tracks

Folder / TracksFolder / TracksFolder / TracksFolder / TracksFolder / TracksFolder / Tracks

StationsStationsStationsStationsStationsStationsStations

Numbers

NumbersNumbers

Station listFM 1 / FMFM 2FM 3FM - ASTMW / AMLW / AM-AST

CD changer CD 1CD 2CD 3CD 4CD 5CD 6

Radio

Phone bookRedialIncoming callsOutgoing callsCall status

Phone

AE131628

Trip computer Distance to emptyAverage fuelAverage speedReset selected elementReset trip odometer

95


English

Colour themesConfigure

Language

Measure unit

DisplayDriver alert

Set Clock24-hour mode12-hour mode

Gear shiftingAnticipationSpeedMore info

Always offOn guidanceAlways on

Messages

Tyre PressureCoolant temperature

Driver alertAuto StartStop

MetricImperial

Help ScreenNAV info

Settings

Information

Clock

Setup

ESPBLISECOMODE

A CBE131629

A

DeutschItalianoFrançaisEspañolTürkçePyccкийNederlandsPolski

PortuguêsSvenska

96


Chimes Low Fuel

Home lightGeneral warn.General info.

Forw Alert LowNormalHighOff

Lane depart Sensitivity NormalHigh

Intensity HighNormalLow

Off

ManualAuto

Hill Launch

Check

High loadLow load

Tyre Pressure

Full guard

Ask on exitReduced

Alarm

Aux Heater

Auto beam OnSensitivity High

NormalLow

C

E131630

97


Set Time

SaturdaySunday

WednesdayTuesday

FridayThursday

Monday

Set Time

SaturdaySunday

WednesdayTuesday

FridayThursday

Monday

Time 1

Time 2

OnceActive now

Park heater

Auxiliary input

BA

E88067

TRIP COMPUTEROdometerRegisters the total mileage of the vehicle.

TripmeterRegisters the mileage of individualjourneys.

Distance to emptyIndicates the approximate distance thevehicle will travel on the fuel remaining inthe tank. Changes in driving pattern maycause the value to vary.

Average fuel consumptionIndicates the average fuel consumptionsince the function was last reset.

Average speedIndicates the average speed calculatedsince the function was last reset.

Outside air temperatureShows the outside air temperature.

98


Type 1 and 2

E74428

6.3Average Fuel

10:20

234.2 km

123456 km

l100km

A

B

C

A. Trip computerB. OdometerC. TripmeterThe trip computer includes the followinginformation displays:

Average fuel

Average speed

Outside air

Reset Trip

Dist. to empty

E74441

Press the up and down arrow buttons onthe steering wheel to scroll through the tripcomputer displays.Note: The position of the trip computerdisplay may vary depending on theinformation shown in the display.

Resetting the trip computer using themain menuTo reset a particular display:1. Press the right arrow button on the

steering wheel to enter the main menu.2. Highlight Reset Trip with the up and

down arrow buttons and press the rightarrow button.

3. Highlight the function to be reset.4. Press the right arrow button to select

the function.5. Hold the OK button pressed.To reset all three displays, select Allvalues and hold the OK button pressed.

Type 3

E88049A

Trip computerA

Press the OK button on the steering wheelto cycle through the different trip computerdisplays. To reset a value, press and holdthe OK button.

Resetting the trip computer using themain menuTo reset a particular display:1. Highlight Trip Computer with the up

and down arrow buttons and press theright arrow button.

2. Highlight the function to be reset.

99


3. Hold the OK button pressed.

PERSONALISED SETTINGSThe following information is displayed inthe information display if you haveselected it:

Help screen, radio, navigation andphone informationThe help screen appears for a few secondswhen you switch the ignition on.If the radio, navigation or telephone isoperating, information relating to thissystem is displayed in the informationdisplay.To select which information is displayedin the information display:

Type 1 and 21. Press the right arrow button on the

steering wheel to enter the main menu.2. Highlight Setup with the up and down

arrow buttons and press the right arrowbutton.

3. Highlight Display and press the rightarrow button.

4. Highlight Configure and press the rightarrow button.

5. To toggle the Help screen, Radio Infoand Phone Info on and off, highlightthe desired setting and press the OKbutton to confirm the setting.

6. Press the left arrow button to exit themenu. Hold the left arrow buttonpressed to return to the trip computerdisplay.

Type 31. Highlight Settings with the up and





5. To toggle the Help screen and NAVInfo on and off, highlight the desiredsetting and press the OK button toconfirm the setting.

Navigation informationYou can also choose when the navigationinformation is displayed in the informationdisplay. Three options are available:• Always off: No navigation information

is displayed in the information display.• On guidance: The navigation

information will only appear when thenavigation system provides a guidanceinstruction. This function is onlyavailable on certain navigationsystems.

• Always on: Navigation information willalways appear in the informationdisplay when the navigation system isoperating.

To set when navigation information shouldbe displayed:






5. Highlight Nav Info and press the rightarrow button.

100


6. Highlight the desired setting and pressthe OK button to confirm the setting.







5. Highlight Nav Info and press the rightarrow button.


LanguageA choice of eleven languages are available:English, German, Italian, French, Spanish,Turkish, Russian, Dutch, Polish, Swedishand Portuguese.





4. Highlight Language and press the rightarrow button.







4. Highlight Language and press the rightarrow button.


Units of measureNote: The outside air temperature is onlydisplayed in degrees Celsius and cannot beset to degrees Fahrenheit.To select metric or imperial units:





4. Highlight Measure Unit and press theright arrow button.


6. Press the left arrow button to return toexit the menu. Hold the left arrowbutton pressed to return to the tripcomputer display.

101






4. Highlight Measure Unit and press theright arrow button.


INFORMATION MESSAGES

E70499

Press OK to acknowledge and removesome messages from the informationdisplay. Other messages will be removedautomatically after a short time.With instrument cluster type 3, certainmessages need to be confirmed beforeyou can access the menus.

Message indicatorThe message indicatorilluminates to supplement somemessages. It will be red or amber

depending on the severity of the messageand will remain on until the cause of themessage has been rectified.

Message symbolsSee Owner’s handbook.

Have the system checked at thenext service.

Have the system checked assoon as possible.

Stop your vehicle as soon as it issafe to do so.

Viewing current messagesType 1 and 21. Press the right arrow button on the

steering wheel to enter the main menu.2. Highlight Information with the up and


3. Highlight Messages and press the rightarrow button.

4. Use the up and down buttons to viewthe current messages.

Type 31. Press the right arrow button on the

steering wheel to enter the main menu.2. Highlight Settings with the up and


3. Highlight Information with the up anddown arrow buttons and press the rightarrow button.

4. Highlight Messages and press the rightarrow button.

5. Use the up and down buttons to viewthe current messages.

102


Active suspension

ActionIndicatorMessage

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician.amberIVDC malfunction

See Active suspension (page 174).-IVDC comfort

See Active suspension (page 174).-IVDC normal

See Active suspension (page 174).-IVDC sport

Airbag


Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberAirbag malfunction

Alarm


See Alarm (page 46).amberAlarm triggered

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician.-Alarm system

service reqd.

Automatic main beam control, Lane departure warning and Driver alert


Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.redDriver fatigueRest now

The front camera sensor has reduced visibility.Clean the windscreen.

amberFront cameraClean screen

The front camera sensor has malfunctioned.Have this checked as soon as possible.

amberFront cameramalfunction

The affected systems are temporarily unavail-able, and should resume after a few minutes.

amberFront cameranot available

Take a rest break soon.amberDriver fatigueRest suggested

103



The system has malfunctioned. Have thischecked as soon as possible.

amberLane departurewarn. malfunct.

Battery and charging system


Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do soand switch off the ignition. Have the systemchecked by a properly trained technician as soonas possible.

redOvervoltage: Stopsafely!

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberLow battery

Blind spot monitor


See Blind Spot Monitor (page 80).amberBLIS sensorblocked

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberBLIS right sensor

malfunction

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberBLIS left sensor

malfunction

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberBLIS malfunction

See Blind Spot Monitor (page 80).amberBLIS inactive Trailerattach'd

Child power lock


Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberChild lock malfunc-

tion

104


Climate control


See Auxiliary Heater (page 120).amberAux. Heater on

Cruise control and Adaptive cruise control (ACC)


Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberACC malfunction

See Adaptive cruise control (ACC) (page 182).amberClean radar sensor

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberForward Alert

malfunction

See Adaptive cruise control (ACC) (page 182).-ACC unavailable

See Cruise Control (page 180).-Cruise controlactive

See Cruise Control (page 180).-Cruise controlstandby

Doors open


Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible and close.redDriver door open

Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible and close.redDriver side rear door

open

Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible and close.redPassenger door

open

Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible and close.redPassenger side rear

door open

Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible and close.redLuggage comp.

open

Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible and close. See Opening andClosing the Bonnet (page 233).

redBonnet open

105


Engine immobiliser


See Engine immobiliser (page 45).amberImmobiliser active

Hill start assist


Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician.amberHill Launch not

available

See Hill Start Assist (page 171).amberPlease use parkbrake!

See Hill Start Assist (page 171).-Hill Launch Assistactive

See Hill Start Assist (page 171).-Hill Launch Assistoff

Keyless system


Have this checked as soon as possible.redSteering malfunc-tion

See Keyless Entry (page 41).amberKey not detected

The engine is still running. Switch the ignition off.See Keyless Starting (page 145).

amberCar operative PressSTOP

See Keyless Entry (page 41).amberKey outside car

See Changing the remote control battery(page 35).

amberKey battery low

See Steering Wheel Lock (page 147).-Steering locked -Retry

106


Lighting


Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberFront lights

malfunction

One or both of the headlamp dipped beam bulbshave blown. Check the headlamp dipped beambulbs. See Changing a Bulb (page 64).

-Low beam: Bulbfault

One or both of the rear fog lamp bulbs haveblown. Check the rear fog lamp bulbs. SeeChanging a Bulb (page 64).

-Rear fog light: Bulbfault

One or both of the brake lamp bulbs have blown.Check the brake lamp bulbs. See Changing aBulb (page 64).

-Stop lamps: Bulbfault

One or both of the brake lamp bulbs on yourtrailer have blown. Check the brake lamp bulbson your trailer.

-Trailer stopl.: Bulbfault

One or both of the direction indicator bulbs onyour trailer have blown. Check the directionindicator bulbs on your trailer.

-Trailer turnl.: Bulbfault

Maintenance


Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.redEngine malfunction

See Engine Oil Check (page 244).amberCheck engine oillevel

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberWater detected in

fuel

See Washer Fluid Check (page 245).-Low washer fluidlevel

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician.-Service oil

107


Occupant protection


Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.-Crash mode

Parking brake


See Parking Brake (page 166).redPark brake applied

See Parking Brake (page 166).amberPark brake applied

Electric parking brake (EPB)


Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.redPark brake

malfunction

See Electric Parking Brake (page 167).redRelease park brake

See Electric Parking Brake (page 167).redRe-Apply parkbrake

See Electric Parking Brake (page 167).amberPark brake applied

See Electric Parking Brake (page 167).amberPark brake released

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician.-Park brake service

reqd.

Power steering


Full steering will be maintained but you will needto exert greater force on the steering wheel. Havethe system checked by a properly trained techni-cian as soon as possible.

amberPower steeringmalfunction

108


Stability control (ESP)


Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.-ESP malfunction

See Using Stability Control (page 170).-ESP off

Start-stop

ActionMessageindicatorMessage

Switch the ignition off before leaving the vehicleif the system has shut down the engine. See Usingstart-stop (page 152).

redAuto StartStop Switchign off

The engine needs to be restarted, press the clutchpedal to start. See Using start-stop (page 152).-Auto StartStop Press

clutch

Select neutral for the system to restart the engine.See Using start-stop (page 152).-Auto StartStop Select

neutral

The system is not functioning. A manual restart isrequired.-StartStop: Man. start

required

Transmission


Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician immediately.redTransmission

malfunction

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberTransmission over-

temperatur

Tyre pressure monitoring system


The tyre indicated has continued to deflate.Check the tyre and inflate it to the recommendedpressure. See Technical Specifications (page262).

redCheck ..... tyre!

109



One or more of the tyres are significantly under-inflated. This message may be displayed after anew sensor has been installed. Check the tyresand inflate them to the recommended pressure.See Technical Specifications (page 262).

redCheck tyre pres-sures

The tyre indicated is significantly under-inflated.Check the tyre and inflate it to the recommendedpressure. See Technical Specifications (page262).

amberCheck ..... tyre

You have installed a temporary spare wheel.Install a correctly inflated full size wheel with asensor as soon as possible. When a malfunctionoccurs, the system may not be able to detect orsignal low tyre pressure.

amberTyre monitormalfunction Up to three sensors have malfunctioned, an

unapproved accessory is interfering with thesystem or a general malfunction has beendetected. Have the system checked by a properlytrained technician as soon as possible. When amalfunction occurs, the system may not be ableto detect or signal low tyre pressure.

The tyre pressures are not suitable for driving at160 km/h (100 mph). Inflate the tyres to therecommended pressure. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 262). This message will bedisplayed for only a few seconds with a low tyrepressure warning.

amberInflate tyres for highspeed

You have installed wheels and tyres that do nothave sensors. The tyre pressures will not bemonitored.

-Tyre sensors notdetected All sensors have malfunctioned or an unapproved

accessory is interfering with the system. Have thesystem checked by a properly trained technicianas soon as possible.

110


Voice control


See Voice control (page 300).-Voice controlPlease speak

See Voice control (page 300).-Voice control Notrecognised

See Voice control (page 300).-Voice control Notallowed

111


PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONOutside airKeep the air intakes forward of thewindscreen free from obstruction (snow,leaves etc.) to allow the climate controlsystem to function effectively.

Recirculated airCAUTION

Prolonged use of recirculated air maycause the windows to mist up. If thewindows mist up, follow the settings

for defrosting and demisting thewindscreen.

The air currently in the passengercompartment will be recirculated. Outsideair will not enter the vehicle.

HeatingHeating performance depends on thetemperature of the engine coolant.

Air conditioningNote: The air conditioning operates onlywhen the temperature is above 4°C (39°F).Note: If you use the air conditioning, thefuel consumption of your vehicle will behigher.Air is directed through the evaporatorwhere it is cooled. Humidity is extractedfrom the air to help keep the windows freeof mist. The resulting condensation isdirected to the outside of the vehicle andit is therefore normal if you see a smallpool of water under your vehicle.

General information on controllingthe interior climateFully close all the windows.

Warming the interiorDirect the air towards your feet. In cold orhumid weather conditions, direct some ofthe air towards the windscreen and thedoor windows.

Cooling the interiorDirect the air towards your face.

AIR VENTSFront air vents

E71942

112

Climate Control

Second row air vents

A B

C

E73131

Air flow through lower air ventAAir flow through upper air ventBUpper air ventC

Use the upper air vents to defrost or demistthe side windows.

Third row air vents

E73132

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROLAir distribution control

A

F B

C

D

E

E71379

WindscreenAFootwell and windscreenBFootwellCFace level and footwellDFace levelEFace level and windscreenF

You can set the air distribution control toany position between the symbols.

113

Climate Control

Blower

E75470

A

OffANote: If you switch the blower off, thewindscreen may mist up.

Recirculated air

E73059

Press the button to togglebetween outside air andrecirculated air.

Heating the interior quickly

E71377

Ventilation

E71378

Set the air distribution control, blower andair vents to suit your requirements.

Air conditioningSwitching the air conditioning on andoff

If you turn the blower off, the airconditioning will turn off. Whenyou turn the blower on again,

the air conditioning will come onautomatically.

Cooling with outside air

E71380

Cooling the interior quickly

E71381

114

Climate Control

Defrosting and demisting thewindscreenNote: Turn the air conditioning on to assistwindscreen and side window demisting.Note: Turn the heater control to maximumheat to assist windscreen and side windowdefrosting.

E71382

Make sure that the blower and A/C is on.The indicator in the switch will illuminateduring defrosting and demisting.If you move the air distribution control toa position other than A, the A/C willremain on.

You can switch the air conditioning andrecirculated air on and off while the airdistribution control is set to position A.If necessary, switch the heated windowson. See Heated Windows and Mirrors(page 120).Note: To defrost or demist the rear sidewindows, set the second row air vents tothe defrosting and demisting position. SeeAir Vents (page 112).

Reducing interior air humidity

E71383

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROLDual-zone

E80737

115

Climate Control

Triple-zone

E70302

Your vehicle is fitted with either adual-zone or triple-zone system. When thesystem is in mono mode, all thetemperature zones are linked to the driver'szone. When you switch mono mode off,the dual-zone system allows you to setdifferent temperatures for the driver's andpassenger's side. On vehicles fitted with atriple-zone system, you can set a thirdtemperature for the rear.The system controls the temperature,amount and distribution of the air flowautomatically and adjusts them accordingto the driving and weather conditions.Press the AUTO button to switch automode on.Note: Avoid adjusting the settings whenthe vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold.The system adjusts to the currentcircumstances automatically. For thesystem to function properly, the side andcentre air vents should be fully open.Note: At low outside air temperatures,when the system is in auto mode, the airstream will be directed to the windscreenand the side windows as long as the engineis cold.

Note: For information on the automaticclimate control, on vehicles fitted with acombined Navigation and automaticclimate control system, see separatehandbook.

Setting the temperature

E70304

You can set the temperature between 16ºC(61ºF) and 28ºC (82ºF) in steps of 0.5ºC(1ºF). In position LO (below 16ºC [61ºF])the system will switch to permanentcooling, in position HI (above 28ºC [82ºF])to permanent heating, and will not regulatea stable temperature.

116

Climate Control

Mono modeIn mono mode, the temperature settingsfor both the driver’s and passenger’s sideare linked. If you adjust the temperatureusing the rotary control on the driver’s side,the same temperature will be set for thepassenger’s side. MONO is shown in thedisplay.

To switch mono mode offSelect a temperature for the passenger’sside using the rotary control on thepassenger’s side. Mono mode will switchoff and MONO disappears from thedisplay. The temperature for the driver’sside will remain unchanged. You can nowadjust the driver's and passenger's sidetemperatures independently of each other.The temperatures are shown in the display.You can set a difference of up to 4ºC(8ºF).Note: If you set a difference of greater than4°C (8ºF), the temperature on the otherside will be adjusted so that the differenceremains at 4°C (8ºF).Note: If you set one of the sides to HI or LO,both sides will be set to HI or LO.

To switch mono mode back on

E70306

Press the MONO button. MONO is shownin the display, and the passenger’s sidetemperature will be adjusted to the driver’sside temperature.

BlowerHigh speed

Low speed

E94615

Use the buttons to adjust the blowerspeed.The blower setting is shown in the display.

E95050

To return to auto mode, press the AUTObutton.

Air distributionTo adjust air distribution, press the desiredbutton. Any combination of settings canbe selected simultaneously.

E70308

A B C

FootwellAFace levelBWindscreenC

Windscreen defrosting anddemisting

E70309

When you select windscreen defrostingand demisting, A, B and C switch offautomatically and the air conditioningswitches on. Outside air will flow into thevehicle. You cannot select recirculated air.

117

Climate Control

The blower speed and the temperaturecontrol operate automatically and cannotbe adjusted manually. The blower is set tohigh speed and the temperature to HI.When you select windscreen defrostingand demisting, the heated screens switchon automatically and switch off after ashort time.To return to auto mode, press the AUTObutton.Note: To defrost or demist the rear sidewindows, set the second row air vents tothe defrost or demist position. See AirVents (page 112).

Switching the air conditioning onand off

Press the button. A/C OFF or A/C ON isshown in the display.

Recirculated air

Press the button to change betweenoutside air and recirculated air.Note: When the system is in auto mode andthe interior and exterior air temperatures arequite hot, the system selects recirculatedair automatically to maximise cooling of theinterior. Once the selected temperature isreached, the system will automaticallyreselect outside air .

Switching the automatic climatecontrol on and offNote: When switched off, the heating,ventilation and air conditioning system forboth front and rear zones are switched offand recirculated air is selected.

Dual-zone

E70980

Use the buttons to switch the system onand off.

Triple-zone

AE70312

Press button A to switch the system onand off.

Rear air conditioning (triple-zoneautomatic climate control)Note: This is a cooling system only. You canuse it to cool the rear. The system will notchange the rear setting to a temperaturehigher than the average of the two fronttemperature settings.Note: When switched off, you cannot seta temperature for the rear which is lowerthan the average of the two fronttemperature settings.

118

Climate Control

Switching between front and rear airconditioning mode

E70313

Press the button. The rear air conditioningsymbol and the rear settings will be shownin the display.When the system is in rear air conditioningmode, you can select a temperature usingthe rotary control on the driver’s side.To return to the front settings, press thebutton again. If no button is pressed for afew seconds, the system will automaticallyreturn to the front settings.

Rear temperatureNote: If you set different temperatures forthe driver's side and rear, mono mode willbe switched off.Note: When you press the MONO button,all three temperature zones will be adjustedto the temperature set for the driver's side.

Switching the rear air conditioning onand off

When the system is in rear air conditioningmode, use the button to switch the systemon and off. A/C OFF or A/C ON is shownin the display.

Note: When the front air conditioning isswitched off, you cannot have rear airconditioning.

Rear blowerHigh speed

Low speed

E94615

When the system is in rear air conditioningmode, use the buttons to adjust the blowerspeed.The blower setting is shown in the display.

E95050

When the system is in rear air conditioningmode, press the AUTO button to return toauto mode. In auto mode, the rear bloweris automatically controlled. AUTO isshown in the display.

Switching the rear automatic climatecontrol on and off

AE70312

119

Climate Control

When the system is in rear air conditioningmode, press button A to switch only therear system on and off.

HEATED WINDOWS ANDMIRRORSHeated windowsUse the heated windows to defrost ordemist the windscreen or rear window.Note: The heated windows operate onlywhen the engine is running.

Heated windscreen

E72506

Heated rear window

E72507

Heated exterior mirrorsElectric exterior mirrors are fitted with aheating element that will defrost or demistthe mirror glass. They will switch onautomatically when you switch the heatedrear window on.

AUXILIARY HEATERParking heater

WARNINGThe parking heater must not beoperated at filling stations, nearsources of combustible vapours or

dust or in enclosed spaces.

The parking heater operates independentlyof the vehicle heater by heating theengine’s coolant circuit. It is fed from thevehicle fuel tank. You can also use it whilethe vehicle is in motion to help the vehicleheater warm up the interior more quickly.Used properly, the parking heater providesthe following benefits:• It preheats the interior of the vehicle.• It keeps the windows clear of ice in the

event of frost and preventscondensation.

• It avoids cold starts and allows theengine to reach operating temperaturesooner.

Note: The parking heater will only operateif there is at least 7.5 litres (1.6 gallons) offuel in the fuel tank and the ambienttemperature is below 15°C (59°F). Theheater will not operate if the battery is low.Note: The heating depends on the outsideair temperature.Note: When the parking heater is activated,exhaust fumes may come from under thesides of the vehicle. This is normal.Note: On vehicles with a manual heating,ventilation and air conditioning system, theheating of the vehicle interior is dependenton the temperature, air distribution andblower control settings.To prevent the battery from discharging:• Once the parking heater has performed

one heating cycle, the nextprogrammed heating cycle will only becarried out if you have started thevehicle’s engine in between.

• After a heating cycle, drive the vehiclefor at least the period of the heatingcycle.

120

Climate Control

Programming the parking heaterNote: The programmed time is the time atwhich you wish the vehicle to be warm andready to drive, not the time at which theheater switches on.Note: You must programme the times atleast 70 minutes in advance of the time youwish to set.Note: You must set the time and datecorrectly. See Clock (page 137).To programme the heating times:

E70499



3. Highlight Park Heater and press theright arrow button.

E74467

One-Time

Program 1Program 2

Active now

Park Heater

• The functions Program 1 andProgram 2 allow you to programmeup to two heating cycles for each dayof the week. These times will remainstored and the heater will warm up thevehicle at these times on these daysevery week.

• The function One-Time allows you toprogramme one heating cycle for onespecific day.

• The function Active nowautomatically switches on the heater.

Programming the functions Program 1and Program 2

E74468

FridayThursday

TuesdayMonday

Wednesday

[07:55]

Program 1

121

Climate Control

1. Highlight Program 1 and press the rightarrow button.

2. Highlight the day on which the heatershould warm up the vehicle.

3. Press the OK button to confirm theselection. A cross appears in the boxnext to the day to show that this day isselected.

4. Continue in the same way to select allthe days on which the heater shouldwarm up the vehicle.

5. To set the time at which the vehicleshould be warmed up, highlight thetime at the top of the display and pressthe right arrow button.

6. Press the OK button and the hoursflash. Use the up and down arrowbuttons to adjust the individual settingsand the left and right arrow buttons tomove to the next or previous setting.

7. When you have finished, press the OKbutton again to confirm the selection.

E74469

07:5501:12:2006

ParkheaterProgram 1

OK = change

You can use the function Program 2 to seta second cycle, for example different timeson different days or twice on the same day.The programming procedure is the sameas for the function Program 1.

Programming the function One-Time1. Highlight One-Time and press the right

arrow button.2. Press the OK button and the hours

flash. Use the up and down arrowbuttons to adjust the individual settingsand the left and right arrow buttons tomove to the next or previous setting.

3. When you have finished, press the OKbutton again to confirm the selection.

Active nowHighlight Active now and press the OKbutton. A cross appears in the box next tothe function to show that the heater isactivated.To deactivate the heater, highlight Activenow and press the OK button again.

Remote startingThe parking heater may be started andswitched off from a distance of up to 500metres (1640 feet) using the suppliedremote control transmitter. This range willvary depending upon local conditions andterrain, as well as battery condition. Theremote control transmitter will indicatewhether or not the signal has beenreceived. The parking heater will operatefor a maximum of 30 minutes.Note: The heater will operate, dependingon the ambient temperature, for between10 and 30 minutes. The interior will cooldown after the heating period has elapsed,therefore a remote start more than 30minutes before driving is not recommended.Note: The remote control may not alwaysreceive confirmation of a successful remotecommand at extended operating ranges.

122

Climate Control

StartingHold the transmitter with the antennaupwards and press the ON button for atleast two seconds. The LED on thetransmitter lights up green to confirm thesignal has been received.

Switching offHold the transmitter with the antennaupwards and press the OFF button for atleast two seconds. The LED on thetransmitter lights up red to confirm thesignal has been received.

Remote start in combination withdirect start or timer

E114360

Remote start is integrated with normalheater control. Parking heaters started withdirect start or timer functions can beswitched off with the remote controltransmitter and vice versa.

Feedback during starting andswitching offThe LED on the transmitter illuminatesgreen for about two seconds. Thisindicates the signal has been received bythe vehicle and the heater has started.The LED on the transmitter illuminates redfor about two seconds. This indicates thesignal has been received by the vehicle andthe heater has switched off.

The LED on the transmitter flashes greenor red for about two seconds. Thisindicates the signal was not transmittedcorrectly. Repeat the transmission.The LED on the transmitter illuminatesorange for about two seconds beforeshowing green or red. This indicates thetransmitter batteries are weak and shouldbe changed.The LED on the transmitter flashes orangefor about 5 seconds. This indicates thatthe signal was not transmitted. Thetransmitter batteries are discharged andshould be changed as soon as possible.

Changing the remote controlbatteryMake sure that you dispose of old batteriesin an environmentally friendly way. Seekadvice from your local authority regardingrecycling.

E114361

2

1

1. Insert a screwdriver or other suitabletool into the slot on the back of theremote control, and unscrew thecompartment cover.

CAUTIONDo not touch the battery contacts orthe printed circuit board with thescrewdriver.

2. Carefully prise out the battery.

123

Climate Control

3. Install a new battery (3.3V typeCR1-3N) with the + facing upwards.

4. Re-assemble the remote control.

Programming the transmitterFurther transmitters may be used with theremote system, please consult your dealer.Up to a maximum of 3 separate remotecontrols may be added. When adding extratransmitters these must be programmedseparately.Note: The heater must be switched offduring programming.Note: The programming procedure may berepeated as often as is required. The oldestprogrammed transmitter will be deletedeach time.1. Install the battery in the new

transmitter.2. Turn off the power to the receiver by

removing fuse F32 from the enginecompartment fuse box. See FuseSpecification Chart (page 222).

3. Wait for at least 5 seconds.4. Reconnect power to the receiver by

replacing the fuse, and press the OFFbutton on the new transmitter within5 seconds until the LED light turns off.

5. The new transmitter is nowprogrammed.

Fuel operated heater (dependingon country)

WARNINGThe fuel operated heater must notbe operated at filling stations, nearsources of combustible vapours or

dust or in enclosed spaces.

The fuel operated heater aids in warmingthe engine and the vehicle interior onvehicles with a diesel engine. It is switchedon or off automatically depending on theoutside air temperature and the coolanttemperature, unless you have deactivatedit. When the fuel operated heater isoperating, Aux. Heater on is displayed inthe information display. See InformationDisplays (page 89).To deactivate the fuel operated heater:

E70499



3. Highlight Aux. Heater and press theOK button to toggle the heater on andoff. A cross appears in the box whenthe heater is activated.


124

Climate Control

Diesel auxiliary heater (dependingon country)The diesel auxiliary heater (PTC electricalheater) aids in warming the vehicle interioron vehicles with a diesel engine. It isswitched on or off automaticallydepending on the outside air temperature,the coolant temperature and the alternatorload.

125

Climate Control

SITTING IN THE CORRECTPOSITION

E68595

WARNINGSDo not adjust the seats when thevehicle is moving.Only when you use the seat beltproperly, can it hold you in a positionthat allows the airbag to achieve its

optimum effect.

When you use them properly, the seat,head restraint, seat belt and airbags willprovide optimum protection in the eventof a collision. We recommend that you:• sit in an upright position with the base

of your spine as far back as possible.• do not recline the seatback more than

30 degrees.• adjust the head restraint so that the

top of it is level with the top of yourhead and as far forwards as possible,remaining comfortable.

• keep sufficient distance betweenyourself and the steering wheel. Werecommend a minimum of 250millimetres (10 inches) between yourbreastbone and the airbag cover.

• hold the steering wheel with your armsslightly bent.

• bend your legs slightly so that you canpress the pedals fully.

• position the shoulder strap of the seatbelt over the centre of your shoulderand position the lap strap tightly acrossyour hips.

Make sure that your driving position iscomfortable and that you can maintain fullcontrol of your vehicle.

MANUAL SEATSMoving the seats backwards andforwards

E70728

WARNINGRock the seat backwards andforwards after releasing the lever tomake sure that it is fully engaged in

its catch.

126

Seats

Adjusting the lumbar support

E70729

Adjusting the height of the driver’sseat

E70730

Adjusting the angle of theseatback

E70731

POWER SEATS2-way electric seat

E70733

1

1

2

2

127

Seats

8-way electric seat

12 2 1 3

4

3

4

8 7

8 7

5

6

5

6E70734

128

Seats

HEAD RESTRAINTSAdjusting the head restraint

WARNINGSRaise the rear head restraint whenthe rear seat is occupied by apassenger.When using a forward facing childrestraint on a rear seat, alwaysremove the head restraint from that

seat.

E71879

Adjust the head restraint so that the topof it is level with the top of your head andas far forwards as possible, remainingcomfortable.

Removing the head restraintPress the locking buttons and remove thehead restraint.

REAR SEATSSecond row seatsMoving the seats backwards andforwards


its catch.

E72644

129

Seats

Adjusting the seatback

E72645

1. To recline the seatback, pull the leveron the outboard seats or the strap onthe centre seat and lean back againstthe seatback until it reaches thedesired position.

2. To raise the seatback, pull the lever upand push the seat cushion forwardsusing your weight.

Easy entry position (vehicles with thirdrow seats only)Note: You can move the outboard seatsforwards to allow access to the third rowseats.

E72704

E72706

1. Pull the lever once. Fold the seatbackforwards into the position shown andslide the complete seat forwards.When exiting the vehicle from the thirdrow seats, pull the loop on the rear ofthe second row seat.

2. To return the seat to the seatingposition, slide the seat backwards. Theseat will stop automatically and at amidway position.

130

Seats

3. Fold the seatback up until it engages.4. To move the seat further back, pull the

lever under the front of the seat andslide it backwards.

Folding the seatbacks down

WARNINGWhen folding the seatbacks down,hold the seatback to avoid gettingyour fingers caught between the

seatback and seat frame.

E72705

E72646

1. Lower the head restraints. See HeadRestraints (page 129).

2. Slide the seats backwards as far asthey will go.

3. Insert the centre seat belt into theretainer in the roof. See Fastening theseat belts (page 31).

4. On the outboard seats, pull the leverand fold the seatback into a slopedposition. Pull the lever again and folddown the seatback.

5. On the centre seat, pull the loopbetween the seat cushion and theseatback and fold down the seatback.

6. To engage the seatbacks in the foldedposition, pull the lever or loop againand push the seatback firmly downuntil it latches into position.

To return the seat to the seating position,pull the lever or loop and fold the seatbackup until it engages.

Third row seatsWARNING

Do not sit in a third row seat whenthe second row seat in front of it isfolded flat.

Moving the seats backwards andforwards (Galaxy)


its catch.

131

Seats

E72647

Adjusting the seatback (Galaxy)

E75381

1. To recline the seatback, pull the strapand lean back against the seatbackuntil it reaches the desired position.

2. To raise the seatback, pull the strapand let the seatback return to theupright position.

Folding the seats flat

WARNINGWhen folding the seatbacks down,hold the seatback to avoid gettingyour fingers caught between the

seatback and seat frame.

E72707

1

1

E72648

A

B

3

2

132

Seats

1. Pull the loop at the rear of the seatcushion and fold the seat cushionforwards until it lies flat on the floor (1).

2. Grasp the grip (A) and pull the loop(B) at the base of the seatbackupwards and rearwards (2).

3. Fold the seatback down flat to thefloor using the grip (3).

4. To return the seat to the seatingposition, grasp the grip and pull theseatback upwards and then rearwards.

5. Fold the seat cushion back.

Creating a level load floorCAUTION

When transporting a load with theseats folded flat, always fold therelevant carpeted cover forwards to

cover the folded seats.

E72649

1

2

3

1. Turn the retainers on the rear of thethird row seatbacks anti-clockwisethrough 90 degrees to release thecarpeted cover.

2. Fold it forwards to cover up the foldedseats.

3. To fix the cover back onto theseatbacks, fold it back and push theretainers into the seatback until theyclick into place.

Note: When only the third row seats arefolded flat, fold the covers forwards to coverup the base of the second row seats. Thesmaller flaps at the front of the cover shouldstand vertically against the second rowseatbacks.

133

Seats

HEATED SEATS

CAUTIONOperating this function with theengine off will drain the battery.

E70601

E71224

Note: The number of illuminated lightsbeside the button indicates the selectedstep.Note: The heater setting is indicated in red.Note: When no light is illuminated, theheating is switched off.

Note: Only the front seat settings are storedwhen you switch off the ignition.

Raising and lowering thetemperature automaticallyPress and hold the relevant button.

Raising and lowering thetemperature manuallyPress the relevant button repeatedly.

VENTILATED SEATS

CAUTIONOperating this function with theengine off will drain the battery.

E70601

134

Seats

E70602

Note: The number of illuminated lightsbeside the button indicates the selectedstep.Note: The ventilation setting is indicated inblue.Note: When no light is illuminated, theventilation is switched off.Note: The settings are stored when theignition is switched off.Note: When the seat is being ventilated,the heater may switch on automatically.This is to prevent the flow of air becominguncomfortably cool.Note: The air in the vehicle interior is usedto ventilate the seats. The cooling effecttherefore depends on the temperature ofthe vehicle interior. Switch on the airconditioning if necessary and set the airdistribution to footwell. See ClimateControl (page 112).

Raising and lowering thetemperature automaticallyPress and hold the relevant button.

Raising and lowering thetemperature manuallyPress the relevant button repeatedly.

FRONT SEAT ARMREST

3

E95256

1

2

135

Seats

SUN SHADESSide windows

E74809

AA

Pull the blind up and attach it to the hooks(A).

Roof (Galaxy)

E74808

Roof (S-MAX)WARNING

Do not operate the sun blind unlessit is free from obstruction.

Note: If you operate the switch often duringa short period of time, the system mightbecome inoperable for a certain time toprevent damage due to overheating.Note: The sun blind can only be operatedwhen the ignition is on.

E125025

The sun blind is operated by a switchlocated between the sun visors.

Opening and closing the sun blind

E125146

A

B

Press to closeAPress to openB

136

Convenience features

Opening and closing the sun blindautomaticallyPress the switch to the second action pointand release it. Press it again to stop theblind.Note: If this does not operate correctly,follow the relearning procedure below.

Anti-trap function

WARNINGSThe anti-trap function is deactivateduntil the memory has been reset bythe relearning procedure.Careless closing of the blind canoverride the anti-trap function andcause injuries.

The sun blind will stop automatically whileopening or closing and reverse somedistance if there is an obstacle in the way.

Sun blind relearning

WARNINGThe anti-trap function is not activeduring this procedure. Make sure thatthere are no obstacles in the way of

the moving blind.

Note: The relearning process must bestarted no later than 30 seconds afterturning the ignition on.In case the blind no longer opens or closesproperly, follow this relearning procedure:1. Press switch B to the first action point

twice and release it within twoseconds.

2. Press switch A to the first action pointtwice and release it within twoseconds.

3. Press and hold switch B to the firstaction point, until the blind fully opens.

4. Press and hold switch A to the firstaction point, until the blind fully closes.

If step 2 is not completed within 15seconds, the relearning function will beinterrupted. Turn the ignition off, wait foranother 30 seconds and then turn theignition back on again. Start the procedureonce more from the beginning.Confirm that relearning has beencompleted by using automatic openingand closing.

INSTRUMENT LIGHTINGDIMMER

E70723

CLOCKNote: Some navigation systems willautomatically set the date and time on theclock using GPS signals.Note: See General Information (page 89).1. From the main menu, select the clock

function.2. Select the option required.3. Press OK.4. Using the right, left, up and down arrow

buttons, select and change the value.

137


5. Press OK.

CIGAR LIGHTER

CAUTIONSIf you use the socket when the engineis not running, the battery maydischarge.Do not hold the cigar lighter elementpressed in.

Note: Switch the ignition on to use the cigarlighter. You can also use it for up to 30minutes after you have switched the ignitionoff.Note: You can use the socket to power 12volt appliances that have a maximumcurrent rating of 15 Amperes. Use only Fordaccessory connectors or connectorsspecified for use with SAE standard sockets.

E72972

Press the element in to use the cigarlighter. It will pop out automatically.

ASHTRAYFront ashtray

E72974

To empty, pull out the complete ashtray.

Rear ashtray

E73705

To remove the ashtray, open it, press itdown against the spring and remove it.

AUXILIARY POWER POINTS

CAUTIONIf you use the socket when the engineis not running, the battery maydischarge.

Note: You can use the socket when theignition is switched off.

138


Note: You can use the socket to power 12volt appliances that have a maximumcurrent rating of 15 Amperes. Use only Fordaccessory connectors or connectorsspecified for use with SAE standard sockets.

S-Max

E74130

Galaxy

E72977

CUP HOLDERS

WARNINGDo not place hot drinks in the cupholders when the vehicle is moving.

Seat back traysWARNING

Do not use the trays when the vehicleis moving. Make sure that you securethe trays in the lowered position

before setting off.

E72630

GLOVE BOXCooled glove boxNote: You can cool the glove box using airfrom the air conditioning system.

E70885

139


STORAGE COMPARTMENTS

WARNINGDo not drive with any storagecompartment lid open. Make surethat you secure the lid before setting

off.

CAUTIONDo not keep heat-sensitive items andliquids in any storage compartment.

Front storage compartments

E72978

E73704

E72905

E72905

Under seat storage compartment

E72981

1

2

Overhead storage compartmentsWARNING

Do not place heavy objects in theoverhead storage compartments.

CAUTIONDo not exceed the maximumpermissible loads of 1 kilogramme (2.2pounds) for the smaller compartment

and 2 kilogrammes (4.4 pounds) for thelarger compartment.

140


E73067

Under floor storage compartmentWARNING

When you are using a child restraintwith a support leg on a second rowseat, make sure that you locate the

support leg securely on the under floorstorage compartment lid. Make sure thatyou install the foam spacer correctly insidethe storage compartment and that youposition the lid correctly.

E72585

Vehicles with Premium sound system

CAUTIONDo not attempt to open the left-handcover.

MAP POCKETS

E74686

SEAT BACK TRAYS

WARNINGDo not use the trays when the vehicleis moving. Make sure that you securethe trays in the lowered position

before setting off.

141


E72630

GLASSES HOLDER

E75193

MEMORY FUNCTION

WARNINGSBefore activating the seat memory,make sure that the area immediatelysurrounding the seat is clear of

obstructions and that all occupants areclear of moving parts.

WARNINGSThe memory store function cannotbe used when the vehicle is moving.

A

B

E86768

Seat adjustment controls SeePower Seats (page 127).

A

Memory pre-set buttonsB

Up to four different driver's seat andexterior mirror positions can be stored inthe memory. Your preferred setting for thereverse mirror dipping feature can also bestored. See Electric exterior mirrors(page 77).

Setting a memory pre-setPassive settingThe vehicle stores the seating and mirrorpositions for up to four remote controls orpassive keys. Next time the vehicle isunlocked, the position of the seat andmirrors will adjust to the last used position.Each time you turn the ignition off, thecurrent seat and mirror settings are storedon the remote control or passive key used.

Active setting1. Turn the ignition on.

142


2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors tothe desired position.

3. Press and hold the desired pre-setbutton B until a single chime soundsto confirm.

Recalling a stored seat positionNote: To stop seat movement during arecall, press any driver seat adjustmentcontrol, any of the memory buttons or anymirror control switch. Seat movement willalso stop if you move the vehicle.

Passive recallNote: If more than one passive key is inrange, the memory function will move to thesettings of the first key stored.When you unlock the vehicle with theremote control or pull the driver doorhandle with a passive key in range, the seatand mirrors will move to the position storedon that remote control or passive key.

Active recallPress the pre-set button associated withthe desired driving position. The seat andmirrors will move to the position stored onthat pre-set.

Resetting the memoryIf any seat position travel is interrupted(e.g. an obstacle in the way or loss ofpower supply), you will need to reset thememory.Note: Make sure all electrical accessoriesare switched off.1. Turn the ignition to position II.2. Operate the seat adjustment control

to move the seat in the requireddirection until it stops. See PowerSeats (page 127). A click will be heard.

3. Release the seat adjustment controland immediately press and hold theswitch in the same direction for at least3 seconds. Keep it held until the seatstops at the mechanical end of itstravel and a click is heard.

4. Release the seat adjustment control.5. Operate the same seat adjustment

control in the opposite direction for atleast 3 seconds. Keep it held until theseat stops at the mechanical end of itstravel and a click is heard.

CHILDMINDER MIRROR

E75192

CD CHANGERThis is located under the front passengerseat.

143


AUXILIARY INPUT (AUX IN)SOCKET

E71969

See separate audio handbook.

USB PORT

E104423

See Connectivity (page 318).

FLOOR MATS

WARNINGWhen using the floor mats, alwaysmake sure the floor mat is properlysecured using the appropriate fixings

and positioned so that it does not interferewith the operation of the pedals.

144


GENERAL INFORMATIONGeneral points on startingIf the battery has been disconnected thevehicle may exhibit some unusual drivingcharacteristics for approx. 8 kilometres (5miles) after reconnecting the battery.This is because the engine managementsystem must realign itself with the engine.Any unusual driving characteristics duringthis period may be disregarded.

Starting the engine by towing orpushing

WARNINGTo prevent damage you must notpush or tow start your vehicle. Usebooster cables and a booster battery.

See Jump-Starting the Vehicle (page251).

IGNITION SWITCH

WARNINGNever return the key to position 0 orI when the vehicle is in motion.

E72128

0 The ignition is off.I The ignition and all main electrical circuitsare disabled.Note: Do not leave the ignition key in thisposition for too long to avoid dischargingthe battery.

II The ignition is switched on. All electricalcircuits are operational. Warning lampsand indicators illuminate. This is the keyposition when driving. You must also selectit when being towed.III The starter motor is activated. Releasethe key as soon as the engine starts.

KEYLESS STARTING

WARNINGSThe keyless starting system may notfunction if the key is close to metalobjects or electronic devices such as

mobile phones.Always check that the steering wheellock is deactivated beforeattempting to move your vehicle.

See Steering Wheel Lock (page 147).

Note: The ignition may automaticallyswitch off after a period of time if yourvehicle has been left unattended with theignition on. This is to prevent the vehiclebattery from discharging.Note: A valid passive key must be locatedinside the vehicle to switch the ignition onand start the engine.Note: To start your engine you must alsofully depress the brake or clutch pedal,depending on the transmission fitted.

E85766

145

Starting and Stopping the Engine

Ignition onPress the start button once. All electricalcircuits are operational, warning lamps andindicators illuminate.

Starting with automatictransmissionNote: Releasing the brake pedal duringengine start will stop the engine crankingand return to ignition on.1. Make sure the transmission is in P or

N.2. Fully depress the brake pedal.3. Press the start button.

Starting with manual transmissionNote: Releasing the clutch pedal duringengine start will stop the engine crankingand return to ignition on.1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.2. Press the start button.3. If the engine does not start, fully

depress the brake and clutch pedals.

Starting a diesel engineNote: Engine cranking may not commenceuntil the engine glow plug cycle has beencompleted. This may take several secondsin extremely cold conditions.Note: Continue to press the clutch or brakepedal until engine cranking begins.

Failure to startThe passive starting system will notfunction if:• The passive key frequencies are

jammed.• The passive key battery is flat.If you are unable to start your vehicle carryout the following procedure.

Type 1

E87382

1. Hold the key next to the steeringcolumn shroud exactly as shown.

2. With the key in this position you canuse the start button to switch theignition on and start your vehicle.

Type 2

E87381

1. Carefully prise out the cover.

146


E85767

2. Insert the key into the key holder.3. With the key in this position you can

use the start button to switch theignition on and start your vehicle.

Stopping the engine with thevehicle stationaryNote: The ignition, all electrical circuits,warning lamps and indicators will beswitched off.

Manual transmissionPress the start button.

Automatic transmission1. Move the selector lever to position P.2. Press the start button.

Stopping the engine when thevehicle is moving

WARNINGSwitching off the engine when thevehicle is still moving will result in aloss of brake and steering assistance.

The steering will not be locked, but highereffort will be required. When the ignition isswitched off some electrical circuits,warning lamps and indicators may also beOFF.

Press and hold the start button for twoseconds, or press three times within threeseconds.

STEERING WHEEL LOCK

WARNINGAlways check that the steering isunlocked before attempting to moveyour vehicle.

Vehicles without keyless startingTo activate the steering wheel lock;1. Remove the key from the ignition

switch.2. Turn the steering wheel.

Vehicles with keyless startingNote: The steering wheel lock will notactivate when the ignition is on or thevehicle is moving.Your vehicle has an electronicallycontrolled steering wheel lock. Thisoperates automatically.The steering wheel lock will activate aftera short period of time once you haveparked your vehicle and the passive key isoutside of the vehicle.

Deactivating the steering wheel lockSwitch the ignition on, or:Vehicles with automatic transmission• Press the brake pedal.Vehicles with manual transmission• Press the clutch pedal.

STARTING A PETROL ENGINENote: You can only operate the starter fora maximum of 30 seconds at a time.

147


Cold or hot engineAll vehicles

CAUTIONWhen the temperature is below -20°C(-4°F), switch the ignition on for atleast one second before starting the

engine. This will make sure that themaximum fuel pressure is established forstarting the engine.

Vehicles with manual transmissionNote: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.2. Start the engine.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionNote: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.1. Select park or neutral.2. Fully depress the brake pedal.3. Start the engine.

All vehiclesIf the engine does not start within 15seconds, wait for a short period and tryagain.If the engine does not start after threeattempts, wait 10 seconds and follow theFlooded engine procedure.If you have difficulty starting the enginewhen the temperature is below -25°C(-13°F), press the accelerator pedalbetween ¼ to ½ of its travel and try again.

Flooded engineVehicles with manual transmission1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and

hold it there.3. Start the engine.

Vehicles with automatic transmission1. Select park or neutral.2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and

hold it there.3. Fully depress the brake pedal.4. Start the engine.

All vehiclesIf the engine does not start, repeat theCold or hot engine procedure.

Engine idle speed after startingThe speed at which the engine idlesimmediately after starting will varydepending on the engine temperature.If the engine is cold then the idle speed willautomatically be increased in order to heatthe catalytic converter as quickly aspossible. This makes sure that vehicleemissions are kept to an absoluteminimum.The idle speed will slowly decrease to thenormal level as the catalytic converterwarms up.

STARTING A PETROL ENGINE- E85For general information on starting a petrolengine. See Starting a Petrol Engine(page 147).

Starting at low ambienttemperaturesWhen the temperature is lower than -10°C(14°F) and the vehicle is filled with E85, anengine block heater should be used tofacilitate starting. See Engine BlockHeater (page 150). Failure to do this willresult in a non start.

148


If the temperature is expected to remainbelow -10°C (14°F), it is recommendedthat you increase the proportion of petrolin the tank by topping up with 95 octaneunleaded petrol if the tank is not alreadyfull. About 10 litres (2.2 gallons) of petrolwill reduce the proportion of E85 in a ¾ fulltank from 85% to 70% and willconsiderably improve cold start capability.If, at very low temperatures, the tank isfilled with only E85 and there is no way touse an engine block heater, you mayexperience difficulties starting the engine.If the engine fails to start, proceed asfollows:1. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.2. Turn the ignition key to position III.

CAUTIONRelease the ignition key as soon asthe engine has started.

3. Gradually release the accelerator pedalafter five seconds of engine crankingor as the engine speed rises.

If the engine fails to start, repeat steps 1, 2and 3, or connect an engine block heaterfor two hours before attempting anotherstart.During starting, the fuel injectors are turnedoff as long as the accelerator pedal isdepressed. This can be used to drainexcessive fuel from the intake manifoldafter several unsuccessful startingattempts.If the battery has been disconnected orafter the fuel type has been changed, theidle speed may be irregular. This willimprove after 10 to 30 seconds.

STARTING A DIESEL ENGINECold or hot engineAll vehiclesNote: When the temperature is below -15°C(5°F), you may need to crank the engine forup to 25 seconds.Note: Continue cranking the engine until itstarts.Note: You can only operate the starter fora maximum of 30 seconds at a time.

Switch the ignition on and waituntil the glow plug indicator goesoff.

Vehicles with manual transmissionNote: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.2. Start the engine.

Vehicles with automatic transmission1. Select park or neutral.2. Fully depress the brake pedal.3. Start the engine.

DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTERThe DPF forms part of the emissionsreduction systems fitted to your vehicle. Itfilters harmful diesel particulates (soot)from the exhaust gas.

149


RegenerationWARNING

Do not park or idle your vehicle overdry leaves, dry grass or othercombustible materials. The DPF

regeneration process creates very highexhaust gas temperatures and the exhaustwill radiate a considerable amount of heatduring and after DPF regeneration, andafter you have switched the engine off.This is a potential fire hazard.

CAUTIONAvoid running out of fuel.

Note: During regeneration at low speed orengine idle, you may smell a hot metallicodour and could notice a clicking metallicsound. This is due to the high temperaturesreached during regeneration and is normal.Note: After you have switched your engineoff the fans may continue to run for a shortperiod of time.Unlike a normal filter which requiresperiodic replacement, the DPF has beendesigned to regenerate, or clean itself tomaintain operating efficiency. Theregeneration process takes placeautomatically. However, some drivingconditions mean that you may need tosupport the regeneration process.If you drive only short distances or yourjourneys contain frequent stopping andstarting, where there is increasedacceleration and deceleration, occasionaltrips with the following conditions willassist the regeneration process:

• Drive your vehicle at a constant speed,preferably on a main road or motorway,for up to 20 minutes.

• Avoid prolonged idling and alwaysobserve speed limits and roadconditions.

• Do not switch off the ignition.• Use a lower gear than normal to

maintain a higher engine speed duringthis journey, where appropriate.

SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINEVehicles with a turbocharger

CAUTIONDo not switch the engine off when itis running at high speed. If you do, theturbocharger will continue running

after the engine oil pressure has droppedto zero. This will lead to prematureturbocharger bearing wear.

Release the accelerator pedal. Wait untilthe engine has reached idle speed and thenswitch it off.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER

CAUTIONMake sure you disconnect the powercable from the engine heaterconnector before driving away.

Note: The engine heater connector islocated in the radiator grille at the front ofyour vehicle.

150


E97918

Connect the engine heater for 2 to 3 hoursbefore starting the engine.

151


PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

CAUTIONFor vehicles with Start-stop thebattery requirement is different. Itmust be replaced by one of exactly

the same specification as the original.

The system reduces fuel consumption andCO2 emissions by shutting down theengine when the vehicle is idling, forexample at traffic lights. The engine willautomatically restart when the driverpresses the clutch pedal or when requiredby a vehicle system, for example torecharge the battery.To obtain maximum benefit from thesystem, move the gear lever to the neutralposition and release the clutch pedalduring any stop of longer than threeseconds.

USING START-STOP

WARNINGSThe engine may restartautomatically if required by thesystem. See Principle of Operation

(page 152).Switch the ignition off beforeopening the bonnet or carrying outany maintenance.Always switch the ignition off beforeleaving your vehicle, as the systemmay have shut down the engine but

the ignition will still be live.

Note: The system only operates when theengine is warm and the outside temperatureis between 0°C (32°F) and 30°C (86°F).

Note: If you stall the engine, and thendepress the clutch pedal within a couple ofseconds, the system will automaticallyrestart the engine.Note: The Start-stop indicator willilluminate green when the engine shutsdown. See Warning Lamps and Indicators(page 85).Note: The Start-stop indicator will flashamber, requiring you to select neutral ordepress the clutch pedal. In conjunction amessage will be shown in the display.Note: If the system detects a malfunction,it is deactivated. Have the system checkedby a properly trained technician.Note: If you have switched the system off,the switch will be illuminated.Note: The system is on by default. Toswitch the system off, press the switch inthe instrument panel. The system will onlybe de-activated for the current ignitioncycle. To turn it on, press the switch again.For item location. See At a Glance (page10).

To stop the engine1. Stop the vehicle.2. Move the gear lever to the neutral

position.3. Release the clutch pedal.4. Release the accelerator pedal.The system may not shut down the engineunder certain conditions, for example:• To maintain the interior climate.• Low battery voltage.• The outside temperature is too low or

too high.• The driver's door has been opened.

152

Start-Stop

• Low engine operating temperature.• Low brake system vacuum.• If a road speed of 5 km/h (3 mph) has

not been exceeded.

To re-start the engineNote: The gear lever must be in the neutralposition.Depress the clutch pedal.The system may automatically restart theengine under certain conditions, forexample:• Low battery voltage.• To maintain the interior climate.

153

Start-Stop

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONThe system assists the driver to drive moreefficiently by constantly monitoringcharacteristics of gear changing,anticipation of traffic conditions andspeeds on motorways and open roads.Note: These efficiency values do not resultin a defined fuel consumption figure. It mightvary as it is not only related to these drivingdisciplines but also influenced by manyother factors such as short journeys and coldstarts.Note: Frequent short journeys, where theengine does not fully warm up, will alsoincrease fuel consumption.The value of these characteristics isrepresented by petals shown in the display,with five petals being the most efficient.The more efficiently you drive, the betterthe rating, and the better your overall fuelconsumption.

Type 1

E121813A B C

Gear shiftingAAnticipationBEfficient speedC

Gear shiftingUsing the highest drivable gear appropriatefor the road conditions will improve fuelconsumption.

AnticipationAdjusting your vehicle speed and thedistance to other vehicles without the needfor heavy braking or acceleration willimprove fuel consumption.

Efficient speedHigher speeds use more fuel. Reducingyour cruising speed on open roads willimprove fuel consumption.

Type 2 and 3The relevant information will be shown inthe display.

USING ECO MODEThe system is accessed using the relevantinformation display menu. SeeInformation Displays (page 89).

Resetting Eco modeReset the average fuel consumption.Note: New values may take a short time tocalculate.

154

Eco Mode

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNINGSStop refuelling after the fuel nozzlestops the second time. Additionalfuel will fill the expansion space in

the fuel tank which could lead to fueloverflowing. Fuel spillage could behazardous to other road users.

Do not use any kind of flames or heatnear the fuel system. The fuel systemis under pressure. There is a risk of

injury if the fuel system is leaking.

FUEL QUALITY - PETROL

CAUTIONDo not use leaded petrol or petrol withadditives containing other metalliccompounds (e.g. manganese-based).

They could damage the emission system.

Note: We recommend that you use onlyhigh quality fuel without additives or otherengine treatments.Use minimum 95 octane unleadedpetrol that meets the specification definedby EN 228, or equivalent.

FUEL QUALITY - E85

WARNINGSDo not modify the fuel systemconfiguration or the components inthe system.Do not replace the fuel system or thecomponents with parts not speciallydesigned to be used with E85.

CAUTIONSDo not use leaded petrol or petrol withadditives containing other metalliccompounds (e.g. manganese-based).

They could damage the emission system.Do not use methanol instead of E85.

Note: We recommend that you use onlyhigh quality fuel without additives or otherengine treatments.Note: When using E85, you may experiencea higher fuel consumption.Note: Your vehicle will operate well oncommercial quality 95 octane unleadedpetrol, but only high quality E85 offers thesame protection and performance.Use minimum 95 octane unleadedpetrol that meets the specification definedby EN 228, or equivalent. You can also usea mixture of unleaded petrol and E85.

Long-term storageDue to small amounts of corrosiveimpurities that may be found in the E85, itis recommended that you fill the tank withonly 95 octane unleaded petrol prior tolong-term storage of your vehicle.

FUEL QUALITY - DIESEL

WARNINGDo not mix diesel with oil, petrol orother liquids. This could cause achemical reaction.

CAUTIONSDo not add kerosene, paraffin orpetrol to diesel. This could causedamage to the fuel system.

155

Fuel and Refuelling

CAUTIONSUse diesel that meets thespecification defined by EN 590, orthe relevant national specification.

Note: We recommend that you use onlyhigh quality fuel.Note: The use of additives or other enginetreatments not approved by Ford is notrecommended.Note: We do not recommend the prolongeduse of additives intended to prevent fuelwaxing.

Long-term storageMost diesel fuels contain bio-diesel, it isrecommended to fill the tank with purelymineral diesel (where available) or add ananti-oxidant prior to long-term storage ofyour vehicle exceeding two months. Yourdealer can help you with a suitableanti-oxidant.

CATALYTIC CONVERTER

WARNINGDo not park or idle your vehicle overdry leaves, dry grass or othercombustible materials. The exhaust

will radiate a considerable amount of heatduring use, and after you have switchedthe engine off. This is a potential firehazard.

Driving with a catalytic converterCAUTIONS

Avoid running out of fuel.

Do not crank the engine for longperiods.Do not run the engine when a sparkplug lead is disconnected.

CAUTIONSDo not push-start or tow-start yourvehicle. Use booster cables. SeeJump-Starting the Vehicle (page

251).Do not switch the ignition off whendriving.

FUEL FILLER FLAP

WARNINGSTake care when refuelling to avoidspilling any residual fuel from the fuelnozzle.Do not use any kind of flames or heatnear the fuel system. The fuel systemis under pressure. There is a risk of

injury if the fuel system is leaking.

CAUTIONIf you use a high pressure spray towash your vehicle, only spray the fuelfiller flap briefly from a distance not

less than 200 millimetres (8 inches).

Note: Central locking also locks andunlocks the fuel filler flap. See Locking andUnlocking (page 38).

E86613

1. Press the flap to open it. Open the flapfully until it engages.

156

Fuel and Refuelling

E139202

A

A

Note: When you insert the fuel nozzle, aspring loaded inhibitor will open if thecorrect size nozzle is detected. This helpsto avoid filling up with the wrong fuel.2. Insert the fuel nozzle up to and

including the first notch on the nozzleA. Keep it resting on the cover of thefuel pipe opening.

WARNINGStop refuelling after the fuel nozzlestops the second time. Additionalfuel will fill the expansion space in

the fuel tank which could lead to fueloverflowing. Fuel spillage could behazardous to other road users.

E139203

A

B

Incorrect positionACorrect positionB

3. Do not lift the nozzle during refilling. Thiscan affect the flow of fuel and shut off ofthe fuel nozzle before the fuel tank is full.

E139355

4. Operate the nozzle within the areashown.

WARNINGSWe recommend that you remove thefuel nozzle slowly to allow anyresidual fuel to drain into the fuel

tank. Alternatively you can wait 10 secondsbefore removing the fuel nozzle.

157

Fuel and Refuelling

WARNINGSDo not remove the nozzle from itsfully inserted position during theentire refuelling process.

E119081

5. Slightly raise the fuel nozzle to removeit.

Refuelling with a fuel canUse the funnel which is located in theunderfloor storage compartment behindthe front seats. See Storagecompartments (page 140).

REFUELLING

CAUTIONDo not attempt to start the engine ifyou have filled the fuel tank with theincorrect fuel. This could damage the

engine. Have the system checked by aproperly trained technician immediately.

REFUELLING - E85

CAUTIONDo not attempt to start the engine ifyou have filled the fuel tank with theincorrect fuel. This could damage the

engine. Have the system checked by aproperly trained technician immediately.

After refuelling, allow 5 minutes of normalengine operation above 48 km/h (30 mph)to reduce the risk of an increased enginerestart time.

FUEL CONSUMPTIONThe CO2 and fuel consumption figures arederived from laboratory tests according toEEC Directive 80/1268/EEC andsubsequent amendments and are carriedout by all vehicle manufacturers.They are intended as a comparisonbetween makes and models of vehicles.They are not intended to represent the realworld fuel consumption you may get fromyour vehicle. Real world fuel consumptionis governed by many factors including;driving style, high speed driving, stop/startdriving, air conditioning usage, theaccessories fitted and towing etc.Your Ford dealer can give you advice onimproving your fuel consumption.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

158

Fuel and Refuelling

S-MAXFuel Consumption Figures

CO2 Emis-sionsCombinedExtra-UrbanUrban

Variantg/kml/100 km

(mpg)l/100 km

(mpg)l/100 km

(mpg)

1647 (40.4)5.7 (49.6)9.4 (30.1)1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)Stage V (118kW/160PS), 6-speed manual transmission

1948.1 (34.9)6.4 (44.1)11 (25.7)2.0L Duratec-HE (MI4)Stage IV (107kW/145PS), 5-speed manual transmission

1898.2 (34.4)6.4 (44.1)11.3 (25)2.0L Duratec-HE (MI4)Stage V (107kW/145PS), 5-speed manual transmission

1888.1 (34.9)6.4 (44.1)11.2 (25.2)2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4)Stage V (149kW/203PS), 6-speed manual transmission

1888.1 (34.9)6.4 (44.1)11.2 (25.2)2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4)Stage V (176kW/240PS), 6-speed manual transmission

1898.1 (34.9)6.4 (44.1)11 (25.7)2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4)Stage V (149kW/203PS), 6-speed automatic transmis-sion

1948.3 (34)6.5 (43.5)11.5 (24.6)2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4)Stage V (176kW/240PS), 6-speed automatic transmis-sion

2329.7 (29.1)7.4 (38.2)13.7 (20.6)2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4)(118kW/161PS), 6-speedautomatic transmission

1445.4 (52.3)5 (56.5)6.2 (45.6)

1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV)Diesel Stage V(85kW/115PS), 6-speedmanual transmissionwithout start-stop

159

Fuel and Refuelling


Variantg/kml/100 km

(mpg)l/100 km

(mpg)l/100 km

(mpg)

1395.2 (54.3)4.9 (57.6)5.9 (47.9)

1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV)Diesel Stage V(85kW/115PS), 6-speedmanual transmission withstart-stop

1596 (47.1)5 (56.5)7.7 (36.7)

2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage IV(103kW/140PS), Durashift6-speed manual transmis-sion

1525.7 (49.6)4.9 (57.6)7.2 (39.2)

2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage V(120kW/163PS), Durashift6-speed manual transmis-sion

1897.2 (39.2)5.7 (49.6)9.7 (29.1)2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage IV(103kW/140PS), 6-speedautomatic transmission

1596 (47.1)5.2 (54.3)7.4 (38.2)2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage V(120kW/163PS), 6-speedautomatic transmission

1746.6 (42.8)5.2 (54.3)8.9 (31.7)


1746.6 (42.8)5.7 (49.6)8.2 (34.4)2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel (147kW/200PS)

160

Fuel and Refuelling

GalaxyFuel Consumption Figures


Variantg/kml/100 km

(mpg)l/100 km

(mpg)l/100 km

(mpg)

1697.2 (39.2)5.8 (48.7)9.7 (29)1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)Stage V (118kW/160PS), 6-speed manual transmission

1978.2 (34.4)6.5 (43.5)11.2 (25.2)2.0L Duratec-HE (MI4)Stage IV (107kW/145PS), 5-speed manual transmission

1898.2 (34.4)6.4 (44.1)11.3 (25)2.0L Duratec-HE (MI4)Stage V (107kW/145PS), 5-speed manual transmission

1898.1 (34.9)6.4 (44.1)11 (25.7)2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4)Stage V (149kW/203PS), 6-speed automatic transmis-sion

2359.8 (28.8)7.5 (37.7)13.8 (20.5)2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4)(118kW/161PS), 6-speedautomatic transmission

1445.4 (52.3)5 (56.5)6.2 (45.6)

1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV)Diesel Stage V(85kW/115PS), 6-speedmanual transmissionwithout start-stop

1395.2 (54.3)4.9 (57.6)5.9 (47.9)

1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV)Diesel Stage V(85kW/115PS), 6-speedmanual transmission withstart-stop

1596 (47.1)5 (56.5)7.7 (36.7)


161

Fuel and Refuelling


Variantg/kml/100 km

(mpg)l/100 km

(mpg)l/100 km

(mpg)

1525.7 (49.6)4.9 (57.6)7.2 (39.2)

2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage V(120kW/163PS), Durashift6-speed manual transmis-sion

1897.2 (39.2)5.7 (49.6)9.7 (29.1)2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage IV(100kW/140PS), 6-speedautomatic transmission

1596 (47.1)5.2 (54.3)7.4 (38.2)2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage V(120kW/163PS), 6-speedautomatic transmission

1796.7 (42.2)5.3 (53.3)9.1 (31)2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel Stage IV129kW/175PS), Durashift 6-speed manual transmission

1796.8 (41.5)5.8 (48.7)8.4 (33.6)2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel (147kW/200PS)

162

Fuel and Refuelling

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

CAUTIONDo not engage reverse gear when thevehicle is moving. This can causedamage to the transmission.

E99067

On some vehicles it is necessary to raisethe collar whilst selecting reverse gear.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONSelector lever positions

E80836

S

ParkPReverseR

NeutralNDriveDSport mode and manual shiftingS

WARNINGApply the brakes before moving theselector lever and keep them applieduntil you are ready to move off.

Note: A cold engine has a higher idle speed.This will increase the tendency for yourvehicle to creep when you have selected adrive gear.Press the button on the selector lever toselect reverse and park.The selector lever position will be shownin the information display.

Park

WARNINGSSelect park only when your vehicleis stationary.Apply the parking brake andselect park before leaving yourvehicle. Make sure that the selector

lever is latched in position.

Note: An audible warning will sound if youopen the driver's door and you have notselected park.In this position, power is not transmittedto the drive wheels and the transmissionis locked. You can start the engine with theselector lever in this position.

Reverse

WARNINGSelect reverse only when your vehicleis stationary and the engine is at idlespeed.

163

Transmission

NeutralIn this position, power is not transmittedto the drive wheels but the transmission isnot locked. You can start the engine withthe selector lever in this position.

DriveSelect drive to shift automatically throughthe forward gears.

Sport mode and manual shifting

2

1

E80837

S

S

Note: A shift will occur only when thevehicle speed and the engine speed areappropriate.Note: When you select position S, a gearchange may occur depending on theaccelerator pedal position in relation toactual vehicle speed.Activate sport mode by moving theselector lever to position S. Sport modewill remain active until you shift manuallyup or down the gears.Select manual shifting to shift manuallythrough the forward gears. Push theselector lever forwards to shift down andpull it backwards to shift up.

Drive modesThe transmission will select theappropriate gear for optimum performancebased on ambient temperature, roadgradient, vehicle load and driver input.

Hints on driving with an automatictransmissionMoving off1. Release the parking brake.2. Release the brake pedal and press the

accelerator pedal.

Stopping1. Release the accelerator pedal and

press the brake pedal.2. Apply the parking brake.

KickdownPress the accelerator pedal fully with theselector lever in the drive position to selectthe next lowest gear for optimumperformance. Release the acceleratorpedal when you no longer requirekickdown.

Emergency park position releaseleverUse the lever to move the selector leverfrom the park position in the event of anelectrical malfunction or if your vehicle hasa flat battery.

164

Transmission

E81705

1

3

24

1. Insert a small flat-bladed tool into theslot.

2. Turn the tool through 90 degrees.3. Push downwards on the tool to detach

the gaiter frame from the trim panel.4. Push downwards on the gaiter frame

to release the lever and move theselector lever from the park position.

5. Pull upwards on the gaiter until thegaiter frame engages in the trim panel.

Note: If position P is selected again, thisprocedure must be repeated.

165

Transmission

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONNote: Depending on applicable laws andregulations in the country for which yourvehicle was originally built, the brake lampsmay flash if you brake heavily.Note: Occasional brake noise is normal andoften does not indicate a concern. In normaloperation, the system may emit occasionalor intermittent squeal or groan noises whenthe brakes are applied. Such noises areusually caused by environmental conditionssuch as cold, heat, moisture, road dust, saltor mud.

Disc brakesWet brake discs result in reduced brakingefficiency. Dab the brake pedal whendriving from a car wash to remove the filmof water.

ABSWARNING

The ABS does not relieve you of yourresponsibility to drive with due careand attention.

The ABS helps you to maintain full steeringand directional stability when you brakeheavily in an emergency, by preventing theroad wheels from locking.

HINTS ON DRIVING WITHANTI-LOCK BRAKESWhen the ABS is operating, the brake pedalwill pulse. This is normal. Maintain pressureon the brake pedal.The ABS will not eliminate the dangersinherent when:• you drive too close to the vehicle in

front of you.• the vehicle is aquaplaning.

• you take corners too fast.• the road surface is poor.

PARKING BRAKEApplying the parking brake

E73224

WARNINGMake sure that the parking brake isapplied before you release the lever.

Note: Do not press the release button whenyou apply the parking brake.1. Press the brake pedal firmly.2. Pull the parking brake lever upwards

to its fullest extent.

166

Brakes

Parking on a hillIf you have to park facing uphill, select firstgear and turn the front wheels away fromthe kerb. If you have to park facingdownhill, select reverse gear and turn thefront wheels towards the kerb.

Releasing the parking brake1. Press the brake pedal firmly.2. Pull the parking brake lever upwards

slightly, press the release button andpush the lever downwards.

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKEThe electric parking brake (EPB) replacesthe conventional handbrake. It is operatedby a switch located in the centre console.

WARNINGSAlways apply the EPB before leavingthe vehicle.Vehicles with manual transmissionshould always be left in first orreverse gear.Vehicles with automatictransmission should always be leftwith the selector lever in position P.

Note: Under certain conditions for exampleon a steep hill, when the vehicle has beenparked with the EPB applied, the EPBperforms an automatic re-clamp function.This will occur approximately three minutesafter the EPB has been applied.Note: You may notice various noises whenthe EPB is applied and released. This isnormal and no cause for concern.

Parking on a hillIf you have to park facing uphill, select firstgear and turn the front wheels away fromthe kerb. If you have to park facingdownhill, select reverse gear and turn thefront wheels towards the kerb.

Applying the EPB

E70528

Pull up the switch once to apply the EPB.The brake system warning lampilluminates to confirm that the EPB is nowapplied.Note: The brake system warning lamp willremain illuminated for a short period if youturn the ignition to position 0 or remove thekey.

Automatic application of the EPBWARNING

The EPB will not automatically applyon vehicles with a keyless start orkeyless entry system. You must apply

the EPB using the EPB switch.

When you turn the ignition off, the clusterwill remain on for several minutes.The EPB will automatically apply whenyou remove the key from the ignition duringthis period.

167

Brakes

Preventing automatic applicationof the EPB

WARNINGSDo not leave the vehicle if you havenot applied the EPB. Remember thatif you press down the switch while

removing the key from the ignition the EPBwill not be applied.

Make sure that the vehicle’s wheelsare securely wedged if you park thevehicle with the EPB released to

prevent it from rolling away.

E70529

Hold the switch pressed while you switchoff the ignition or while you remove the keyfrom the ignition.

WARNINGIf you prevented the EPB fromapplying while turning off the ignition,it will remain off when you remove

the key.

Applying the EPB when the vehicleis moving

WARNINGWith the exception of emergencyconditions (for example, the brakepedal does not work or is blocked),

do not apply the EPB while the vehicle ismoving. On bends, on poor road surfacesor weather conditions, emergency brakingcan cause the vehicle to skid out of controlor off the road.

If you apply the EPB while the vehicle ismoving, the brake system warning lampilluminates and a warning chime willsound.At speeds above 6 km/h (4 mph), thebraking force is applied as long as you holdthe switch in the on position. The EPB willbe applied until you release or press downthe switch, or press the accelerator pedalfurther.

Releasing the EPBAutomatic release - drive away release(DAR)Note: On vehicles with automatictransmission, the driver's door must beclosed and the driver's seatbelt must befastened before the DAR will operate.Note: If the EPB warning lamp staysilluminated the EPB will not automaticallyrelease. You must release the EPB using theEPB switch.Note: The engine must be running and theaccelerator pedal must be pressed beforethe DAR will operate.Note: The clutch pedal must be fullydepressed before the DAR will operate.Engage first or reverse gear, move off asnormal using the accelerator and clutchpedals and the EPB will be automaticallyreleased.

168

Brakes

The brake system warning lamp will go offto confirm that the EPB has been released.Note: On vehicles with manualtransmission, if the gear lever is in neutralwhen you release the clutch pedal anddepress the accelerator pedal, the EPB willbe released automatically.Note: The EPB also makes moving off ona slope easier and prevents the vehicle fromrolling in an undesired direction. The brakesare released automatically once the clutchis engaged and the engine has developedsufficient drive to prevent the vehicle fromrolling down the slope. This is an advantagewhen pulling away on a slope, for examplefrom a car park ramp, traffic lights or whenreversing uphill into a parking space.

Manual releaseNote: To release the EPB, the ignition mustbe in position II.

E70529

Hold the brake pedal depressed and pressdown the switch.The brake system warning lamp will go offto confirm that the EPB has been released.

Moving off with a trailer (vehicles withmanual transmission)Depending on the gradient and the weightof the trailer, the vehicle and trailer mayroll backwards slightly when you move offon a slope. To prevent this happening,deactivate the DAR and release the EPBmanually as follows:1. Pull up the switch and hold it in this

position.2. Move off as normal and then press

down the switch when you notice thatthe engine has developed sufficientdriving force.

Cut in the power supplyWARNING

You will not be able to apply orrelease the EPB if there is a cut in thepower supply, for example a flat

battery, failure of the alternator or vehicleelectronics.

If the battery is flat, use booster cables anda booster battery. See Jump-Starting theVehicle (page 251).

169

Brakes

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONElectronic stability programme(ESP)

WARNINGThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.

E72903

A A

AB

B

B

B

Without ESPAWith ESPB

The system supports stability when thevehicle starts to slide away from yourintended path. This is performed by brakingindividual wheels and reducing enginetorque as needed.The system also provides an enhancedtraction control function by reducingengine torque if the wheels spin when youaccelerate. This improves your ability topull away on slippery roads or loosesurfaces, and improves comfort by limitingwheel spin in hairpin bends.

Stability control (ESP) warning lampWhile driving, it flashes during activationof the system. See Warning Lamps andIndicators (page 85).

Emergency brake assistWARNING


The system will detect when you brakeheavily by measuring the rate at which youpress the brake pedal. It will providemaximum braking efficiency as long as youpress the pedal. The system can reducestopping distances in critical situations.

USING STABILITY CONTROLNote: The system will be switched onautomatically every time you switch theignition on.

Vehicles with stability control(ESP) switch

E71225

Press and hold the switch for one second.The switch will illuminate. A message willbe shown in the display. See InformationMessages (page 102).Press the switch again to turn the systemon.For item location: See At a Glance (page10).

Vehicles without stability control(ESP) switchTurn the system off and on using theinformation display. See InformationDisplays (page 89).

170

Stability Control

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONThe system makes it easier to pull awaywhen the vehicle is on a slope without theneed to use the parking brake.When the system is active, the vehicle willremain stationary on the slope for a shorttime after you release the brake pedal.During this time, you have time to moveyour foot from the brake to the acceleratorpedal and pull away. The brakes arereleased automatically once the enginehas developed sufficient drive to preventthe vehicle from rolling down the slope.This is an advantage when pulling awayon a slope, for example from a car parkramp, traffic lights or when reversing uphillinto a parking space.

WARNINGThe system does not replace theparking brake. When you leave thevehicle, always apply the parking

brake and select first or reverse gear.

USING HILL START ASSISTThe HLA can operate in either automaticor manual mode. If you select automaticmode, the HLA is activated automaticallywhen the vehicle is on a slope and youpress the brake pedal. If you select manualmode, you must activate the HLA using thebrake pedal.To set the HLA mode:

E70499

E74629

AutoOff

Hill Launch

Manual


2. Highlight Setup with the up and downbuttons and press the right arrowbutton.

3. Highlight Hill Launch and press theright arrow button.

4. Highlight the desired setting and pressthe OK button to confirm the setting.If Off is selected, the HLA is switchedoff and cannot be activated eitherautomatically or manually.


171

Hill Start Assist

Note: When HLA is in manual activationmode, only use the HLA when pulling awayuphill on gradients greater than 3%. If thevehicle is on the flat or on a downhill slope,an active HLA will make it difficult to pullaway smoothly.

Activating the HLAWARNINGS

You must remain in the vehicle onceyou have activated the HLA. Anyattempt to leave the vehicle will

deactivate the HLA automatically.The HLA is active only if the messageHill Launch Assist active isdisplayed in the information display.

During all times you are responsible forcontrolling the vehicle, supervising the HLAand intervening, if required.

You can activate the HLA only if thefollowing conditions have been met:• The engine is running.• The HLA is switched on (automatic or

manual mode).• The parking brake or electric parking

brake (EPB) is fully disengaged.• On vehicles with manual transmission,

the clutch pedal is pressed.• On vehicles with automatic

transmission, the driver's door isclosed.

• No failure mode is present.To activate the HLA in automatic mode:

1. Press the brake pedal to bring thevehicle to a complete standstill. Keepthe brake pedal depressed.

2. If the sensors detect that the vehicle ison a slope and the right drivingdirection is selected (first gear if thevehicle is pointing uphill, reverse gearif the vehicle is pointing downhill), theHLA will be activated automatically.Hill Launch Assist active is displayedin the information display.

3. When you remove your foot from thebrake pedal, the vehicle will remain onthe slope without rolling away forapproximately two to three seconds.

4. Drive off in the normal manner. Thebrakes will be released automatically.

To activate the HLA in manual mode:1. Press the brake pedal to bring the

vehicle to a complete standstill. Keepthe brake pedal depressed.

2. Quickly jab the brake pedal further untilyou hear a chime and Hill LaunchAssist active is displayed in theinformation display. The HLA is nowactive.

3. When you remove your foot from thebrake pedal, the vehicle will remain onthe slope without rolling away forapproximately two to three seconds.

4. Drive off in the normal manner. Thebrakes will be released automatically.

172

Hill Start Assist

WARNINGWhen HLA is active and the systemdetects a malfunction, the HLA isdeactivated and the message

Please use park brake! followed by HillLaunch A .not available is displayed inthe information display. The vehicle is stillsafe to be driven and can be repairedduring the next service. The message HillLaunch A. not available is also displayedin the information display with manualactivation during a malfunction or if one ofthe activation criteria is not met. If youhave switched the HLA off, no messageswill be displayed.

Deactivating the HLATo deactivate the HLA, perform one of thefollowing:• Apply the parking brake or electric

parking brake (EPB) .• Wait for two to three seconds until the

HLA deactivates automatically.• If a forward gear was selected when

the HLA became active, select reversegear.

• If reverse gear was selected when theHLA became active, select a forwardgear.

Hill Launch Assist off is displayed in theinformation display.

173

Hill Start Assist

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONThe active suspension provides improvedhandling, comfort and stability bycontinuously adjusting the damperproperties to the current road and drivingconditions. This system in conjunction withthe ABS system offers the benefit ofpotentially shorter stopping distances onrough road surfaces.Depending on your preferences and drivingstyle, you can choose between threedifferent settings:

ComfortThis provides a softer driving feel.

NormalNormal setting.

SportThis provides a harder, sportier ride.

USING ACTIVE SUSPENSIONSelecting a settingNote: After you select a setting, you maynot immediately notice a difference in thevehicle's handling. The effect of thecontinuously controlled damping dependson the road surface and driving conditions.

E70475

You can change the setting while driving.

System malfunctionThe active suspension system will switchoff automatically if it malfunctions. Thesuspension will be set to a fail-safecondition that will enable you to continuedriving but you will not be able to changethe suspension setting. Have this checkedas soon as possible.

174

Active suspension


WARNINGThe parking aid does not relieve youof your responsibility to drive withdue care and attention.

CAUTIONSVehicles fitted with a trailer towmodule not approved by us may notcorrectly detect obstacles.The sensors may not detect objectsin heavy rain or other conditions thatcause disruptive reflections.The sensors may not detect objectswith surfaces that absorb ultrasonicwaves.The parking aid does not detectobstacles moving away from thevehicle. They will only be detected

shortly after they start to move towardsthe vehicle again.

Take particular care when reversingwith a tow ball arm or rear fittedaccessories e.g. a bicycle carrier, as

the rear parking aid will only indicate thedistance from the bumper to the obstacle.

If you use a high pressure spray towash your vehicle, only spray thesensors briefly from a distance not

less than 20 centimetres (8 inches).

Note: On vehicles fitted with a tow ballarm, the parking aid is deactivatedautomatically when any trailer lamps (orlighting boards) are connected to the 13-pinsocket via a trailer tow module we haveapproved.Note: Keep the sensors free from dirt, iceand snow. Do not clean with sharp objects.

Note: The parking aid may emit false tonesif it detects a signal using the samefrequency as the sensors or if the vehicle isfully laden.Note: The outer sensors may detect theside walls of a garage. If the distancebetween the outer sensor and the side wallremains constant for three seconds, thetone will switch off. As you continue, theinner sensors will detect rearward objects.

USING THE PARKING AIDSwitching the parking aid on andoffNote: The parking aid switches offautomatically when you start the engine orwhen you exceed 16 km/h (10 mph).Note: The front and rear sensors are alwaysactivated or deactivated together.The parking aid is per default off. To switchthe parking aid on, press the switch in theinstrument panel or select reverse gear.The light in the switch illuminates whenthe parking aid is activated.To turn it off, press the switch again.

Manoeuvring with the parking aid

E72902

Note: If a high pitch warning tone soundsfor three seconds and the light in the switchis flashing, it indicates a malfunction. Thesystem will be disabled. Have the systemchecked by properly trained technicians.

175

Parking Aids

You will hear an intermittent tone at adistance of up to approximately 150centimetres (59 inches) between theobstacle and rear bumper, 80 centimetres(31 inches) between the obstacle and frontbumper and 50 centimetres (20 inches)to the side. Decreasing the distanceaccelerates the intermittent tone. Acontinuous tone will start at a distance ofless than 30 centimetres (12 inches).You will hear an alternating tone from thefront and rear if obstacles are closer than30 centimetres (12 inches) to the front andrear bumpers.

176

Parking Aids

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONThe camera is a visual aid for use whenreversing.

WARNINGThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.

CAUTIONSIf you use a high pressure spray towash your vehicle, only spray thecamera briefly from a distance not

less than 20 centimetres (8 inches).Do not apply pressure to the camera.

Note: Keep the camera free from dirt, iceand snow. Do not clean with sharp objects,degreaser, wax or organic products. Use onlya soft cloth.During operation, guide lines appear in thedisplay which represent your vehicle's pathand approximate distance from rearwardobjects.

USING THE REAR VIEWCAMERA

WARNINGSThe operation of the camera mayvary depending on the ambienttemperature, vehicle and road

conditions.The distances shown in the displaymay differ from the actual distance.Do not place objects in front of thecamera.

The camera is located on the luggagecompartment lid near the handle.

S-MAX

E99105

Galaxy

E124349

Activating the rear view cameraCAUTION

The camera may not detect objectsthat are close to the vehicle.

With the ignition and the audio unitswitched on, engage reverse gear. Theimage is displayed on the screen.

177

Rear view camera

The camera may not operate correctly inthe following conditions:• Dark areas.• Intense light.• If the ambient temperature increases

or decreases rapidly.• If the camera is wet, for example in rain

or high humidity.• If the camera's view is obstructed, for

example by mud.

Using the displayCAUTIONS

Obstacles above the camera positionwill not be shown. Inspect the areabehind your vehicle if necessary.Marks are for general guidance only,and are calculated for vehicles inmaximum load conditions on an even

road surface.

The lines show a projected vehicle path(based on the current steering wheelangle) and the distance from the exteriormirrors and rear bumper.

E99458

A

B

C

D E

A

B

C

D

Exterior mirror clearance - 0.1metre (4 inches)

A

Red - 0.3 metre (12 inches)BAmber - 1 metre (39 inches)C

178

Rear view camera

Amber - 2 metres (79 inches)DShows the centre line of theprojected vehicle path

E

Note: When reversing with a trailer, the lineson the screen show the vehicle direction andnot the trailer.

Deactivating the rear view cameraNote: Disengage reverse gear. The displaywill stay on for a short period beforeswitching off.The system will automatically switch offonce the vehicle speed has reachedapproximately 15 km/h (9 mph).

Vehicles with parking aidThe display will additionally show acoloured distance bar. This guide indicatesthe distance from the rear bumper to thedetected obstacle.These are colour coded as follows:• Green - 0.8 to 1.5 metres (31 to 59

inches).• Amber - 0.3 to 0.8 metre (12 to 31

inches).• Red - 0.3 metre (12 inches) or less.

179

Rear view camera

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONCruise control allows you to control yourspeed using the switches on the steeringwheel. You can use cruise control whenyou exceed 30 km/h (20 mph).

USING CRUISE CONTROL

WARNINGDo not use cruise control in heavytraffic, on twisty roads or when theroad surface is slippery.

Switching cruise control on

E70612

Setting a speed

E70615

Press the SET+ switch or the SET- switchto store and maintain your current speed.The cruise control indicator illuminates.

Changing the set speedWARNING

When you are going downhill, yourspeed may increase above the setspeed. The system will not apply the

brakes. Change down a gear and press theRES switch to assist the system inmaintaining the set speed.

Note: If you accelerate by pressing theaccelerator pedal, the set speed will notchange. When you release the acceleratorpedal, you will return to the speed that youpreviously set.Press the SET+ switch or the SET- switchto accelerate or decelerate.

Cancelling the set speed

E70614

Press the brake pedal or the CAN switch.The system will no longer control yourspeed. The cruise control indicator will gooff but the system will retain the speedthat you previously set.

180

Cruise Control

Resuming the set speed

E70616

Press the RES switch. The cruise controlindicator illuminates and the system willattempt to resume the speed that youpreviously set.

Switching cruise control off

E70613

Press the OFF switch. The system will notretain the speed that you previously set.The cruise control indicator will go off.

181

Cruise Control


WARNINGSThe system is not a collision warningor avoidance system. The separateforward alert function provides a

collision warning and mitigation feature.See Forward alert function (page 187).You must intervene if the system does notdetect a vehicle in front.

When driving you are responsible formaintaining the correct distance andspeed, even when adaptive cruise

control is used. You must always payattention to the traffic conditions andintervene when adaptive cruise control isnot maintaining a suitable speed orsuitable distance.

The system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.The system does not brake for slowor stationary vehicles, pedestrians,objects in the road, oncoming and

crossing vehicles.

CAUTIONSOnly use adaptive cruise control whenconditions are favourable, for exampleon motorways and main roads with

steady free flowing traffic.Do not use in poor visibility,specifically fog, heavy rain, spray orsnow.Do not use on icy or slippery roads.

Do not use the system when enteringor leaving a motorway.The radar sensor has a limited field ofvision. In some situations it maydetect a vehicle other than the one

expected or not detect any vehicle at all.

Note: When adaptive cruise control isactivated, you may hear some unusualsounds during automatic braking. This isnormal and caused by the automaticbraking system.Note: Keep the front of the vehicle freefrom dirt, metal badges or objects, includingvehicle front protectors and additional lightswhich may prevent the sensor fromoperating.The system is designed to help youmaintain a gap from the vehicle ahead ora set road speed if there is no slowervehicle ahead. The system is intended toprovide enhanced operation of the vehiclewhen following other vehicles which are inthe same lane and travelling in the samedirection.The system is based on the use of a radarsensor which projects a beam directlyforward of the vehicle. This beam willdetect any vehicle ahead within thesystem's range.The radar sensor is mounted behind thefront grille.

182

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

Detection beam issues

E71621

Detection issues can occur:• With vehicles that edge into your lane

that can only be detected once theyhave moved fully into your lane (A).Motorcycles may be detected late, ornot at all. (B)

• With vehicles in front when going intoand coming out of a bend (C). Thedetection beam will not follow sharpcurves in the road.

In these cases the system may brake lateor unexpectedly. You should stay alert andintervene if necessary.

Automatic braking with ACCWARNINGS

You must take immediate actiononce alerted, as the adaptive cruisecontrol braking will not be sufficient

to keep a safe distance to the vehicle infront.

In some cases there may be nowarning or the warning may bedelayed. You should always apply

the brakes when necessary.When following a vehicle in front ofyou, adaptive cruise control will notautomatically decelerate to a stop.

The system will automatically brake foryou, if required to maintain the set gapbetween your vehicle and the one detectedin front. This braking capacity is limited toapproximately 30% of the total manualbraking capacity to ensure smooth andcomfortable cruising. If the car needs tobrake more heavily than this, and you donot intervene by braking manually, analarm will sound and a warning symbol willbe displayed in the cluster.

USING ADAPTIVE CRUISECONTROLThe system is operated by adjustmentcontrols mounted on the steering wheel.

183


Vehicles without speed limiter

E124908

A

C

E

D

B

ACC onAACC cancelBACC offCACC gap increaseDACC gap decreaseE

Vehicles with speed limiter

E124909

A

C

E

D

B

ACC on/offAACC cancelBSpeed limiter on/offC

ACC gap increaseDACC gap decreaseE

Switching the system onPress switch A. The system is set tostandby mode.

Setting a speedNote: The system must be in standbymode.

E133884

F

G

Set speed increaseFSet speed decreaseG

Press switch F or switch G to select yourdesired cruise speed. The speed isdisplayed in the information display andstored as the set speed.

Changing the set speedNote: Vehicle speed may be increased anddecreased at intervals of 5 km/h or 5 mph.Note: If the system does not react to thesechanges the reason may be that the gapinterval to the vehicle in front prevents anincrease in speed.

184


E133884

F

G

Press switch F to increase or switch G todecrease the set speed until the desiredset speed is shown in the informationdisplay. The vehicle speed will graduallychange to the selected speed.Note: Smaller increases of 1 km/h or 1 mphmay be set by pressing switch H.

E133885

H

ACC resumeH

Setting the vehicle gapCAUTION

Use the appropriate gap setting inaccordance with local trafficregulations.

Note: The gap setting is time dependantand therefore the distance willautomatically adjust with your speed. Forexample on a gap setting of four bars, thetime gap is 1.8 seconds. This will mean thatat a speed of 100 km/h (62 mph), thedistance to the vehicle in front will bemaintained at 50 metres (164 feet).Note: If the accelerator is depressed for ashort period, for example when overtaking,the system is temporarily deactivated andthen reactivated when the accelerator pedalis released. A message is displayed in theinformation display.Note: The gap setting will remainunchanged during ignition cycles.

E82311

The distance between you and the vehicledetected in front is maintained by avariable setting. There are five steps whichare represented by horizontal barsdisplayed in the information display. Onebar denotes the smallest gap and five barsindicate the largest gap. These bars areshown empty when in standby mode andfilled when in active mode.If no vehicle is detected in front, then onlyyour vehicle is displayed in the informationdisplay below the bars. The system willmaintain the set speed when conditionspermit. The set gap is maintained anddisplayed.If a vehicle is detected by the sensor, thedisplay will show another vehicle abovethe horizontal bars:

185


E82312

This is a follow mode, and the system willaccelerate or decelerate as necessary tomaintain the set gap.Press switch E to decrease the gap orswitch D to increase the gap. The gapselected will be represented by the numberof bars in the display.Note: The recommended gap setting is fourto five bars.

Temporarily deactivating thesystemNote: The system is cancelled when thegear lever is moved to a neutral position orif the accelerator pedal or clutch isdepressed for a long period of timePress either the brake or switch B to cancelthe system. The system will return tostandby mode allowing you full manualcontrol of the vehicle. The set speed andgap setting are retained in the memory.To resume adaptive cruise control pressswitch H. The system will resume with thepreviously set speed and vehicle gapsetting if conditions permit.

Switching the system offVehicles without speed limiterPress switch C to turn the system off.Note: When deactivating the system bypressing switch C, the stored speed is notretained.

Vehicles with speed limiterPress switch A to turn the system off.Note: When deactivating the system bypressing switch A, the stored speed is notretained.

Automatic deactivationNote: If the engine speed drops too low, amessage is displayed in the informationdisplay instructing you to change down agear (manual transmission only). If you donot follow this recommendation then thesystem will go into automatic deactivationmode.Note: The system will not operate if theelectronic stability programme (ESP) hasbeen manually switched off.The system is dependent on various othersafety systems, for example ABS and ESP.If any of these systems are malfunctioningor reacting to an emergency, the system isautomatically deactivated.In the event of automatic deactivation asignal will sound and the message isdisplayed in the information display SeeInformation Messages (page 102). Youmust then intervene and adapt your drivingand speed to vehicles in front.An automatic deactivation can be due tothe:• vehicle speed falling below 30 km/h

(20 mph)• wheels losing traction• brake temperature is high, for example

when driving on mountainous or hillyroads

• engine speed is too low• radar sensor is covered• parking brake or electric parking brake

(EPB) is applied.

186


FORWARD ALERT FUNCTION

WARNINGSNever wait for a collision warning.When driving you are responsible formaintaining the correct distance and

speed, even when the system is used.The system will only react to vehiclesin front travelling in the samedirection and will not react to slow

or stationary vehicles.Never drive in a manner to provokethe system. The system is designedto assist in emergencies only.

CAUTIONSWarnings may be triggered late, beabsent or triggered unnecessarily dueto detection beam issues. See

Principle of Operation (page 182).The system uses the same radarsensors as adaptive cruise control andtherefore has the same limitations.

See Principle of Operation (page 182).

Note: The brake support system onlyreduces the collision speed if you brakeimmediately once alerted.Note: If the brake pedal is depressedsufficiently quickly then braking isimplemented with full brake function, evenif the force on the pedal is light.Note: Brake support prepares the brakesystem for rapid braking and the brakes areapplied gently, which may be noticed as aslight jerk.Note: The collision alerts will only occur ifthe system is switched on, however thebrake support is always on and cannot beturned off.Note: The system may be used with orwithout the Adaptive cruise control systembeing activated.

The system assists you by warning of therisk of a collision with a vehicle in front.The system alerts you by warning chimesand a visual warning in the informationdisplay. See Information Messages(page 102).Brake support is activated to enable fullbraking effectiveness, and reduce theseverity of a collision with the vehicle infront.

Switching the system on and offNote: When the system is switched off, awarning indicator will remain illuminated inthe information display. See WarningLamps and Indicators (page 85).Note: The system status and settings willremain unchanged during ignition cycles.The system can be switched on and offusing the information display. See GeneralInformation (page 89).

Adjusting the warning sensitivityYou may adjust the system warningsensitivity using the buttons on the steeringwheel. See General Information (page89). This controls how early the visual andaudible warning is activated.

187



WARNINGWhen you are going downhill, yourspeed may increase above the setspeed. The system will not apply the

brakes but a warning will be given.

The system allows you to set a speed, towhich the vehicle then becomes limited.The set speed will become the effectivemaximum speed of the vehicle, but withthe option to temporarily exceed this limitif required.

USING THE SPEED LIMITERThe system is operated by adjustmentcontrols mounted on the steering wheel.Press button A to switch the system onand off. The information display willprompt for a speed to be set.Note: The set speed limit can beintentionally exceeded for a short period ifrequired, for example when overtaking.

E124874

A

B

Setting the speed limitUse the cruise control switches to alter themaximum speed setting.

E70615

Press the SET+ switch or the SET- switchto select your desired speed limit. Thespeed is indicated in the informationdisplay and stored as the set speed.Press button B to cancel the limiter andplace it in standby mode. The informationdisplay will confirm deactivation byshowing the set speed crossed out.

E70616

Press the RES button to resume thelimiter. The information display will confirmthe system is active by showing the setspeed again.

Intentionally exceeding the speedlimitDepress the accelerator hard close to thefull pedal travel and the limit willtemporarily deactivate. The system willreactivate once the vehicle speed dropsbelow the set speed.

188

Speed Limiter

System warningsIf the set limit is accidentally exceeded theinformation display will show the set speedflashing together with an audible warningchime.If the set limit is intentionally exceeded theinformation display will show the set speedcrossed out.

189

Speed Limiter


WARNINGSThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.At all times you are responsible forcontrolling the vehicle, supervisingthe system and intervening if

required.If the sensor becomes blocked thesystem may not function.Take regular rest breaks as requiredand do not wait for the system towarn you if you feel tired.Take rest breaks only where it is safeto do so.Certain driving styles and behaviourmay result in the system issuing awarning even if you are not feeling

tired.

CAUTIONSIn cold and severe weather conditionsthe system may not function. Rain,snow, spray and large contrasts in

lighting can all influence the sensor.The system will not operate if thesensor cannot track the road lanemarkings.The system may not operate in areasduring roadworks construction.The system may not operate on roadswith sharp bends or narrow lanes.Do not carry out windscreen repairs inthe immediate area surrounding thesensor.If your vehicle is fitted with asuspension kit not approved by us, thesystem may not function correctly.

Note: Keep the windscreen free fromobstructions such as bird droppings, insectsand snow or ice.Note: The system is intended as a driver aidwhen driving on fast main roads andmotorways.Note: The system calculates an alertnesslevel at vehicle speeds above approximately65 km/h (40 mph).The system automatically monitors yourdriving behaviour using various inputsincluding the front camera sensor.If the system detects that you arebecoming drowsy or there is a deteriorationin your driving, the system will alert you.

USING DRIVER ALERTSwitching the system on and offNote: The system status will remainunchanged during ignition cycles.Activate the system using the informationdisplay. See Information Displays (page89).Once activated the system will calculateyour alertness level based upon yourdriving behaviour in relation to the lanemarkings, and other factors.

System warningsNote: The system will not issue warningsbelow approximately 65 km/h (40 mph).The warning system is in two stages. Atfirst the system issues a temporary warningthat a rest should be taken. This messagewill only appear for a short time. If a rest isnot then taken a further warning may beissued which will remain in the informationdisplay until cancelled. See InformationMessages (page 102).Press OK on the steering wheel control toremove the warning.

190

Driver Alert

System displayWhen active the system will runautomatically in the background and onlyissue warnings if required. You can viewthe status at any time using theinformation display. See GeneralInformation (page 89).The alertness level is shown by six stepsas a coloured bar.

E131358

Alertness level is fine, no rest required.

E131359

Alertness level is critical, indicating that arest should be taken as soon as safelypossible.The status bar will travel from left to rightas the calculated alertness leveldecreases. As the rest icon is approachedthe colour turns from green to yellow andthen finally red when a rest break must betaken.• Green - No rest required.• Yellow - First (temporary) warning.• Red - Second warning.Note: The alertness level will be shown ingrey if the camera sensor cannot track theroad lane markings or if the vehicle speeddrops below approximately 65 km/h (40mph).

Resetting the systemYou can reset the system by either:• Switching the ignition off and on.• Stopping the vehicle and then opening

and closing the driver's door.

191

Driver Alert


WARNINGSThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.At all times you are responsible forcontrolling the vehicle, supervisingthe system and intervening if

required.If the sensor becomes blocked thesystem may not function.Lane markings may not always beproperly tracked by the sensor. Otherstructures or objects may sometimes

be incorrectly detected as a lane marking,resulting in a false or missed warning.

CAUTIONSIn cold and severe weather conditionsthe system may not function. Rain,snow, spray and large contrasts in

lighting can all influence the sensor.The system will not operate if thesensor cannot track the road lanemarkings.The system may not operate in areasduring roadworks construction.The system may not operate on roadswith sharp bends or narrow lanes.Do not carry out windscreen repairs inthe immediate area surrounding thesensor.If your vehicle is fitted with asuspension kit not approved by us, thesystem may not function correctly.

Note: Keep the windscreen free fromobstructions such as bird droppings, insectsand snow or ice.

Note: The system is intended as a driver aidwhen driving on fast main roads andmotorways.Note: The system may not operate duringhard braking or acceleration and, when youare intentionally steering the vehicle.Note: The system will operate with aminimum of one tracked lane marking.Note: The system will only operate abovevehicle speeds of approximately 65 km/h(40 mph).A sensor is mounted behind the interiorrear view mirror. It continuously monitorsconditions to alert you of unintentionallane drifting at high speeds.The system will automatically detect andtrack the lane markings on the road. If itdetects that the vehicle is unintentionallydrifting towards the lane boundaries thena visual warning will be displayed in theinformation display. There is also a warninggiven in the form of a vibration felt throughthe steering wheel.

USING LANE DEPARTUREWARNINGSwitching the system on and offNote: When the system is switched off, awarning indicator will remain illuminated inthe information display. See WarningLamps and Indicators (page 85).Note: The system status and settings willremain unchanged during ignition cycles.

192

Lane Departure Warning

E131360

A

B

System onASystem offB

Activate the system using the switches onthe indicator stalk.

Setting the steering wheelvibration levelThe system has three intensity levels whichcan be set using the information display.See General Information (page 89).

Setting the system sensitivityYou can adjust how quickly the systemwarns you of a dangerous situation. Thesystem has two sensitivity levels which canbe set using the information display. SeeGeneral Information (page 89).

System warnings

E131363

A column of lane markings is displayedeither side of the vehicle graphic.The lane markings are colour coded asfollows:• Green - The system is ready to warn

you of any unintentional lanedeparture.

• Red - The vehicle is approaching or istoo close to the detected laneboundary. Take immediate safe actionto reposition the vehicle.

• Grey - The relevant lane boundary willbe suppressed.

Instances where a lane boundary may besuppressed:• Lane markings on the road may not be

detected by the sensor.• The direction indicator for that side of

the vehicle is on.• During hard acceleration and braking,

or if direct steering is applied.• Vehicle speed is outside the operating

limits• If there is an ABS or Stability Control

(ESP) intervention.• Narrow lane width.If the lane markings turn red or a vibrationis felt through the steering wheel you musttake immediate and safe action to alignthe vehicle and correct any unintendedlane drift.

193

Lane Departure Warning

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNINGSUse load securing straps to anapproved standard, e.g. DIN.Make sure that you secure all looseitems properly.Place luggage and other loads as lowand as far forward as possible withinthe luggage or loadspace.Do not drive with the tailgate or reardoor open. Exhaust fumes may enterthe vehicle.Do not exceed the maximum frontand rear axle loads for your vehicle.See Vehicle identification (page

265).Heavy loads, when placed in thepassenger compartment, should beon folded rear seats as shown. See

Rear Seats (page 129).Fit a dog guard or load net if placingheavy loads behind the front seatsin the passenger compartment.

CAUTIONSDo not allow items to contact the rearwindows.Do not use any abrasive materials toclean the interior of the rear windows.Do not install stickers or labels to theinterior of the rear windows.

E135657

194

Load Carrying

LUGGAGE ANCHOR POINTSGalaxy

A B

A B

C

E75393

A B

C

195

Load Carrying

S-MAX

A B

A B

C

A C

B

E75394

Vehicles without third row seats. Raise the carpet to gain access to the anchorpoints.

B1

Vehicles with third row seatsB2

196

Load Carrying

SLIDING LOADSPACE FLOOR

WARNINGDo not slide the loadspace floorrearwards when the vehicle isstanding on an incline of 15 degrees

or more and facing uphill.

CAUTIONThe maximum permissible weight onthe sliding loadspace floor is 200kilogrammes (441 pounds).

The maximum permissible weight on theend of the sliding loadspace floor whenthe floor is in the fully extended position(slid outside the luggage compartment)is 120 kilogrammes (265 pounds).

E74810

Press the unlocking handle and pull theloadspace floor rearwards. It will stop andengage at a midway position.

E74811

To slide it out fully, press the unlockinghandle again and pull it out until it engagesin the end position.To slide it forwards, press the unlockinghandle and push it forwards.Note: You do not have to exert as muchpressure on the unlocking handle if you pushthe loadspace floor forwards slightly whenoperating it.

Storage compartmentA storage compartment is located in thefloor at the rear of the luggagecompartment.To gain access to the storagecompartment, lift up the sliding loadspacefloor as follows:

197

Load Carrying

E74812

1

2

E74813

3

1. Press the unlocking handle and pull theloadspace floor rearwards a short way.

2. Lift up the rear of the floor (1).3. Push the floor forwards until it engages

at the front (2).

4. Release the support leg from the clipon the underside of the floor.

5. Insert the end into the square retainerin the left-hand rail (3).

6. Lift the storage compartment coverusing the loop.

To return the loadspace floor to the normalposition:1. Hold the floor with one hand and

release the support leg with the otherhand.

2. Insert the support leg back into the clip.3. Lower the floor.4. Press the unlocking handle and pull the

loadspace floor rearwards until it dropsinto position on the rails.

REAR UNDER FLOORSTORAGE

E72983

Vehicles with a sliding loadspacefloorRaise the loadspace floor to gain accessto the storage compartment. See SlidingLoadspace Floor (page 197).

198

Load Carrying

S-MAXVehicles without third row seats

E75395

CARGO NETSLuggage retention net - type 1

WARNINGWhen the retention net is installed,do not sit in the seats behind it.

CAUTIONKeep a distance of at least onecentimetre (½ inch) between theretention net and the seats in front of

it.

You can install the net in the followingpositions:

A B

A B

A

B

E75891

Behind the front seatsABehind the second row seatsB

199

Load Carrying

Installing the net

C

C

1

E75893

Release buttonC

E75892

2

E75894

4

3

200

Load Carrying

1. Fold the seatbacks down. See RearSeats (page 129).

2. If the retention net is folded, press thered release button C on the hinges ofthe upper and lower bar 1 and unfoldit.

3. Push the ends of the upper bar towardseach other and insert them into theretainers on the roof A or B. Make surethat the flap for the centre seat belt issituated on the right hand side of thevehicle.

4. Push the bar forwards into the narrowsection of the retainers 2.

5. Attach the net to the luggage anchorpoints 3. See Luggage Anchor Points(page 195).

6. Tighten the belts 4.Remove in the reverse order.If you need to use the centre seat belt:

E75895

5

1. Open the flap 5.2. Route the seat belt through the

opening.

Luggage retention net - type 2CAUTIONS

Do not exceed the maximumpermissible retention net load of 1kilogram (2 pounds).Do not place large objects in the lowernet storage compartments.Make sure that the rods are securelypositioned in the trim panels.

E95920

1. Fold the third row seats flat. See RearSeats (page 129).

2. Insert one end of each rod into theretainers in the luggage compartmenttrim panel.

3. Push the other end of each rod towardits centre and insert the rod into theretainer in the opposite trim panel.

Note: The upper rod ends can be insertedinto either the top or front retainer in the trimpanels.Note: On S-MAX the lower net incorporatesthree storage compartments. Make sure thatthe net is positioned so that the storagecompartments face towards the rear.

201

Load Carrying

LUGGAGE COVERS

WARNINGDo not place objects on the luggagecover.

E72969

Pull out the cover and secure it in theretaining points.Release it from the retaining points and letit roll back into the case. Clip the retaininghook onto the case.

E72970

To remove or install the cover, push eitherend of the case inwards.

ROOF RACKS AND LOADCARRIERSRoof rack

WARNINGSIf you use a roof rack, the fuelconsumption of your vehicle will behigher and you may experience

different driving characteristics.Read and follow the manufacturer’sinstructions when you are fitting aroof rack.

CAUTIONSDo not exceed the maximumpermissible roof load of 75kilogrammes (165 pounds) (including

the roof rack).Do not exceed 130 km/h (81 mph).

Check the security of the roof rack asfollows:• before starting• after driving 50 kilometres (30 miles)• at 1 000 kilometres (600 miles)

intervals.To minimise windnoise when the roof rackis not in use, cross rails should be movedrearwards and placed together. To reducefuel consumption, cross rails should beremoved when not in use.

Installing the crossbarsWARNINGS

Before using the crossbars, checkthat they are not damaged ordeformed and free from foreign

matter.

202

Load Carrying

WARNINGSMake sure that the gaskets arecorrectly positioned under eachcrossbar foot.Distribute the load evenly over theloading area and keep the centre ofgravity as low as possible. Secure the

load well to prevent it from slipping. Neverplace any loads directly onto the roofsurface.

CAUTIONRemove the crossbars before enteringan automatic car wash.

Note: The gaskets are marked front andrear to aid installation.Note: The side mounting tracks aredesigned such that crossbars (for bicyclecarriers, ski carriers etc.) from the Fordaccessories range can be fitted.Note: Before installing the crossbars, cleanthe side mounting tracks with water and asponge.Note: Position the crossbars as shown.

A B

E98206

150 mm (5.9 inches)A700 mm (27.6 inches)B

E131371

1. Unlock the covers.

E131372

2. Pull the cover towards you.

E131373

Note: Make sure that the cover is fullyopened.3. Lift the cover

203

Load Carrying

E131374

WARNINGMake sure that the clamping hook iscorrectly positioned.

Note: A force of approximately 100newtons (23 lbs) is required to close thecover.4. Attach the clamping hook in the

position shown and close the cover.

E131375

WARNINGMake sure that the crossbars aresecure.

5. Lock the covers and remove the key.

LOAD RETAINING FIXTURES

E75002

WARNINGSDo not raise the seatback when aload retaining fixture is installed.Do not exceed the maximumpermissible load of 60 kilogrammes(132 pounds) on two load retaining

fixtures and 30 kilogrammes (66 pounds)on one.

Check the security of the load retainingfixtures and tighten its fittings as follows:• before starting• after driving 50 kilometres (30 miles)• at 1 000 kilometres (600 miles)

intervals.

204

Load Carrying

Installing the load retainingfixturesSeatback

E74997

E74998

Luggage compartment floor (vehicleswith five seats)

E74999

205

Load Carrying

Sliding loadspace floor

E75003

Installing the luggage anchorpoints

E75000

206

Load Carrying

E75001

Installing the load bracketWARNINGS

Install the load bracket with thelongest section towards the rear ofthe vehicle. If you install it the wrong

way round, it may not hold the box in placein the event of an accident.

Do not install the load bracket on asecond row seatback. It cannot beinstalled the right way round in this

position.Do not exceed the maximumpermissible load of 20 kilogrammes(44 pounds).

1

23 3

E76378

1. Turn the box over.2. Position the load bracket.3. Secure the load bracket with four

screws.

E76379

4. Slide the captured bolts onto the loadretaining fixture.

207

Load Carrying

E76380

5. Position the load bracket onto thefolded seatback so that the capturedbolts go through the two holes inlongest section of the bracket.

6. Secure the load bracket with the twowing nuts.

7. Remove in the reverse order.

DOG GUARD

WARNINGWhen the dog guard is installed, donot sit in the seats behind it.

CAUTIONKeep a distance of at least onecentimetre (½ inch) between the dogguard and the seats in front of it.

You can install the dog guard in thefollowing positions:

A B

A B

A

B

E75891

Behind the front seatsABehind the second row seatsB

Installing the dog guard

E75896

C

D

Bar for installing the dog guardbehind the front seats

C

Bar for installing the dog guardbehind the second row seats

D

208

Load Carrying

1

E75897

E75892

2

3

E75898

1. Fold the seatbacks down. See RearSeats (page 129).

2. Attach the bar (C or D) to the luggageanchor points 1. See Luggage AnchorPoints (page 195). Do not tighten thescrews.

3. Push the ends of the bar on the grilletowards each other and insert theminto the retainers on the roof (A or B).Make sure that the flap for the centreseat belt is situated on the right handside of the vehicle.

4. Push the bar forwards into the narrowsection of the retainers 2.

5. Attach the grille to the lower bar withthe handwheels 3. Do not tighten thehandwheels.

6. Tighten the screws at the luggageanchor points.

7. Tighten the handwheels 3.Remove in the reverse order.If you need to use the centre seat belt:

209

Load Carrying

4

5

6E75899

1. Loosen the handwheel and remove it4.

2. Fold down the flap 5.3. Fix the flap with the handwheel 6.4. Route the seat belt through the

opening.

210

Load Carrying

TOWING A TRAILER

WARNINGSDo not exceed 100 km/h (62 mph).

The rear tyre pressures must beincreased by 0.2 bar (3 psi) abovespecification. See Technical

Specifications (page 262).Do not exceed the maximum grosstrain weight stated on the vehicleidentification plate. See Vehicle

identification (page 265).

CAUTIONDo not exceed the maximumpermissible nose weight, i.e. verticalweight on the tow ball, of 90

kilogrammes (198 pounds).

Note: Not all vehicles are suitable orapproved to have tow bars fitted. Checkwith your dealer first.Place loads as low and central to theaxle(s) of the trailer as possible. If you aretowing with an unladen vehicle, the loadin the trailer should be placed toward thenose, within the maximum nose load, asthis gives the best stability.The stability of the vehicle to trailercombination is very much dependant onthe quality of the trailer.In high altitude regions above 1 000 metres(3 281 feet), the stipulated maximumpermitted gross train weight must bereduced by 10% for every additional 1 000metres (3 281 feet).

Steep gradientsWARNING

The overrun brake on a trailer is notcontrolled by ABS.

Change down a gear before you reach asteep downhill gradient.

TOW BALL

WARNINGSWhen not in use, always transportthe tow ball arm securely fastenedin the luggage compartment.Take special care when fitting thetow ball arm as the safety of thevehicle and the trailer depends on

this.Do not use any tools for mounting ordismounting the tow ball arm. Do notmodify the trailer coupling. Do not

disassemble or repair the tow ball arm.

E71328

A 13-pin trailer socket and the tow ball armseat are provided underneath the rearbumper. Turn the trailer socket downthrough 90 degrees until it engages in theend position.

211

Towing

Unlocking the tow ball armmechanism

E713292

1

3

1. Remove the protecting cap (1). Insertthe key and turn it clockwise to unlock(2).

2. Hold the tow ball arm. Pull thehandwheel out and turn it clockwiseuntil it clicks (3).

3. The red mark on the handwheel mustalign with the green mark on the towball.

4. Release the handwheel. The tow ballarm is unlocked.

Inserting the tow ball arm

1

2E71330

WARNINGThe tow ball arm may only beinserted when completely unlocked.

1. Pull out the plug.2. Insert the tow ball arm vertically and

press it upwards until it engages (1).Do not hold your hand near thehandwheel.

3. The green mark on the handwheelmust align with the green mark on thetow ball.

4. To lock, turn the key anti-clockwise andremove the key (2).

5. Pull the protecting cap from the keybow and press it onto the lock.

212

Towing

Driving with a trailer

E71331

A

B

WARNINGIf any of the below conditions cannotbe met, do not use the tow bar andhave it checked by a properly trained

technician.

Before starting your journey, make surethat the tow ball arm is properly locked.Check that:• the green marks are aligned• the handwheel (A) is correctly fitted

to the tow ball arm• you have removed the key (B)• the tow ball arm is securely positioned.

It must not move when jerked.

Removing the tow ball arm

3

1E71332

2

1. Unhitch the trailer.2. Remove the protecting cap. Press the

cap into the key bow. Insert the key andunlock (1).

3. Hold the tow ball arm. Pull thehandwheel out, turn it clockwiseagainst the stop (2) and remove thetow ball arm (3).

4. Release the handwheel.When unlocked in this way, the tow ballarm can be reinserted at any time.

213

Towing

Driving without a trailer

E94771

1

1. Remove the tow ball arm.2. Insert the plug into its seat (1).

WARNINGNever unlock the tow ball arm withthe trailer attached.

MaintenanceWARNING

Remove the tow ball arm andprotect the seat with the plug beforesteam cleaning your vehicle.

Keep the system clean. Periodicallylubricate bearings, sliding surfaces, andlocking balls with resin-free grease or oiland the lock with graphite.In case of loss, replacement keys areavailable from the manufacturer by statingthe number on the lock cylinder.

RETRACTABLE TOW BALL

CAUTIONOnly move the tow ball arm with yourhand. Never use your foot or auxiliarytools as damage to the mechanism

may result.

A

E75173

You can turn the retractable tow ball armthrough 90 degrees using the handwheelA.

E75174

B

C

214

Towing

A 13-pin trailer socket B is providedunderneath the rear bumper next to thetow ball arm C.

E76040D

Note: When not in use, insert the key intothe storage position D to the right of thehandwheel.

Swivelling the tow ball inWARNINGS

Keep your hands away from thehandwheel as it rotates during thelocking process.You will hear a warning tone whenthe tow ball arm is not in one of thelocked positions. If you do not hear

the tone when moving the tow ball arm,do not use the tow bar and have it checkedby a properly trained technician.

CAUTIONBefore retracting the ball neck into itsstowage position always unhitch thetrailer or dismantle load carriers and

their attachments. Dismantle attachmentsfor tracking stabilisation. Remove the plugfor the trailer power supply and theadapter from the socket. Failure to do somay result in damage to the bumper.

E75175

E75176

1. Insert the key into the handwheel andturn it clockwise to unlock.

2. Pull the handwheel out and turn itanti-clockwise to the stop. The tow ballarm automatically swivels into amidway position.

3. Release the handwheel. The tow ballarm is not locked. This is indicated bythe warning tone and the handwheelprojects about five millimetres (0.2inch) from its housing.

215

Towing

4. Manually turn the tow ball arm steadilyfrom its midway position to the stop inthe stowage position. The tow ball armautomatically locks in the end position.The locking process is clearly audibleif the level of background noise is nottoo high. When the locking process iscompleted, the warning tone stops andthe handwheel will return to its originalposition.

5. Turn the key anti-clockwise andremove it. Insert the key into thestorage position.

E75177

Swivelling the tow ball outWARNING

You will hear a warning tone whenthe tow ball arm is not in one of thelocked positions. If you do not hear

the tone when moving the tow ball arm,do not use the tow bar and have it checkedby a properly trained technician.

E75179

E75178

1. Insert the key into the handwheel andturn it clockwise to unlock.

2. Pull the handwheel out and turn itanti-clockwise to the stop. The tow ballarm automatically swivels into themidway position.

3. Release the handwheel. The tow ballarm is not locked. This is indicated bythe warning tone and the handwheelprojects about five millimetres (0.2inch) from its housing.

216

Towing

4. Manually turn the tow ball arm steadilyfrom its midway position to the stop inthe operating position. The tow ballarm automatically locks in the endposition. The locking process is clearlyaudible if the level of background noiseis not too high. When the lockingprocess is completed, the warning tonestops and the handwheel will return toits original position.

5. Turn the key anti-clockwise andremove it. Insert the key into thestorage position.

Driving with a trailerWARNING

If any of the conditions below cannotbe met, do not use the tow bar andhave it checked by a properly trained

technician.

Before starting your journey, make surethat the tow ball arm is properly locked.Check that:• there is no warning tone when the

locking procedure has been completed• the handwheel is in its housing and that

there is no gap• you have locked the handwheel

(anti-clockwise) and removed the key• the tow ball arm is locked. It must not

move when jerked.

MaintenanceCAUTIONS

The towing hitch and control unit aremaintenance-free. Do not grease oroil them.Only the manufacturer should carryout repairs or dismantle the towinghitch.

CAUTIONSWhen cleaning the vehicle with asteam jet do not direct the highpressure jet directly onto the swivel

joint of the tow ball arm.

217

Towing

RUNNING-INTyres

WARNINGNew tyres need to be run-in forapproximately 500 kilometres (300miles). During this time, you may

experience different driving characteristics.

Brakes and clutchWARNING

Avoid heavy use of the brakes andclutch if possible for the first 150kilometres (100 miles) in town and

for the first 1500 kilometres (1000 miles)on motorways.

EngineCAUTION

Avoid driving too fast during the first1500 kilometres (1000 miles). Varyyour speed frequently and change up

through the gears early. Do not labour theengine.

COLD WEATHERPRECAUTIONSThe functional operation of somecomponents and systems can be affectedat temperatures below -30°C (-22°F).

DRIVING THROUGH WATERDriving through water

CAUTIONSDrive through water in an emergencyonly, and not as part of normal driving.Engine damage can occur if waterenters the air filter.

In an emergency, the vehicle can be driventhrough water to a maximum depth of 200millimetres (8 inches) and at a maximumspeed of 10 km/h (6 mph). Extra cautionshould be exercised when driving throughflowing water.When driving in water, maintain a lowspeed and do not stop the vehicle. Afterdriving through water, and as soon as it issafe to do so:• Depress the brake pedal lightly and

check that full brake function isachieved.

• Check that the horn works.• Check that the vehicle's lights are fully

operational.• Check the power assistance

of the steering system.

218

Driving Hints

FIRST AID KIT

E73238

Space is provided in the under floor storagecompartment to store a first aid kit. SeeStorage compartments (page 140).

WARNING TRIANGLE

E73239

Space is provided in the under floor storagecompartment to store a warning triangle.See Storage compartments (page 140).

219

Roadside Emergencies

FUSE BOX LOCATIONSEngine compartment fuse box

E72588

Central fuse boxAll vehicles

E72589

1. Pinch the retaining clips to release thecover.

E72590

2. Remove the cover.3. Turn the knob through 90 degrees andrelease the fuse box from the retainingbracket.4. Lower the fuse box cover and pull ittowards you.5. Install in the reverse order.

Rear fuse box

E72591

Release the catches and remove the cover.

220

Fuses

CHANGING A FUSE

WARNINGSDo not modify the electrical systemof your vehicle in any way. Haverepairs to the electrical system and

the replacement of relays and high currentfuses carried out by a properly trainedtechnician.

Switch the ignition and all electricalequipment off before touching orattempting to change a fuse.

CAUTIONFit a replacement fuse with the samerating as the one you have removed.

Note: You can identify a blown fuse by abreak in the filament.Note: All fuses, except high current fuses,are a push fit.Note: A fuse puller is located in the enginecompartment fuse box.

221

Fuses

FUSE SPECIFICATION CHARTEngine compartment fuse box

E75525

Circuits protectedAmpere ratingFuse

Transmission control module (AWF21)10F1

Transmission control module (MPS6)15F1

Glow plug monitoring (diesel engines)5F2

222

Fuses


Vaporiser glow plug monitoring (2.0L Duratorq-TDCiStage V and 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)5F2

Engine cooling fan - twin fan (2.3L Duratec-HE and2.2L Duratorq-TDCi automatic)701F3

Electric hydraulic power steering (EHPAS) (1.6LEcoBoost SCTi and 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi)801F3

Glow plugs60F4

Engine cooling fan (1.6L Duratorq-TDCi, 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi, 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V, 2.2L Duratorq-TDCimanual, 2.0L Duratec-HE, 2.3L Duratec-HE and 2.0LEcoBoost SCTi)

60F5

Engine cooling fan - twin fan (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi)70F5

HEGO sensor (1.6L Duratorq-TDCi)7.5F6

HEGO sensor, CMS Sensor, Oxygen Sensor (enginemanagement)10F6

Vaporiser glow plug (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V and2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)20F6

Relay coils5F7

Powertrain control module, fuel metering unit, MAFsensor, fuel rail pressure control valve (enginemanagement)

10F8

Powertrain control module (2.0L EcoBoost SCTi and2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)20F8

Powertrain control module (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi, 1.6LDuratorq-TDCi and 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)15F8

MAF Sensor, Fuel Injectors (engine management)10F9

Fuel pump vaporiser (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)5F9

MAF Sensor, EGR bypass Valve , Fuel pump vaporiser(2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V) (engine management)7.5F9

Degas valve, TMAF sensor, active grille shutter, bypassvalve, relay coil, auxiliary run on water pump (1.6LEcoBoost SCTi)

7.5F9

Engine control module (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi)10F10

223

Fuses


Auxiliary run on, water pump (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi)7.5F10

PCV Valve, VCV Valve, Water in Fuel Sensor, SonicPurge Valve, Swirl Control Valve, Variable Intake Valve,EGR Valve, IVVT Oil Control Valve (engine manage-ment). T.MAF sensor, variable exhaust timing valve,active grille shutter, cannister purge valve. turbo controlvalve, wastegate valve (engine management).

10F11

Turbo control valve, MAF sensor, active grille shutter,EGR valve, VCV valve (1.6L Duratorq-TDCi)10F11

MAF sensor, water in fuel sensor, active grille shutter,inlet metering valve (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)5F11

Fuel rail pressure, fuel metering unit, active grilleshutter (2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)7.5F11

Waste gate valve, variable intake timing valve, variableexhaust timing valve, cannister purge valve, vacuumsolenoid valve (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi)

7.5F11

Coil on Plug; Canister Purge Valve, Power SteeringPressure Switch (engine management)10F12

EGR throttle, variable turbo control (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)10F12

Relay coils (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi, 2.2L Duratorq-TDCiStage V and 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi)5F12

Ignition coils (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi and 2.0L EcoBoostSCTi)15F12

Air conditioning15F13

Diesel filter heater (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi, 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V and 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi)15F14

HEGO sensors (2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)10F14

Starter relay40F15

Diesel auxiliary heater (PTC)80F16

Central fuse box supply A60F17

Central fuse box supply B60F18

Rear fuse box supply C60F19

224

Fuses


Rear fuse box supply D60F20

VQM/non VQM: Cluster/Audio/AC/FLR30F21

Windscreen wiper module30F22

Heated rear window25F23

Headlamp washer30F24

ABS valves30F25

ABS pump40F26

Fuel fired heater25F27

Heater blower40F28

Not used–F29

ABS 30 feed5F30

Horn15F31

Fuel fired heater - remote control5F32

Light switch module, engine compartment fuse boxcoils5F33

Heated windscreen (left-hand side)40F34

Heated windscreen (right-hand side)40F35

Rear wiper 15 feed15F36

Heated front washer jets/FLR + FSM KL157.5F37

PCM/TCM/EHPAS 15 feed10F38

Adaptive front lighting system (AFS)15F39

Headlamp levelling / AFS module5F40

Instrument panel20F41

Cluster IP5F42

Audio/BVC module15F43

Automatic AC / Manual AC5F44

225

Fuses


FLR (Start Stop)5F451Fit a replacement with the same rating as the one you have removed.

Central fuse box

E124888

A B

Left-hand driveARight-hand driveB

226

Fuses


Steering wheel module7.5F1

Spare IP 30 Feed5F2

Interior lamps10F3

Engine immobiliser5F4

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)7.5F5

Rain sensor5F6

Cigar lighter20F7

Fuel filler flap unlock supply10F8

Windscreen washers - rear15F9

Windscreen washers - front15F10

Luggage compartment release supply10F11

Fuel filler flap lock supply10F12

Fuel pump20F13

Fuel pump (2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)7.5F13

Remote frequency receiver, Interior motion sensor5F14

Ignition switch5F15

Battery backup sounder (alarm system), OBD II(board computer diagnostics)5F16

Steering wheel vibration actuator5F17

SRS (airbag) supply10F18

ABS, yaw rate sensor (ESP), electric parking brake(EPB), accelerator pedal supply7.5F19

Electronic feed, electronic fuse, Auto-dimming mirror,lane departure warning7.5F20

Spare IP 30 Feed15F21

Brake lamp switch5F22

Sunroof20F23

Spare IP 30 Feed5F24

227

Fuses

Rear fuse box

E75526


Door module (left-hand front) (window up/down,central locking, electric folding mirror, heated mirror)25FA1

Door module (right-hand front) (window up/down,central locking, electric folding mirror, heated mirror)25FA2

Door module (left-hand rear) (window up/down)25FA3

228

Fuses


Door module (right-hand rear) (window up/down)25FA4

Rear locking (without rear door modules)10FA5

Auxiliary power socket15FA6

Relay coils5FA7

Keyless vehicle module20FA8

Relay coils VQM (Start Stop)5FA9

Not used-FA10

Accessories, trailer module20FA11

Electric driver's seat30FA12

Sunblind system15FB1

Suspension module15FB2

Heated driver's seat15FB3

Heated front passenger seat15FB4

Not used–FB5

Rear climate control10FB6

Not used–FB7

Parking aid, BLIS5FB8

Electric front passenger seat30FB9

Anti-theft alarm horn10FB10

Not used–FB11

Not used–FB12

Electric rear quarter windows7.5FC1

Electric parking brake (EPB)30FC2

Electric parking brake (EPB)30FC3

Rear air conditioning10FC4

Keyless vehicle20FC5

Rear air conditioning blower20FC6

229

Fuses


Seat memory function module5FC7

Rear seat entertainment/CD Changer7.5FC8

Audio amplifier20FC9

Sony audiophile10FC10

Not used–FC11

Not used–FC12

230

Fuses

TOWING POINTSTowing eye location

E73240

The screw-in towing eye is located in theunderfloor storage compartment behindthe front seats. See Storagecompartments (page 140).The towing eye must always be carried inthe vehicle.

Installing the towing eyeCAUTION

The screw-in towing eye has aleft-hand thread. Turn itanti-clockwise to install it. Make sure

that the towing eye is fully tightened.

Note: On vehicles with a tow bar, thetowing eye cannot be installed at the rearof the vehicle. Use the tow bar to tow avehicle.

Front towing eye

E73241

Rear towing eye

A

E73242

Mount for rear towing eyeA

Insert a suitable object into the hole on theunderside of the cover and prise off thecover.Install the towing eye.

TOWING THE VEHICLE ONFOUR WHEELSAll vehicles

WARNINGSSwitch the ignition on when yourvehicle is being towed. The steeringlock will engage and the direction

indicators and brake lamps will not workif you do not.

231

Vehicle recovery

WARNINGSThe brake servo and the powersteering pump do not operate unlessthe engine is running. Press the brake

pedal harder and allow for increasedstopping distances and heavier steering.

CAUTIONSToo much tension in the tow ropecould cause damage to your vehicleor the vehicle that is towing.Do not use a rigid tow bar on the fronttowing eye.

Drive off slowly and smoothly withoutjerking the vehicle that is towing.

Vehicles with automatictransmission, except 2.0LDuratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel (StageV) or 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4)with 6-Speed AutomaticTransmission

CAUTIONSDo not tow your vehicle faster than50 km/h (30 mph) or further than 50kilometres (30 miles).If a speed of 50 km/h (30 mph) anda distance of 50 kilometres (30 miles)is to be exceeded the drive wheels

must be lifted clear of the ground.In the event of a mechanical failure ofthe transmission the drive wheelsmust be lifted clear of the ground.Do not tow your vehicle backwards.

Select neutral when your vehicle isbeing towed.

Vehicles with 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi(DW) Diesel (Stage V) or 2.0LEcoBoost SCTi (MI4) and 6-SpeedAutomatic Transmission

CAUTIONSIt is recommended not to tow with thedrive wheels on the ground. However,if it is required to move the vehicle

from a dangerous location, do not tow yourvehicle faster than 20 km/h (12 mph) orfurther than 20 kilometres (12 miles).

If a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph) and adistance of 20 kilometres (12 miles)is to be exceeded the drive wheels

must be lifted clear of the ground.Do not tow your vehicle if the ambienttemperature is below 0ºC (32ºF).Do not tow your vehicle backwards.

In the event of a mechanical failure ofthe transmission the drive wheelsmust be lifted clear of the ground.Select neutral when your vehicle isbeing towed.

232

Vehicle recovery

GENERAL INFORMATIONHave your vehicle serviced regularly to helpmaintain its roadworthiness and resalevalue. There is a large network of FordAuthorised Repairers that are there to helpyou with their professional servicingexpertise. We believe that their speciallytrained technicians are best qualified toservice your vehicle properly and expertly.They are supported by a wide range ofhighly specialised tools developedspecifically for servicing your vehicle.In addition to regular servicing, werecommend that you carry out thefollowing additional checks.

WARNINGSSwitch the ignition off beforetouching or attempting adjustmentof any kind.Do not touch the electronic ignitionsystem parts after you have switchedthe ignition on or when the engine is

running. The system operates at highvoltage.

Keep your hands and clothing clearof the engine cooling fan. Undercertain conditions, the fan may

continue to run for several minutes afteryou have switched the engine off.

CAUTIONWhen carrying out maintenancechecks, make sure that filler caps arefitted securely.

Daily checks• Exterior lamps.• Interior lamps.• Warning lamps and indicators.

Check when refuelling• Engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check

(page 244).• Brake fluid level. See Brake and

Clutch Fluid Check (page 245).• Washer fluid level. See Washer Fluid

Check (page 245).• Tyre pressures (when cold). See

Technical Specifications (page 262).• Tyre condition. See Tyre Care (page

260).

Monthly checks• Engine coolant level (engine cold). See

Engine Coolant Check (page 244).• Pipes, hoses and reservoirs for leaks.• Power steering fluid level. See Power

Steering Fluid Check (page 245).• Air conditioning operation.• Parking brake operation.• Horn operation.• Tightness of wheel nuts. See

Technical Specifications (page 262).

OPENING AND CLOSING THEBONNETOpening the bonnet

E73698

233

Maintenance

E87785

Raise the bonnet slightly and move thecatch towards the left-hand side of thevehicle.

E87786

Open the bonnet and support it with thestrut.

Closing the bonnetWARNING

Make sure that the bonnet is closedproperly.

Lower the bonnet and allow it to drop fromunder its own weight for the last 20 – 30centimetres (8 - 11 inches).

234

Maintenance

UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 1.6L ECOBOOST SCTI (SIGMA)

E132430

A

J I G FH

B C D E

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch FluidCheck (page 245).

A

Engine oil filler cap1. See Engine Oil Check (page 244).BBrake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch FluidCheck (page 245).

C

Battery. See Vehicle battery (page 251).DEngine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 220).EAir cleaner. No maintenance necessary.FScreen washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 245).GEngine oil dipstick1. See Engine Oil Check (page 244).H

235

Maintenance

Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 245).IEngine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 244).J

1The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification.

UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 2.0L DURATEC-HE (MI4)

A C

GJ F

D EB

HIE73231


A


C

Battery. See Jump-Starting the Vehicle (page 251).DEngine compartment fuse box. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 222).EAir cleaner. No maintenance necessary.FScreen washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 245).GEngine oil dipstick1. See Engine Oil Check (page 244).H

236

Maintenance



UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 2.0L ECOBOOST SCTI (MI4)

A C

GHJ I F

D EB

E124921


A


C


237

Maintenance



UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 2.3L DURATEC-HE (MI4)

E81313

A C

GJ F

D EB

HI


A


C


238

Maintenance



UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 1.6L DURATORQ-TDCI (DV) DIESEL

A

J I G FH

B C D E

E135199


A


C

Battery. See Vehicle battery (page 251).DEngine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 220).EAir cleaner. No maintenance necessary.FScreen washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 245).G

239

Maintenance

Engine oil dipstick1. See Engine Oil Check (page 244).HPower steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 245).IEngine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 244).J


UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 2.0L DURATORQ-TDCI (DW) DIESEL

A C

GJ I F

D EB

HE73234

240

Maintenance

A C

GHJ I F

D EB

E124913


A


C

Battery. See Jump-Starting the Vehicle (page 251).DEngine compartment fuse box. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 222).EAir cleaner. No maintenance necessary.FScreen washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 245).GEngine oil dipstick1. See Engine Oil Check (page 244).HPower steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 245).IEngine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 244).J


241

Maintenance

UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 2.2L DURATORQ-TDCI (DW) DIESEL

A C

GJ F

D EB

HIE87715

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive): See Brake and Clutch FluidCheck (page 245).

A

Engine oil filler cap1: See Engine Oil Check (page 244).BBrake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive): See Brake and Clutch FluidCheck (page 245).

C

Battery: See Vehicle battery (page 251).DEngine compartment fuse box: See Fuses (page 220).EAir cleaner: No maintenance necessary.FScreen washer fluid reservoir: See Washer Fluid Check (page 245).GEngine oil dipstick1: See Engine Oil Check (page 244).HPower steering fluid reservoir: See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 245).IEngine coolant reservoir: See Engine Coolant Check (page 244).J


242

Maintenance

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.6LECOBOOST SCTI (SIGMA)

A B

E134114

MINAMAXB

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.0LDURATEC-HE (MI4)/2.3LDURATEC-HE (MI4)

E92036

A B

MINAMAXB

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.0LECOBOOST SCTI (MI4)

E124917

A B

E134040

A B

MINAMAXB

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.6LDURATORQ-TDCI (DV)DIESEL/2.0L DURATORQ-TDCI(DW) DIESEL/2.2LDURATORQ-TDCI (DW) DIESEL

E95543

BA

MINAMAXB

243

Maintenance

ENGINE OIL CHECK

CAUTIONDo not use oil additives or otherengine treatments. Under certainconditions, they could damage the

engine.

Note: The oil consumption of new enginesreaches its normal level after approximately5000 kilometres (3000 miles).

Checking the oil levelCAUTION

Make sure that the level is betweenthe MIN and the MAX marks.

Note: Check the level before starting theengine.Note: Make sure that your vehicle is on levelground.Note: Oil expands when it is hot. The levelmay therefore extend a few millimetresbeyond the MAX mark.Remove the dipstick and wipe it with aclean, lint free cloth. Replace the dipstickand remove it again to check the oil level.If the level is at the MIN mark, top upimmediately.

Topping upWARNINGS

Only top up when the engine is cold.If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutesfor the engine to cool down.Do not remove the filler cap whenthe engine is running.

Remove the filler cap.

CAUTIONDo not top up further than the MAXmark.

Top up with fluid that meets the Fordspecification. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 246).Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you feela strong resistance.

ENGINE COOLANT CHECKChecking the coolant level

WARNINGDo not allow the fluid to touch yourskin or eyes. If this happens, rinse theaffected areas immediately with

plenty of water and contact your doctor.

CAUTIONMake sure that the level is betweenthe MIN and the MAX marks.

Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. Thelevel may therefore extend beyond the MAXmark.If the level is at the MIN mark, top upimmediately.

Topping upWARNINGS

Only top up when the engine is cold.If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutesfor the engine to cool down.Do not remove the filler cap whenthe engine is running.Do not remove the filler cap whenthe engine is hot. Wait for the engineto cool down.

244

Maintenance

WARNINGSUndiluted coolant is flammable andmay ignite if spilt on a hot exhaust.

CAUTIONSIn an emergency, you can add justwater to the cooling system to reacha vehicle service station. Have the

system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.

Prolonged use of incorrect dilution ofthe coolant can cause engine damagefrom corrosion, overheating or

freezing.

Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure willescape slowly as you unscrew the cap.


Top up with a 50/50 mixture of coolantand water using fluid that meets the Fordspecification. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 246).

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUIDCHECK

WARNINGSUse of any fluid other than therecommended brake fluid mayreduce brake efficiency and not meet

Ford's performance standards.Do not allow the fluid to touch yourskin or eyes. If this happens, rinse theaffected areas immediately with

plenty of water and contact your doctor.If the level is at the MIN mark, havethe system checked by a properlytrained technician as soon as

possible.

Note: Keep brake fluid clean and dry.Contamination with dirt, water, petroleumproducts or other materials may result inbrake system damage and possible failure.Note: The brake and the clutch systems aresupplied from the same reservoir.Top up with fluid that meets the Fordspecification. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 246).

POWER STEERING FLUIDCHECK

WARNINGDo not allow the fluid to touch yourskin or eyes. If this happens, rinse theaffected areas immediately with

plenty of water and contact your doctor.

CAUTIONMake sure that the level is betweenthe MIN and the MAX marks.

If the level is at the MIN mark, top upimmediately.

Topping upRemove the filler cap.


Top up with fluid that meets the Fordspecification. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 246).

WASHER FLUID CHECKNote: The front and rear washer systemsare supplied from the same reservoir.

245

Maintenance

When topping up, use a mixture of washerfluid and water to help prevent freezing incold weather and improve the cleaningcapability. We recommend that you useonly high quality washer fluid.

For information on fluid dilution, refer tothe product instructions.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSVehicle fluids

CAUTIONDo not use fluids which do not meet the specifications or requirements defined. Useof unsuitable fluids may lead to damage which is not covered by your Warranty.

Recommended fluidSpecificationItem

Castrol or Ford Engine OilWSS-M2C913-CEngine oil

Ford Power Steering FluidWSS-M2C204-A2Power steering fluid

Ford or Motorcraft Anti-freeze Super Plus Premium

WSS-M97B44-DCoolant

Ford Super DOT 4 BrakeFluid

WSS-M6C57-A2Brake fluid

Your engine has been designed to be used with Castrol and Ford Engine Oil, which givesa fuel economy benefit whilst maintaining the durability of your engine.Topping up the oil: If you are unable to find an oil that meets the specification definedby WSS-M2C913-C, you must use SAE 5W-30 that meets the specification defined byACEA A5/B5.Using topping up oils other than the one specified can result in longer engine crankingperiods, reduced engine performance, reduced fuel economy and increased emissionlevels.Castrol engine oil recommended.

E115472

Capacities

Capacity in Litres (gallons)ItemVariant

MAX markPower steering fluidAll

246

Maintenance


3.9 (0.9)Windscreen washer systemAll

70 (15.4)Fuel tankAll

4.1 (0.9)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)

3.8 (0.8)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)

6.5 (1.4)Engine cooling system1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)

4.3 (1.0)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter2.0L Duratec-HE

3.9 (0.9)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter2.0L Duratec-HE

6.2 (1.4)Engine cooling system2.0L Duratec-HE

5.4 (1.2)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter2.0L EcoBoost SCTi

5.1 (1.1)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter2.0L EcoBoost SCTi

approx. 6.9 (1.5)Engine cooling system2.0L EcoBoost SCTi

4.3 (1.0)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter2.3L Duratec-HE

3.9 (0.9)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter2.3L Duratec-HE

6.9 (1.5)Engine cooling system2.3L Duratec-HE

3.8 (0.8)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter1.6L Duratorq-TDCi

3.5 (0.8)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter1.6L Duratorq-TDCi

7.3 (1.6)Engine cooling system1.6L Duratorq-TDCi

5.5 (1.2)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter2.0L Duratorq-TDCi

5 (1.1)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter2.0L Duratorq-TDCi

247

Maintenance



6 (1.3)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter2.2L Duratorq-TDCi

5.4 (1.2)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter2.2L Duratorq-TDCi


248

Maintenance

CLEANING THE EXTERIOR

WARNINGIf you use a car wash with a waxingcycle, make sure that you remove thewax from the windscreen.

CAUTIONSPrior to using a car wash facility checkthe suitability of it for your vehicle.Some car wash installations usewater at high pressure. This coulddamage certain parts of your vehicle.Remove the aerial before using anautomatic car wash.Switch the heater blower off toprevent contamination of the fresh airfilter.

We recommend that you wash your vehiclewith a sponge and lukewarm watercontaining a car shampoo.

Cleaning the headlampsCAUTIONS

Do not scrape the headlamp lensesor use abrasives, alcoholic solvents orchemical solvents to clean them.Do not wipe the headlamps whenthey are dry.

Cleaning the rear windowCAUTION

Do not scrape the inside of the rearwindow or use abrasives or chemicalsolvents to clean it.

Use a clean, lint free cloth or a dampchamois leather to clean the inside of therear window.

Cleaning the chrome trimCAUTION

Do not use abrasives or chemicalsolvents. Use soapy water.

Body paintwork preservationCAUTIONS

Do not polish your vehicle in strongsunshine.Do not allow polish to touch plasticsurfaces. It could be difficult toremove.Do not apply polish to the windscreenor rear window. This could cause thewipers to become noisy and they may

not clear the window properly.

We recommend that you wax thepaintwork once or twice a year.

CLEANING THE INTERIORSeat belts

WARNINGSDo not use abrasives, or chemicalsolvents to clean them.Do not allow moisture to penetratethe seat belt retractor mechanism.

Clean the seat belts with interior cleaneror water applied with a soft sponge. Letthe seat belts dry naturally, away fromartificial heat.

249

Vehicle Care

Instrument cluster screens, LCDscreens, radio screens

WARNINGDo not use abrasives, alcoholicsolvents or chemical solvents toclean them.

Rear windowsCAUTIONS

Do not use any abrasive materials toclean the interior of the rear windows.Do not install stickers or labels to theinterior of the rear windows.

REPAIRING MINOR PAINTDAMAGE

CAUTIONRemove apparently harmless lookingsubstances from the paintworkimmediately (e.g. bird droppings, tree

resins, insect remains, tar spots, road saltand industrial fall out).

You should repair paintwork damagecaused by stones from the road or minorscratches as soon as possible. A choice ofproducts is available from your FordDealer. Read and follow themanufacturer’s instructions.

250

Vehicle Care

JUMP-STARTING THE VEHICLE

WARNINGDo not use fuel lines, engine rockercovers or the intake manifold asgrounding points.

CAUTIONSConnect batteries with only the samenominal voltage.Always use booster cables withinsulated clamps and adequate sizecable.Do not disconnect the battery fromthe vehicle’s electrical system.

To connect the booster cables

A

B

C D

E102925

Flat battery vehicleABooster battery vehicleBPositive connection cableCNegative connection cableD

1. Position the vehicles so that they donot touch one another.

2. Switch off the engine and any electricalequipment.

3. Connect the positive (+) terminal ofvehicle B with the positive (+) terminalof vehicle A (cable C).

4. Connect the negative (-) terminal ofvehicle B to the ground connection ofvehicle A (cable D). See Batteryconnection points (page 252).

251

Vehicle battery

CAUTIONSDo not connect to the negative (–)terminal of the flat battery.Make sure that the cables are clear ofany moving parts and fuel deliverysystem parts.

To start the engine1. Run the engine of vehicle B at

moderately high speed.2. Start the engine of vehicle A.3. Run both vehicles for a minimum of

three minutes before disconnecting thecables.

CAUTIONDo not switch on the headlamps whendisconnecting the cables. The peakvoltage could blow the bulbs.

Disconnect the cables in the reverse order.

CHANGING THE VEHICLEBATTERY

CAUTIONFor vehicles with Start-stop thebattery requirement is different. Itmust be replaced by one of exactly

the same specification as the original.

Note: Where applicable, the audio systemmust be reprogrammed with the keycode.The battery is located in the enginecompartment. See Maintenance (page233).

BATTERY CONNECTIONPOINTS

E114494

CAUTIONDo not connect to the negative (–)terminal of the flat battery.

252

Vehicle battery

GENERAL INFORMATION

CAUTIONSUse only approved wheel and tyresizes. Using other sizes could damagethe vehicle and will make the National

Type Approval invalid.If you change the diameter of the tyresfrom that fitted at the factory, thespeedometer may not display the

correct speed. Take the vehicle to yourdealer to have the engine managementsystem reprogrammed.

If you intend to change the size of thewheels from that fitted at the factory,check the suitability with your dealer.

Note: Check your tyre pressures regularlyto optimise fuel economy.A decal with tyre pressure data is locatedin the driver’s door opening at the B-pillar.Check and set the tyre pressure at theambient temperature in which you areintending to drive the vehicle and when thetyres are cold.

CHANGING A ROAD WHEELLocking wheel nutsYou can obtain a replacement lockingwheel nut key and replacement lockingwheel nuts from your dealer using thereference number certificate.

Vehicle jackYour vehicle is not equipped with a vehiclejack or a wheel brace.It is recommended to use a workshop typehydraulic jack for changing betweensummer and winter tyres.

Jacking and lifting pointsWARNING

Never place anything between thejack and the ground, or the jack andthe vehicle.

CAUTIONUse only the specified jacking points.If you use other positions, you maydamage the body, steering,

suspension, engine, braking system or thefuel lines.

Note: Use a jack with a minimum liftingcapacity of 1.5 tonnes and a lifting plate witha minimum diameter of 80 millimetres (3.1inches).

E90708

A

253

Wheels and Tyres

Indentations in the sills A show thelocation of the jacking points.

E93020

Vehicles with side skirts

E90709

Place the lifting plate through the cut outon the underside of the skirt.

Removing a road wheelWARNINGS

Park your vehicle in such a positionthat neither the traffic nor you arehindered or endangered.Set up a warning triangle.

WARNINGSMake sure that the vehicle is on firm,level ground with the wheels pointingstraight ahead.Switch off the ignition and apply theparking brake.If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, select first or reversegear. If it has an automatic

transmission, select park.Have the passengers leave thevehicle.Secure the diagonally oppositewheel with an appropriate block orwheel chock.Make sure that the arrows ondirectional tyres point in the directionof rotation when the vehicle is

moving forwards. If you have to fit a sparewheel with the arrows pointing in theopposite direction, have the tyre refittedin the correct direction by a properlytrained technician.

Do not work underneath the vehiclewhen it is supported only by a jack.Make sure that the jack is vertical tothe jacking point and the base is flaton the ground.

CAUTIONDo not lay alloy wheels face down onthe ground, this will damage the paint.

1. Remove the hub cap or cover.

254

Wheels and Tyres

E71948

2. Install the locking wheel nut key.3. Slacken the wheel nuts.4. Jack up the vehicle until the tyre is clear

of the ground.5. Remove the wheel nuts and the wheel.

Installing a road wheelWARNINGS

Use only approved wheel and tyresizes. Using other sizes coulddamage the vehicle and will make

the National Type Approval invalid. SeeTechnical Specifications (page 262).

Do not fit run flat tyres on vehiclesthat were not originally fitted withthem. Please contact your dealer for

more details regarding compatibility.

CAUTIONDo not install alloy wheels usingwheel nuts designed for use with steelwheels.

Note: The wheel nuts of alloy wheels andspoked steel wheels can also be used forthe steel spare wheel for a short time(maximum two weeks).Note: You can use wheel nuts designed foruse with alloy wheels with steel wheels.Note: Make sure the wheel and hub contactsurfaces are free from foreign matter.Note: Make sure that the cones on thewheel nuts are against the wheel.1. Install the wheel.2. Install the wheel nuts finger tight.

E71948

3. Install the locking wheel nut key.

255

Wheels and Tyres

1

2

3 4

5

E75442

4. Partially tighten the wheel nuts in thesequence shown.

5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.6. Fully tighten the wheel nuts in the

sequence shown. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 262).

7. Install the hub cap or cover using theball of your hand.

WARNINGHave the wheel nuts checked fortightness and the tyre pressurechecked as soon as possible.

TYRE REPAIR KITYour vehicle is not equipped with a sparetyre, but does include an emergency tyrerepair kit that can be used to repair oneflat tyre.The tyre repair kit is located in theunderfloor storage compartment. SeeStorage compartments (page 140).Note: Remove the underfloor storagecompartment screws if fitted.

General informationWARNINGS

Depending on the type and extent oftyre damage, some tyres can only bepartially sealed or not sealed at all.

Loss of tyre pressure can affect vehiclehandling, leading to loss of vehicle control.

Do not use the tyre repair kit if thetyre has already been damaged as aresult of being driven under inflated.Do not use the tyre repair kit on runflat tyres.Do not try to seal damage other thanthat located within the visible treadof the tyre.Do not try to seal damage to thetyre’s sidewall.

The tyre repair kit seals most tyrepunctures [with a diameter of up to sixmillimetres (1/4 inch)] to temporarilyrestore mobility.Observe the following rules when using thekit:• Drive with caution and avoid

making sudden steering or drivingmanoeuvres, especially if the vehicleis heavily loaded or you are towing atrailer.

• The kit will provide you with anemergency temporary repair, enablingyou to continue your journey to the nextvehicle or tyre dealer, or to drive amaximum distance of 200 kilometres(125 miles).

• Do not exceed a maximum speed of80 km/h (50 mph).

• Keep the kit out of the reach ofchildren.

• Only use the kit when the ambienttemperature is between –30°C (-22°F)and +70°C (+158°F).

256

Wheels and Tyres

Using the tyre repair kitWARNINGS

Compressed air can act as anexplosive or propellant.Never leave the tyre repair kitunattended while in use.

CAUTIONDo not keep the compressor operatingfor more than 10 minutes.

Note: Use the tyre repair kit only for thevehicle with which it was supplied.• Park your vehicle at the roadside so

that you do not obstruct the flow oftraffic and so that you are able to usethe kit without being in danger.

• Apply the parking brake, even if youhave parked on a level road, to makesure that the vehicle will not move.

• Do not attempt to remove foreignobjects like nails or screws penetratingthe tyre.

• Leave the engine running while the kitis in use, but not if the vehicle is in anenclosed or poorly ventilated area (forexample, inside a building). In thesecircumstances, switch the compressoron with the engine turned off.

• Replace the sealant bottle with a newone before the expiry date (see top ofbottle) is reached.

• Inform all other users of the vehiclethat the tyre has been temporarilysealed with the tyre repair kit and makethem aware of the special drivingconditions to be observed.

Inflating the tyreWARNINGS

Check the sidewall of the tyre priorto inflation. If there are any cracks,bumps or similar damage, do not

attempt to inflate the tyre.Do not stand directly beside the tyrewhile the compressor is pumping.Watch the sidewall of the tyre. If anycracks, bumps or similar damageappear, turn off the compressor and

let the air out by means of the pressurerelief valve B. Do not continue driving withthis tyre.

The sealant contains natural rubberlatex. Avoid contact with skin andclothing. If this happens, rinse the

affected areas immediately with plenty ofwater and contact your doctor.

If the tyre inflation pressure does notreach 1.8 bar (26 psi) within sevenminutes, the tyre may have suffered

excessive damage, making a temporaryrepair impossible. In this case, do notcontinue driving with this tyre.

CAUTIONScrewing the bottle onto the bottleholder will pierce the seal of thebottle. Do not unscrew the bottle from

the holder as the sealant will escape.

257

Wheels and Tyres

E94973

BJ

I

FE

C

KA

G

H

D

Protective capAPressure relief valveBHoseCOrange capDBottle holderEPressure gaugeFPower plug with cableGCompressor switchHLabelIBottle lidJSealant bottleK

1. Open the lid of the tyre repair kit.2. Peel off the label I showing the

maximum permissible speed of80 km/h (50 mph) from the casing andattach it to the instrument panel in thedriver’s field of view. Make sure thelabel does not obscure anythingimportant.

3. Take the hose C and the power plugwith cable G out of the kit.

4. Unscrew the orange cap D and thebottle lid J.

5. Screw the sealant bottle K clockwiseinto the bottle holder E fully tight.

6. Remove the valve cap from thedamaged tyre.

7. Detach the protective cap A from thehose C and screw the hose C firmlyonto the valve of the damaged tyre.

8. Make sure that the compressor switchH is in position 0.

9. Insert the power plug G into the cigarlighter socket or auxiliary power socket.See Cigar Lighter (page 138). SeeAuxiliary Power Points (page 138).

10. Start the engine.11. Move the compressor switch H to

position 1.12. Inflate the tyre for no longer than

seven minutes to an inflation pressureof minimum 1.8 bar (26 psi) and amaximum of 3.5 bar (51 psi). Movethe compressor switch H to position0 and check the current tyre pressurewith pressure gauge F.

13. Remove the power plug G from thecigar lighter socket or auxiliary powersocket.

14. Quickly unscrew the hose C from thetyre valve and replace the protectivecap A. Fasten the valve cap again.

15. Leave the sealant bottle K in thebottle holder E.

258

Wheels and Tyres

16. Make sure the kit, the bottle lid andthe orange cap are stored safely, butstill easily accessible in the vehicle.The kit will be required again whenyou check the tyre pressure.

17. Immediately drive approximatelythree kilometres (two miles) so thatthe sealant can seal the damagedarea.

Note: When pumping in the sealant throughthe tyre valve, the pressure may rise up to6 bar (87 psi) but will drop again after about30 seconds.

WARNINGIf you experience heavy vibrations,unsteady steering behaviour ornoises while driving, reduce your

speed and drive with caution to a placewhere it is safe for you to stop the vehicle.Recheck the tyre and its pressure. If thetyre pressure is less than 1.3 bar (19 psi) orif there are any cracks, bumps or similardamage visible, do not continue drivingwith this tyre.

Checking the tyre pressure1. Stop the vehicle after driving

approximately three kilometres(two miles). Check, and wherenecessary, adjust the pressure of thedamaged tyre.

2. Attach the kit and read the tyrepressure from the pressure gauge F.

3. If the pressure of the sealant-filled tyreis 1.3 bar (19 psi) or more, adjust it tothe specified pressure. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 262).

4. Follow the inflation procedure onceagain to top up the tyre.

5. Check the tyre pressure again from thepressure gauge F. If the tyre pressureis too high, deflate the tyre to thespecified pressure using the pressurerelief valve B.

6. Once you have inflated the tyre to itscorrect tyre pressure, move thecompressor switch H to position 0,remove the power plug G from thesocket, unscrew the hose C, fasten thevalve cap and replace the protectivecap A.

7. Leave the sealant bottle K in the bottleholder E and store the kit away safelyin its original location.

8. Drive to the nearest tyre specialist toget the damaged tyre replaced. Beforethe tyre is removed from the rim, informyour tyre dealer that the tyre containssealant. Renew the kit as soon aspossible after it has been used once.

Note: Remember that emergency roadsidetyre repair kits only provide temporarymobility. Regulations concerning tyre repairafter usage of tyre repair kit may differ fromcountry to country. You should consult atyre specialist for advice.

WARNINGBefore driving, make sure the tyre isadjusted to the recommendedinflation pressure. See Technical

Specifications (page 262). Monitor thetyre pressure until the sealed tyre isreplaced.

Empty sealant bottles can be disposed oftogether with normal household waste.Return remains of sealant to your dealeror dispose of it in compliance with localwaste disposal regulations.

259

Wheels and Tyres

TYRE CARE

E70415

To make sure the front and rear tyres ofyour vehicle wear evenly and last longer,we recommend that you swap the tyresfrom front to rear and vice versa at regularintervals of between 5000 and 10000kilometres (3000 and 6000 miles).

CAUTIONDo not scrub the sidewalls of the tyreswhen you are parking.

If you have to mount a kerb, do so slowlyand approach it with the wheels atright-angles to the kerb.Examine the tyres regularly for cuts, foreignobjects and uneven wear of the tread.Uneven wear could mean that the wheelalignment is outside specification.Check the tyre pressures (including thespare) when cold, every two weeks.

USING WINTER TYRES

CAUTIONMake sure that you use the correctwheel nuts for the type of wheel thewinter tyres are fitted to.

If winter tyres are used, make sure that thetyre pressures are correct. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 262).

USING SNOW CHAINS

WARNINGSDo not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph).

Do not use snow chains on snow-freeroads.Only fit snow chains to specifiedtyres. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 262).

CAUTIONIf your vehicle is fitted with wheeltrims, remove them before fittingsnow chains.

Note: The ABS will continue to operatenormally.Only use small link snow chains.Only use snow chains on the front wheels.

Vehicles with stability control(ESP)Vehicles with stability control (ESP) mayexhibit some unusual drivingcharacteristics which can be reduced byswitching traction control off. See UsingStability Control (page 170).

TYRE PRESSUREMONITORING SYSTEM

WARNINGSThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to regularly checkthe tyre pressures.The system will only provide a lowtyre pressure warning. It will notinflate the tyres.

260

Wheels and Tyres

WARNINGSThe system may take longer todetect low pressure in the tyres if youhave fitted snow chains.Do not drive on significantlyunder-inflated tyres. This may causethe tyres to overheat and fail.

Under-inflation reduces fuel efficiency, tyretread life and may also affect your abilityto drive the vehicle safely.

CAUTIONSDo not bend or damage the valveswhen you are inflating the tyres.Have tyres installed by properlytrained technicians.

Note: After changing the tyres or sensorsthe system will take a few minutes to reset.During this period the system is operationalbut a warning lamp may appear.The system monitors the pressure in thetyres using sensors located on the wheelsand a receiver located in your vehicle.When the system detects low pressure inthe tyres, a warning message is displayedin the information display. SeeInformation Messages (page 102).If a low pressure warning message isdisplayed in the information display, checkthe tyre pressures as soon as possible andinflate them to the recommendedpressure. See Technical Specifications(page 262). If this happens frequently, havethe cause determined and rectified as soonas possible.

Checking the tyre pressuresNote: If the tyre pressures are greater thanor equal to 3.3 bar (48 lbf/in²), you will seethe + symbol below the pressure value. Thesystem only measures pressure up to 3.3bar (48 lbf/in²). The + symbol indicates thatthe tyre pressures may be higher.

Note: Type 3 instrument clusters have aslightly different menu structure. SelectSettings first to access Information.1. Press the right arrow button on the

steering wheel to enter the main menu.2. Highlight Information with the up and

down buttons and press the right arrowbutton.

3. Highlight Tyre Pressures with the upand down buttons and press the rightarrow button.



Setting the vehicle loadNote: Type 3 instrument clusters have aslightly different menu structure. SelectSettings first to access Setup.Correct tyre pressure settings depend onvehicle load. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 262). The systemcan only detect low pressure if you haveentered the current vehicle load.1. Press the right arrow button on the


buttons and press the right arrowbutton.

3. Highlight Tyre Pressures with the upand down buttons and press the rightarrow button.



261

Wheels and Tyres

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSWheel nut torque

Nm (Ib-ft)Wheel type

170 (125)All

Tyre pressures (cold tyres)Up to 160 km/h (100 mph)

Full loadNormal load

Tyre sizeVariant RearFrontRearFront

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

3.1 (45)2.6 (38)2.4 (35)2.4 (35)215/60 R 16*

1.6L EcoBoost SCTi(Sigma), 2.0LEcoBoost SCTi(MI4), 1.6LDuratorq-TDCi (DV)Diesel Stage V, 2.0LDuratorq-TDCi(DW) and 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi(DW)

3.1 (45)2.6 (38)2.2 (32)2.4 (35)225/50 R 17 and235/45 R 18

1.6L EcoBoost SCTi(Sigma), 2.0LEcoBoost SCTi(MI4), 1.6LDuratorq-TDCi (DV)Diesel Stage V, 2.0LDuratorq-TDCi(DW) and 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi(DW)

3.1 (45)2.6 (38)2.4 (35)2.2 (32)215/60 R 16*2.0L Duratec-HE(MI4) and 2.3LDuratec-HE (MI4)

262

Wheels and Tyres



bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

3.1 (45)2.6 (38)2.2 (32)2.2 (32)225/50 R 17 and235/45 R 18

2.0L Duratec-HE(MI4) and 2.3LDuratec-HE (MI4)

*Only fit snow chains to specified tyres.

Continuous speed in excess of 160 km/h (100 mph)



bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

3.1 (45)2.7 (39)2.4 (35)2.5 (36)215/60 R 16

1.6L EcoBoost SCTi(Sigma), 1.6LDuratorq-TDCi (DV)Diesel Stage V and2.0L Duratorq-TDCi(DW)

3.1 (45)2.7 (39)2.3 (33)2.5 (36)225/50 R 17 and235/45 R 18

1.6L EcoBoost SCTi(Sigma), 1.6LDuratorq-TDCi (DV)Diesel Stage V and2.0L Duratorq-TDCi(DW)

3.1 (45)2.6 (38)2.4 (35)2.4 (35)215/60 R 162.0L Duratec-HE(MI4) and 2.3LDuratec-HE (MI4)

3.1 (45)2.6 (38)2.2 (32)2.4 (35)225/50 R 17 and235/45 R 18

2.0L Duratec-HE(MI4) and 2.3LDuratec-HE (MI4)

3.3 (48)2.8 (41)2.6 (38)2.6 (38)215/60 R 162.0L EcoBoost SCTi(MI4) and 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi(DW)

263

Wheels and Tyres



bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

3.4 (49)2.8 (41)2.6 (38)2.6 (38)225/50 R 17 and235/45 R 18

2.0L EcoBoost SCTi(MI4) and 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi(DW)

264

Wheels and Tyres

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONPLATE

Note: The vehicle identification platedesign may vary to that shown.Note: The information shown on the vehicleidentification plate is dependant uponmarket requirements.

E135662

B C ED

F

G

H

I

A

ModelAVariantBEngine designationCEmission levelDVehicle identification numberEGross vehicle weightFGross train weightGMaximum front axle weightHMaximum rear axle weightI

The vehicle identification number andmaximum weights are shown on a platelocated on the lock side of the right-handdoor aperture at the bottom.

265

Vehicle identification

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER

E87496

The vehicle identification number isstamped into the floor panel on theright-hand side, beside the front seat. It isalso shown on the left-hand side of theinstrument panel.

266

Vehicle identification

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSVehicle dimensionsS-MAX

Dimension in mm (inches)Dimension description

4772 (187.9)Maximum length - without bumper styling kit

4801 (189)Maximum length - with bumper styling kit

2154 (84.8)Overall width including exterior mirrors

1620 - 1660 (63.8 - 65.4)Overall height - EC kerb weight

2850 (112.2)Wheelbase

1578 - 1588 (62.1 - 62.5)Front track

1595 - 1605 (62.8 - 63.2)Rear track

Galaxy

Dimension in mm (inches)Dimension description

4819 (189.7)Maximum length

2154 (84.8)Overall width including exterior mirrors

1709 - 1758 (67.3 - 69.2)Overall height - EC kerb weight without roof bars

1770 - 1811 (69.7 - 71.3)Overall height - EC kerb weight including roof bars

2850 (112.2)Wheelbase

1578 - 1588 (62.1 - 62.5)Front track

1595 - 1605 (62.8 - 63.2)Rear track

267

Capacities and Specifications

Towing equipment dimensionsS-MAX

C

A

FG

H

D

B

E

E75182

Dimension in mm (inches)Dimension descriptionItem

102 (4)Bumper – end of tow ballA

16 (0.63)Attachment point – centre of tow ballB

1 079 (42.48)Wheel centre – centre of tow ballC

438 (17.2)Centre of tow ball – side memberD

876 (34.5)Inner side of side memberE

363 (14.29)Centre of tow ball – centre 1. attachmentpointF

268



424 (16.69)Centre of tow ball – centre 2. attachmentpointG

636 (25.04)Centre of tow ball – centre 3. attachmentpointH

Galaxy

E75181

C

A

B

FG

H

DE


101 (3.98)Bumper – end of tow ballA

16 (0.63)Attachment point – centre of tow ballB

1128 (44.41)Wheel centre – centre of tow ballC

269



438 (17.2)Centre of tow ball – side memberD

876 (34.5)Inner side of side memberE

412 (16.22)Centre of tow ball – centre 1. attachmentpointF

473 (18.62)Centre of tow ball – centre 2. attachmentpointG

685 (26.97)Centre of tow ball – centre 3. attachmentpointH

270


IMPORTANT AUDIOINFORMATION

WARNINGSDue to technical incompatibility,recordable (CD-R) and rewritable(CD-RW) discs may not function

correctly.These units will play compact discsthat conform to the InternationalRed Book standard audio

specification. Copy protected CDs fromsome manufacturers do not conform tothis standard and playback cannot beguaranteed.

Dual format, dual sided discs (DVDPlus, CD-DVD format), adopted bythe music industry, are thicker than

normal CDs and consequently playbackcannot be guaranteed, and jamming couldoccur. Irregular shaped CDs and CDs witha scratch protection film or self adhesivelabels attached should not be used.Warranty claims, where this type of disc isfound to be inside an audio unit returnedfor repair, will not be accepted.

All units except Sony CD (but not the6CD) are designed to playcommercially pressed 12 cm audio

compact discs only. The Sony CD unit willplay 8 cm discs with a Sony approvedadaptor fitted (CSA-8).

The audio unit may be damaged ifunsuitable items like credit cards orcoins are pushed inside the CD

aperture.

Audio unit labels

E66256

E66257

Disc labelsAudio CD

E66254

MP3

E66255

271

Audio introduction

6000CD

PO

N

LM

DE

F

HG

A CB

K IJE138368

I

CD aperture. See Loading compact discs (page 286).AOn, off and volume control. See On/off control (page 277).BCD eject. See Ejecting compact discs (page 289).CClock. See Setting the clock and date on the audio unit (page 276).DBalance and fade control. See Balance/fade control (page 277).EBass and treble control. See Bass/treble control (page 277).FMenu. See Audio menu control (page 277).GEnd call. See Telephone (page 293).HStation presets. See Station preset buttons (page 279).ISeek up. See Station tuning control (page 281).JSeek down. See Station tuning control (page 281).KAccept call. See Telephone (page 293).LTraffic announcement. See Traffic information control (page 280).MWaveband select. See Waveband button (page 279).NAuxiliary select. See Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket (page 291).OCD select.P

272

Audio unit overview

Sony CD and Sony CD DAB

E138370

G

H

I

J

S

R

Q

P

C DA B E F

KMO N L

Scan. See Station tuning control (page 281). See Compact disc trackscanning (page 288).

A

Information. See Audio unit operation (page 277). See Audio unit menus(page 283). See Compact disc player (page 286). See Audio troubleshooting(page 292).

B

Station presets. See Station preset buttons (page 279).CCD aperture. See Loading compact discs (page 286).DClock. See Setting the clock and date on the audio unit (page 276).EDSP select. See Digital signal processing (DSP) (page 283).FAutostore. See Autostore control (page 280).GMenu. See Audio menu control (page 277).HTraffic announcement. See Traffic information control (page 280).IOn and off control. See On/off control (page 277).JBalance and fade control. See Balance/fade control (page 277).KEnd call. See Telephone (page 293).LVolume control, navigation buttons and select button.MAccept call. See Telephone (page 293).N

273

Audio unit overview

Tone. See Bass/treble control (page 277).OPhone menu. See Telephone (page 293).PRadio and waveband select. See Waveband button (page 279).QAuxiliary and CD select. See Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket (page 291). SeeCompact disc player (page 286).

R

CD eject. See Ejecting compact discs (page 289).S

274

Audio unit overview

SECURITY CODEEach unit incorporates a unique code thatmust be entered before the unit willoperate.If the battery is disconnected or if the unithas been removed from the vehicle, thecode must be re-entered before the unitwill operate.

LOST SECURITY CODEIf you lose the unique code, contact yourdealer and supply details of your audio unitalong with some proof of identity.

ENTERING A SECURITY CODEIf CODE - - - -, CODE 0000 or ENTERKEYCODE appears in the display whenyou switch on the audio unit, you mustenter the unique code using the stationpreset buttons.

6000CD, Sony and Sony DAB1. Using the station preset buttons enter

the unique code.2. If you make a mistake entering the

code, re-enter the digits by continuingto select buttons 0-9. The display willadvance from digit position 1 to 4 andthen back again.

3. Make sure that the complete code iscorrect before pressing either the *preset button or the button betweenthe navigation buttons to confirm yourselection.

INCORRECT SECURITY CODEUp to a maximum of 10 unique code entryattempts are allowed with variousconsequences if you get it wrong.

The number of attempts will be shown inthe display.If the display reverts to CODE anotherentry attempt may be made immediately.If the display shows WAIT 30, the unit willbe locked for 30 minutes. Wait until thetimer counts down to zero. When CODE isshown in the display, enter the correctcode.Note: After 10 incorrect attempts the unitwill be permanently inoperative andLOCKED will be shown in the display. Seeyour dealer.

275

Audio system security

SETTING THE CLOCK ANDDATE ON THE AUDIO UNIT6000CDChanging the date and timePress the CLOCK button to display thedate and time.Note: If you do not press another buttonwithin 30 seconds of pressing the CLOCKbutton, the display will return to its previoussetting.1. Using the seek up or seek down button

select the date or time value that youwish to change. The selected value willflash in the display.

2. Rotate the volume control to changethe selected date or time value.

3. Using the seek up or seek down buttonselect additional date or time valuesthat you wish to change.

4. Rotate the volume control to changethe selected date or time value.

5. Press the CLOCK button to exit andsave your settings.

Note: If you do not press the CLOCK buttonwithin 30 seconds of changing a date ortime value, the display will exit and save thenew values automatically.Note: Press and hold the CLOCK buttonfor more than two seconds to automaticallyselect the hour value for winter or summertime adjustment.

12/24 hour format1. Press the MENU button repeatedly

until the 12/24 icon is shown in thedisplay.

2. Using the seek up or seek down buttonselect your required setting.

3. Press the MENU button repeatedly orallow the system to time out to confirmyour selection.

Sony and Sony DABChanging the date and time1. Press the CLOCK button.2. Press the left or right navigation button

until the date or time value that youwish to change flashes in the display.

3. Using the up or down navigation buttonchange the selected date or time value.

4. Using the left and right navigationbuttons select additional date or timevalues that you wish to change. Theselected value will flash in the display.

5. Repeat steps three and four asnecessary.

6. Press the CLOCK button or the buttonbetween the navigation buttons to exitand save your settings.

12/24 hour format1. Press the MENU button.2. Press the up or down navigation button

until the 12/24 icon is shown in thedisplay.

3. Using the left or right navigation buttonselect the required setting.

4. Press the MENU button or the buttonbetween the navigation buttons toconfirm your selection.

276

Audio unit clock and date displays

ON/OFF CONTROLPress the on/off control. This will alsooperate the unit for up to one hour with theignition turned off.The radio will switch off automaticallyafter one hour.

BASS/TREBLE CONTROLThe bass function is used to adjust thelow-frequency response of the audio unit.The treble function is used to adjust thehigh-frequency response of the audio unit.

All except Sony and Sony DABNote: The selected level will be shown inthe display.1. Press the BASS/TRE button once for

bass or twice for treble.2. Use the volume control or on some

units the seek up or seek down buttonto make the necessary adjustment.

Sony and Sony DABNote: You can adjust these settingsseparately for CD, Radio and Aux.Note: The selected level will be shown inthe display.1. Press the TONE button once for bass

or twice for treble.2. Use the up and down navigation

buttons to make the necessaryadjustment.

BALANCE/FADE CONTROLThe balance function is used to adjust thesound distribution between the left andright speakers.The fade function is used to adjust thesound distribution from front to rear invehicles fitted with rear speakers.Press the FAD/BAL button once for fadeor twice for balance.

All except Sony and Sony DABUse the volume control or on some unitsthe seek up or seek down button to makethe necessary adjustment.

Sony and Sony DABUse the up and down navigation buttonsfor fade adjustment, and the left and rightnavigation buttons for balance adjustment.The selected level will be shown in thedisplay.

AUDIO MENU CONTROLUse the MENU button to access functionsthat cannot be selected directly via one ofthe control buttons. Press the MENUbutton for first level functions, or press andhold the MENU button for other secondlevel functions (not available on Sony orSony DAB audio units).

277

Audio unit operation

6000CD

Menu functions

Second levelFirst level

During all functionsDuring CD playbackDuring tape playbackDuring radio recep-tion

Traffic local ordistant

Scan12/24 hourManual tuning

AF**ShuffleAVC*Scan tuning

REGRepeatADV menu12/24 hour

NewsComp-AVC*

CLIP12/24 hour-ADV menu

VIDAVC*--

Bluetooth enable/disable

ADV menu--

Note: The sequence in which functions appear may vary for different audio units andvehicles.Note: Second level functions (advanced) can also be entered by selecting ADV menu fromthe first level menu.*Automatic volume control.** Alternative frequencies.

Sony CD and Sony CD DAB

Menu functions

During CD playbackDuring radio reception

12/24 hour12/24 hour

CLIP ON/OFFCLIP ON/OFF

News ON/OFFNews ON/OFF

AVC1AVC1

AF2AF2

278


Menu functions

During CD playbackDuring radio reception

TA3 volumeTA3 volume

Traffic local or distantTraffic local or distant

ShuffleRegional ON/OFF

Repeat-

Comp ON/OFF-Note: The sequence in which functions appear may vary for different audio units andvehicles.1Automatic volume control.2Alternative frequencies.3Traffic announcement.

Sony CD and Sony CD DAB withBluetoothPressing PHONE followed by the MENUbutton will access the following options:• No active phone or Active phone• Debond BT device• Reject calls ON/OFF• Bluetooth ON/OFF.

STATION PRESET BUTTONSThis feature allows you to store yourfavourite stations so that they can berecalled by selecting the appropriatewaveband and pressing one of the presetbuttons.1. Select a waveband.2. Tune to the station required.3. Press and hold one of the preset

buttons. The audio unit will mute.When sound returns the station hasbeen stored.

This can be repeated on each wavebandand for each preset button.Note: When you drive to another part of thecountry, FM RDS (radio data system)stations that broadcast on alternativefrequencies are stored on the presetbuttons.

WAVEBAND BUTTONNote: The selector can also be used toreturn to radio reception when you havebeen listening to another source.

All except Sony and Sony DABPress the AM/FM button to select fromthe wavebands available.

Sony and Sony DABPress the RADIO button to select from thewavebands available.

279


AUTOSTORE CONTROLNote: This function will overwrite thepreviously stored autostore preset stations.Note: This function can also be used tostore stations manually in the same way asother wavebands.Note: The strongest signals available onthe selected waveband will be stored.The sound is muted and AUTOSTORE willbe shown in the display while the unitsearches through the frequencies.When the search is complete, sound isrestored and the strongest signals arestored on the autostore presets.

6000CDPress and hold the AM/FM button.

Sony CDPress and hold the AST or RADIO button.

TRAFFIC INFORMATIONCONTROLMany stations that broadcast on the FMwaveband have a TP code to signify thatthey carry traffic programme information.

Activating traffic announcementsBefore you can receive trafficannouncements, you must press the TAbutton. Either TA-D or TA-L will be shownin the display to indicate that the featureis switched on.If you are already tuned to a station thatbroadcasts traffic information, TP will alsobe shown in the display. Otherwise the unitwill search for a traffic programme anddisplay TP SEEK while doing so. If it cannotlocate such a station, NOT FOUND will beshown in the display.

TP will be shown within a box in the displaywhen you are tuned to a station providingtraffic information from a linked RDS (radiodata system) or EON (enhanced othernetwork) station.When traffic information is broadcast, itwill automatically interrupt normal radio,tape or CD playback and TRAFFIC orNEWS will be shown in the display.If the traffic signal weakens, TP will flashin the display. Press the seek up or seekdown button (the left or right navigationbutton on Sony or Sony DAB audio units)to find another station.Note: If this happens during CD or AUXplayback or, on certain models, with theradio volume set to zero, the unit will retuneautomatically if the station is not available.If a non-traffic station is selected orrecalled using a preset button, the audiounit will remain on that station unless TAis turned off, then on again.Note: If TA is on and you select a preset ormanual tune to a non TA station no trafficannouncement will be heard.

Local or distant trafficThe number of RDS or EON trafficannouncements may become excessivein some areas so there is an option toselect between local traffic informationand all available information.

6000CD1. Press and hold the MENU button until

the display changes.2. Press the MENU button repeatedly

until TA is shown in the display.

280


3. Press the seek up or seek down buttonto select either local (TA LOCAL) ordistant (TA DIST) trafficannouncements.

4. Press the MENU button or allow themenu to time out to confirm yourselection.

Note: Either TA-L or TA-D will be shown inthe display.

Sony CD1. Press the MENU button and use the

up or down navigation button to selectthe TA display.

2. Press the left or right navigation buttonto select your required setting.

3. Press the MENU button to confirmyour selection.

Traffic announcement volumeTraffic announcements interrupt normalbroadcasts at a preset minimum level thatis usually louder than normal listeningvolumes.

To adjust the preset volume6000CD1. Press and hold the TA button.2. Rotate the volume control to make the

necessary adjustment.Note: The selected level will be shown inthe display.

Sony CD1. Press and hold the TA button.2. Press the left or right navigation button

to make the necessary adjustment.Note: The selected level will be shown inthe display.

Ending traffic announcementsThe audio unit will return to normaloperation at the end of each trafficannouncement. To end the announcementprematurely, press TA during theannouncement.Note: If you press TA at any other time itwill switch all announcements off.

STATION TUNING CONTROLDAB service linkingNote: The DAB service linking is as perdefault off.Note: Service linking allowscross-referencing to other correspondingfrequencies of the same station, for exampleFM and other DAB ensembles.Note: The system will automaticallychange to another corresponding station ifthe current one becomes unavailable, forexample when leaving the coverage area.

Switching DAB service linking on andoff1. Press the MENU button.2. Using the up or down navigation button

scroll through the display until DIGITALRADIO SERVICE LINK is shown in thedisplay.

3. Using the left or right navigation buttonselect AUTO or OFF.


Seek tuning6000CDSelect a waveband and briefly press theseek up or seek down button. The unit willstop at the first station it finds in thedirection you have chosen.

281


Sony CDSelect a waveband and briefly press theup or down navigation button. The unit willstop at the first station it finds in thedirection you have chosen.

Manual tuning6000CD1. Select a waveband and press the

MENU button until MAN is shown inthe display.

2. Press the seek up or seek down buttonto tune up or down the waveband insmall increments or press and hold toincrement quickly, until you find astation you want to listen to.

Sony CDSelect a waveband and briefly press theup or down navigation button to tune upor down the waveband in smallincrements. The display shows thefrequency selected.

Sony DABNote: Ensembles are groups of stations.Briefly press the up or down navigationbutton to move up or down the ensembles.

Scan tuningThe SCAN function allows you to listen to10 seconds of each station detected.

6000CD1. Press the MENU button repeatedly

until SCAN is shown in the display.2. Press the seek up or seek down button

to scan up or down the selectedwaveband.

3. Depending on the audio unit, press theseek up or seek down button or theMENU button to continue listening toa station.

Sony and Sony DAB1. Press the SCAN button. SCAN flashes

or SCANNING is shown in the display.2. Press the left or right navigation button

to scan within a waveband.3. Press SCAN again to continue listening

to a station.

282


AUTOMATIC VOLUMECONTROLWhen available, automatic volume control(AVC) adjusts the volume level tocompensate for engine noise and roadspeed noise.

All except Sony and Sony DAB1. Press the MENU button repeatedly

until AVC is shown in the display.2. Use the seek up or seek down button

to adjust the AVC setting.3. Press the MENU button or allow the

system to time out to confirm yourselection.

Sony and Sony DAB1. Press the MENU button briefly.2. Using the up or down navigation button

select AVC.3. Press the MENU button or allow the


DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING(DSP)DSP occupancyThis feature takes into account thedifferences in distance from the variousspeakers in the vehicle to each seat. Selectthe sitting position for which the audio isto be correctly enhanced.

DSP equaliserSelect the music category that most suitsyour listening preference. The audio outputwill change to enhance the particular styleof music chosen.

Changing the DSP settings1. Press the DSP button once for

occupancy and twice for equaliser. Foritem location: See Audio unitoverview (page 272).

2. Use the up and down navigationbuttons to select the required setting.

3. Press the button between thenavigation buttons to confirm yourselection.

AUDIO DISTORTIONREDUCTION (CLIP)When available CLIP automatically detectssound distortion and reduces the volumelevel until the distortion has beeneliminated. This means that whilst thedisplay might change numerically whenyou raise the volume manually with thecontrol, there may be no actual increasein sound.

All except Sony and Sony DAB1. Press and hold the MENU button until


until CLIP is shown in the display.3. Using the seek up or seek down button

turn the function on or off.4. Press the MENU button or allow the



select CLIP.3. Press the MENU button or allow the


283

Audio unit menus

ALTERNATIVE FREQUENCIESMany programmes broadcast on the FMwaveband have a programmeidentification (PI) code, which can berecognised by audio units.If your radio has alternative frequencies(AF) tuning switched on and you movefrom one transmission area to another, thisfunction will search for and switch to astronger station signal, if one can be found.Under certain conditions, however, AFtuning may temporarily disrupt normalreception.When selected, the unit continuallyevaluates signal strength and, if a bettersignal becomes available, the unit willswitch to that alternative. It mutes whileit checks a list of alternative frequenciesand, if necessary, it will search once acrossthe selected waveband for a genuinealternative frequency.It will restore radio reception when it findsone or, if one is not found, the unit willreturn to the original stored frequency. Oncertain units, NOT FOUND will be shownin the display.With AF-MAN selected, the unit operatesin a similar way to AF-AUTO or AF-ON, butonly searches for an alternative frequencywhen prompted by pressing a presetbutton.With AF-OFF selected, the original storedfrequency remains selected. In this mode,AF-OFF will be displayed every time theunit is turned on.



until AF is shown in the display.

3. Using the seek up or seek down buttonselect the required setting.

4. Press the MENU button or allow thesystem to time out to confirm yourselection.

Sony and Sony DAB1. Press the MENU button briefly.2. Using the left or right navigation button

select the required setting.3. Press the MENU button to confirm

your selection.

REGIONAL MODE (REG)Regional mode (REG) controls thebehaviour of AF switching betweenregionally related networks of a parentbroadcaster. A broadcaster may run a fairlylarge network across a large part of thecountry. At various times of the day thislarge network may be broken down into anumber of smaller regional networks,typically centred on major towns or cities.When the network is not split into regionalvariants, the whole network caries thesame programming.Regional mode ON: This prevents 'random'AF switches when neighbouring regionalnetworks are not carrying the sameprogramming.Regional mode OFF: This allows a largercoverage area if neighbouring regionalnetworks are carrying the sameprogramming, but can cause 'random' AFswitches if they are not.



until REG is shown in the display.

284

Audio unit menus

3. Using the seek up or seek down buttonturn the function on or off.

4. Press the MENU button or allow thesystem to time out to confirm yourselection.


select REGIONAL.3. Press the MENU button or allow the


NEWS BROADCASTSSome audio units interrupt normalreception to broadcast news bulletins fromstations on the FM waveband or radio datasystem (RDS) and enhanced othernetwork (EON) linked stations, in the sameway as traffic information is provided.During news broadcasts, the displayalternates between the station name andNEWS. News interrupts are broadcast atthe same preset volume level as trafficannouncements.


NEWS is shown in the display.2. Using the seek up or seek down button

turn the function on or off.3. Press the MENU button to confirm

your selection.

Sony and Sony DAB1. Press the MENU button.2. Using the up or down navigation button

scroll through the display until NEWSis shown in the display.

3. Press the button between thenavigation buttons to make yourselection.

4. Using the left or right navigation buttonturn the function on or off.


285

Audio unit menus

LOADING COMPACT DISCS6000CD, Sony and Sony DABAlways check that the CD aperture isempty before inserting a CD.Insert a CD, label side up, into the audiounit.LOADING, READING CD and AUDIO CDor MP3 CD will be shown in the display,and playback will start automatically.

TRACK SELECTIONAll except Sony and Sony DAB1. Press the SEEK UP button once to

move to the next track or press itrepeatedly to access later tracks.

2. Press the SEEK DOWN button onceto replay the current track. If pressedwithin two seconds of the start of atrack, the previous track will beselected.

3. Press the SEEK DOWN buttonrepeatedly to select previous tracks.

Sony and Sony DAB1. Press the up navigation button once to

move to the next track or press itrepeatedly to access later tracks.

2. Press the down navigation button onceto replay the current track. If pressedwithin two seconds of the start of atrack, the previous track will beselected.

3. Press the down navigation buttonrepeatedly to select previous tracks.

LOADING THE COMPACT DISCCHANGER

CAUTIONSDo not insert more than one disc intoeach slot.Keep the door closed when themagazine is installed.

Note: The unit will only accept conventionalCD's.For item location: See CD changer (page143).

E66144

1. Open the door.2. Press the button.3. Remove the magazine.4. Insert a disc, with the label facing

upwards, into each slot. You will heara distinct click to confirm correctloading.

5. Install the magazine in the directionindicated by the arrow on themagazine. You will hear a distinct clickto confirm correct loading.

6. Close the door.

286

Compact disc player

UNLOADING THE COMPACTDISC CHANGER

CAUTIONKeep the door closed when themagazine is installed.

1. Open the door.2. Press the button.3. Remove the magazine.4. Pull the tray out using the lever on the

side.5. Remove the CD and close the tray.6. Repeat steps four and five to remove

remaining CD's.7. Install the magazine in the direction

indicated by the arrow on themagazine. You will hear a distinct clickto confirm correct loading.

8. Close the door.

COMPACT DISC PLAYBACKNote: During playback, the display indicatesthe disc, track and time that has elapsedsince the start of the track.Note: On CD changer audio units, if two ormore CD's are loaded one after the other,playback will start with the last CD loaded.

6000CDDuring radio reception, press the CD buttononce to start CD playback.Playback will start immediately after a discis loaded.

Sony and Sony CD DABDuring radio reception, press the CD/AUXbutton once to start CD playback.Playback will start immediately after a discis loaded.

Compact disc changer playback6000CDPress the CD button twice to start CDplayback.Note: If the CD button is pressed when nodiscs are loaded, NO CDS will be shown inthe display.

Sony and Sony CD DABPress the CD/AUX button twice to startCD playback.Note: If the CD/AUX button is pressedwhen no discs are loaded, NO CDS will beshown in the display.

FAST FORWARD/REVERSEAll except Sony and Sony DABPress and hold the seek up or the seekdown button to search forwards orbackwards within the tracks on the disc.

Sony and Sony DABPress and hold the left or right navigationbutton to search forwards or backwardswithin the tracks on the disc.

SHUFFLE/RANDOMRandom track playback, also known asshuffle, plays all tracks on a CD in randomorder.

6000CDNote: When SHUFF CD is selected only thetracks on the current CD will be shuffled.When SHUF ALL is selected the tracks onall the CD's will be shuffled.

287

Compact disc player

1. Press the MENU button repeatedlyuntil SHUF is shown in the display.

2. Using the seek up or seek down buttonscroll through the display until SHUFALL or SHUFF CD is shown in thedisplay.

3. Using the seek up or seek down buttonselect the next track to shuffle ifrequired.

Note: With the function on, SHUFFLE willbe shown in the display as each new trackis selected.

Sony CD and Sony CD DAB1. Press the MENU button.2. Using the up or down navigation button

scroll through the display untilSHUFFLE is shown in the display.

3. Use the left or right navigation buttonto switch the function on and off.

Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, optionsinclude SHUFF CD for the whole CD, orSHUF ALL to play all the tracks in the folderin a random order.

COMPACT DISC TRACKCOMPRESSIONWith this feature on, quieter music isboosted and louder music lowered tominimise repeated volume adjustments.

All except Sony and Sony DAB1. Press MENU repeatedly until COMP is

shown in the display.2. Using the seek up or seek down button

turn the function on or off.3. Press the MENU button to confirm

your selection.

Sony and Sony DAB1. Press the MENU button.2. Using the up or down navigation button

scroll through the display until COMPis shown in the display.

3. Press the button between thenavigation buttons to make yourselection.

4. Using the left or right navigation buttonturn the function on or off.


COMPACT DISC TRACKSCANNINGThe SCAN function allows you to previeweach track for approximately 10 seconds.

6000CDNote: When selected, SCAN will be shownbriefly in the display at the start of eachtrack.1. Press the MENU button repeatedly

until SCAN is shown in the display.2. Using the seek up or seek down button

select either SCAN CD or SCAN ALL.3. Press the seek up or seek down button

again to continue listening to a track.

Sony and Sony DABNote: Various scan modes are possible,according to the type of CD currentlyplaying.

288

Compact disc player

1. Press the SCAN button once to scaneach track on an audio CD, or the first10 seconds of each track on each folderof a MP3 CD.

2. Press the SCAN button again to selectSCAN OFF (audio CD), or in the caseof MP3 to scan each track within afolder.

EJECTING COMPACT DISCSNote: Radio reception is restoredautomatically when the EJECT button ispressed.Note: If the EJECT button is pressed inerror, press the button again to cancel.Note: If the CD is not removed it will bepulled back into the audio unit.

6000CDPress the EJECT button at any time andremove the CD.

Sony CDNote: If no CD is loaded when the EJECTbutton is pressed, NO CD will be shown inthe display.Press the EJECT button at any time andremove the CD. EJECTING and PLEASEREMOVE will be shown in the display.

REPEAT COMPACT DISCTRACKS6000CD1. Press the MENU button repeatedly

until REPEAT is shown in the display.2. Using the SEEK UP or SEEK DOWN

button choose between OFF and TRK.

Sony and Sony DAB1. Press the MENU button.2. using the up or down navigation

buttons scroll through the display untilREPEAT is shown in the display.

3. Using the left or right navigationbuttons select REPEAT TRACK orREPEAT OFF.

4. Press the MENU button to confirmyour selection.

Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, playbackoptions are REPEAT TRACK, REP FOLDERand REPEAT OFF.

MP3 FILE PLAYBACKNote: Some copy protected audio files maynot be read by the CD player.The CD player also supports MP3 andWMA format audio files.When a CD containing audio is insertedinto the CD player the disc's directorystructure is read in. It may take a whilebefore playback starts and is dependanton the quality of the disc.MP3 tracks may be recorded on the CD inseveral ways. They can all be placed in theroot directory like a conventional audio CD,or they can be placed in folders that mayrepresent, for example, an album, an artist,or a genre.

Playing a multi session discThe normal playing sequence on CD's withmultiple folders is to play the tracks in thefirst folder, then the tracks in any foldersnested inside the first folder, then moveonto the second folder, and so on. Forexample, if folder 1 has folders 1a and 1bwithin it, and folder 2 contains folder 2a,the playing sequence will be folder 1, 1a, 1b,2, 2a.

289

Compact disc player

When the playback of a file is finished theplayback of the other files in the samedirectory continues. Directory change takesplace automatically when all files in thecurrent directory have been played back.

MP3 DISPLAY OPTIONSWhen an MP3 disc is playing, certaininformation encoded in each track can bedisplayed. Such information will normallyinclude:• The file name• The folder name• ID3 information which might be the

album or artist’s name.The unit will normally show the file namethat is playing. To select one of the otheritems of information, press the INFObutton repeatedly until the required itemis shown in the display.Note: If the ID3 information selected isunavailable, NO MP3 TAG will be shown inthe display.

CD text display optionsWhen an audio disc with CD text is playing,limited information encoded in each trackcan be displayed. Such information willnormally include:• The disc name• The artist name• The track name.Note: These display options are selectedin the same way as MP3 displays. NO DISCNAME or NO TRACK NAME will be shownin the display if no information has beenencoded.

ENDING COMPACT DISCPLAYBACKAll except Sony and Sony DABPress the AM/FM button.Note: This will not eject the CD; the discwill merely pause at the point where radioreception was restored.To resume CD playback, press the CDbutton again.

Sony and Sony DABPress the RADIO button.Note: This will not eject the CD; the discwill merely pause at the point where radioreception was restored.To resume CD playback, press theCD/AUX button again.

290

Compact disc player

Note: For optimum performance whenusing any auxiliary device set the volume onthe device high. This will reduce audiointerference when charging the device viathe vehicle power supply socket.When fitted the Auxiliary input (AUX IN)socket permits an auxiliary device, such asan MP3 player, to be linked into the vehicleaudio system. Output can be playedthrough the vehicle speakers.To connect an auxiliary device, plug it intothe AUX IN socket using a 3.5 mmconventional audio jack connector.Select the auxiliary input via the AUXbutton and playback will be heard throughthe vehicle speakers. AUX will be shown inthe display. Volume, treble and bass canbe adjusted on the audio unit as normal.The audio unit buttons can also be usedto restore playback from the audio unit,while the auxiliary device remainsconnected.

291

Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket

RectificationAudio unit display

General error message for CD fault conditions, forexample cannot read the CD, data-CD inserted. Mayalso indicate a audio unit malfunction. Make sure thatthe disc is correctly loaded, clean and re- load the CDor replace the CD with a known music CD. See Ejectingcompact discs (page 289). See Loading compactdiscs (page 286). If error continues. See your dealer.

CD ERRORPLEASE CHECK CD

CDC ERROR

Message to indicate that the audio unit or CD changeris empty. Insert a CD. See Loading compact discs(page 286).

NO CDNO CDSNO CD #

Ambient temperature too hot – unit will not work untilit has cooled down.

HIGH TEMPCD DRIVE HIGH TEMP

Message to indicate that the CD slot is already loaded.Eject the CD from selected slot before attempting loadoperation or select another slot location. See Loadingcompact discs (page 286).

SLOT FULL

Message to indicate that the audio unit is full. SeeEjecting compact discs (page 289).CDC FULL

An incompatible CD has been inserted, for example notan audio CD. See Ejecting compact discs (page 289).DATA CD

Message to prompt you for the Keycode. See Enteringa security code (page 275).CODE ----

Message to inform you to wait until the next keycodeentry attempt can be made. See Incorrect securitycode (page 275).

WAIT

Message indicates the number of incorrect inputattempts. See Incorrect security code (page 275).TRIES

Message to inform you that audio unit security systemhas locked the unit after repeated incorrect keycodeentries. See your dealer.

LOCKED

Message to prompt you for the Keycode. See Enteringa security code (page 275).

KEYCODE....ENTER KEYCODE....

Message to inform you that the entered keycode isincorrect. See Incorrect security code (page 275).INCORRECT

292

Audio troubleshooting

GENERAL INFORMATION

CAUTIONUsing the system with the engine offwill drain the battery.

This section describes the functions andfeatures of the Bluetooth mobile phonehands free system.The Bluetooth mobile phone part of thesystem provides interaction with the audioor navigation system and your mobilephone. It allows you to use the audio ornavigation system to make and receivecalls without having to hold your mobilephone.

Compatibility of phonesCAUTION

As no common agreement exists,mobile phone manufacturers are ableto implement a variety of profiles in

their Bluetooth devices. Because of this,an incompatibility can occur between thephone and hands-free system, which insome cases may significantly degrade thesystem performance. To avoid thissituation, only recommended phonesshould be used.

Please visit the website www.ford-mobile-connectivity.com for full details.

BLUETOOTH SETUPBefore you can use your telephone withyour vehicle it must be bonded to thevehicle telephone system.

Handling of phonesUp to six Bluetooth devices can be bondedto the vehicle system.

Note: If there is an ongoing call when thephone in use is selected as the new activephone, the call is transferred to the vehicleaudio system.Note: Even if connected to the car system,your phone can still be used in the usualway.

Requirements for BluetoothconnectionThe following are required before aBluetooth phone connection can be made.1. The Bluetooth feature must be

activated on the phone and on theaudio unit. Make sure the Bluetoothmenu option in the audio unit is set toON. For information on phone settings,refer to your phone user guide.

2. In the Bluetooth menu on your phone,search for Ford Audio and select it.

3. Enter the code number shown on thevehicle display using the phone keypad.If no code number is shown on thedisplay, enter the Bluetooth PINnumber 0000 using the phone keypad.Now enter the Bluetooth PIN numbershown on the vehicle display.

4. If your mobile phone asks you toauthorize the automatic connection,select YES.

Note: A phone call will be disconnected ifthe audio unit is switched off. If the ignitionkey is turned to the off position the phonecall will remain in progress.

TELEPHONE SETUPPhonebookAfter start up access to the phonebook listcan be delayed for several minutes,depending upon the size.

293

Telephone

Phonebook categoriesDepending on your phonebook entry,different categories can be displayed inthe audio unit.For example:

MobileM

OfficeO

HomeH

FaxF

Note: Entries may be displayed without acategory attachment.The category can also be indicated as anicon:

E87990

Phone

E87991

Mobile

E87992

Home

E87993

Office

E87994

Fax

Making a phone an active phoneWhen using the system for the first time,no phone is connected to the system.

Bluetooth phoneAfter bonding a Bluetooth phone to thesystem, this becomes the active phone.For further information refer to the phonemenu.

Select the phone from the active phonemenu.Turning the ignition and radio or navigationunit back on again, the last active phoneis picked up by the system.Note: In some cases the Bluetoothconnection must also be confirmed on thephone.

Bond another Bluetooth phoneBond a new Bluetooth phone as describedin the requirements for a Bluetoothconnection.Phones stored in the system are accessibleby using the phone list on the audio unit.Note: A maximum of six devices may bebonded. If six Bluetooth devices havealready been bonded, one of these has tobe debonded in order to bond a new device.

TELEPHONE CONTROLSRemote controlVoice, accept and reject button

E876622

1

Voice button1Accept and reject button2

The VOICE button is used to activate orswitch off the Voice control.On vehicles with an accept and rejectbutton, phone calls can be accepted andrejected by pressing the appropriatebutton.

294

Telephone

Note: Some audio units have the acceptand reject buttons on the front bezel. Theseoperate in the same way.

USING THE TELEPHONE -VEHICLES WITHOUT:NAVIGATION SYSTEMThis chapter describes the phone functionsof the audio unit.Note: Refer to your audio guide for detailsof the controls.An active phone must be present.Even if connected to the audio unit, yourphone can still be used in the usual way.Note: You can exit the phone menu bypressing any source button CD, AM/FM orAUX.

Making a callDialling a number using voice controlPhone numbers can be dialled using voicecontrol. See Telephone commands(page 310).

Dialling a number using the addressbookYou can access your phone address bookvia Bluetooth. The entries will appear inthe unit display.1. Press the PHONE or the call accept

button.2. Press the MENU button.3. Keep pressing the MENU button until

PHONEBOOK appears.4. Press the seek buttons to select the

desired phone number.Note: Press and hold the seek button toskip to the next letter in the alphabet.

5. Press the PHONE or the call acceptbutton to dial the selected phonenumber.

Dialling a number using the addressbook - Sony radioYou can access your phone address bookvia Bluetooth. The entries will appear inthe unit display.1. Press the PHONE button.2. Press the seek button until the phone

book is shown.3. Press the up/down arrow buttons to

select the desired phone number.Note: Press and hold the up/down arrowbuttons to skip to the next letter in thealphabet.4. Press the PHONE or the call accept

button to dial the selected phonenumber.

Dialling a number using the telephonekeypadIf you have an audio unit with a telephonekeypad (buttons 0-9, * and #):1. Press the call accept button. Press the

PHONE button if you have a Sonyradio.

2. Dial the number using the telephonekeypad on the audio unit.

3. Press the call accept button.Note: If you enter an incorrect digit whilstentering a phone number, press the seek leftbutton to erase the last digit. A long presswill erase the complete string of digits.Press and hold 0 to enter a + digit.

Ending a callCalls can be ended by pressing the callreject button.

295

Telephone

Audio units without a telephone keypadcan also end a call by pressing eitherPHONE, CD, AM/FM or ON/OFF, or bypressing the MODE button on the remotecontrol

Redialling a number1. Press the PHONE or the call accept

button.2. Press the MENU button.3. Select the CALL OUT list or the CALL

IN list. On some audio units, select theMISSED, INCOMING or OUTGOINGcalls list.

Note: If the active phone does not providea call out list, the last outgoing callnumber/entry can be redialled.4. Press the seek button on the audio unit.5. Press the PHONE or the call accept

button to dial the desired phonenumber.

Redialling a number - Sony radio1. Press the PHONE or the call accept

button.2. Press the seek button until the desired

list is displayed.Note: If the active phone does not providea call out list, the last outgoing callnumber/entry can be redialled.3. Press the up/down buttons to select

the desired phone number.4. Press the PHONE or the call accept

button to dial the phone number.

Redialling the last dialled number -Sony radio1. Press the call accept button.2. Press the call accept button a second

time to dial the number.

Receiving an incoming callAccepting an incoming callIncoming calls can be accepted by pressingeither the call accept button, the PHONEbutton or the MODE button on the remotecontrol.

Rejecting an incoming callIncoming calls can be rejected by pressingthe call reject button.Audio units without a telephone keypadcan also reject a call by pressing eitherPHONE, CD, AM/FM or ON/OFF.

Receiving a second incoming callNote: The second incoming call functionmust be activated in your phone.If there is an incoming call whilst there isan ongoing call, a beep will be heard andyou will have the option to end the activecall and to accept the incoming call.

Accepting a second incoming callSecond incoming calls can be acceptedby pressing either the call accept button,the PHONE button, or the MODE buttonon the remote control.

Rejecting a second incoming callSecond incoming calls can be rejected bypressing the call reject button. Unitswithout a telephone keypad can also rejecta second incoming call by pressing the CDbutton, or the AM/FM button.

Muting the microphoneDuring a call, it is possible to mute themicrophone. Whilst muted, confirmationwill appear in the display.

296

Telephone

Audio units with green call acceptbuttonPress the call accept button. Press thebutton once again to turn this function off.

Audio units without green call acceptbuttonPress the seek up or down button. Pressthe button once again to turn this functionoff.

Changing the active phoneNote: Phones must be bonded to thesystem before they can be made active.

Using the station storage buttonNote: This process is only for audio unitswithout a telephone keypad.1. Press the PHONE button on the audio

unit.2. Press the preset number required

(using the station preset buttons 1 - 6).

Using the audio unit menuNote: After bonding a phone to the system,this becomes the active phone.1. Press the PHONE or call accept

button.2. Press the MENU button on the audio

unit.3. Select the ACTIVE PHONE option on

the audio unit.4. Scroll through the different stored

phones by using the seek buttons todisplay the bonded phones.

5. Press the MENU button to select thephone which is to be the active phone.

Debonding a bonded phoneA bonded phone can be deleted from thesystem at any time, unless a phone call isin progress.

1. Press the PHONE or call acceptbutton.

2. Press the MENU button on the audiounit.

3. Select the DEBOND option on theaudio unit.

4. Scroll through the different phones byusing the seek buttons and display thephone to be debonded.

5. Press the MENU button to select thephone which is to be debonded.

Debonding a bonded phone - SonyradioA bonded phone can be deleted from thesystem at any time, unless a phone call isin progress.1. Press the PHONE button.2. Press the up/down arrow buttons until

you reach the DEBOND option.3. Scroll through the different phones by

using the seek buttons and display thephone to be debonded.

4. Press the OK button to be debond.

USING THE TELEPHONE -VEHICLES WITH: NAVIGATIONSYSTEMThis chapter describes the phone functionsof the Navigation System.Note: Refer to your Navigation Systemguide for details of the controls.An active phone must be present.Even if connected to the NavigationSystem, your phone can still be used in theusual way.

297

Telephone

Making a callDialling a numberPhone numbers can be dialled using voicecontrol. See Voice control (page 300).

Ending a callCalls can be ended by pressing either theEND button, the MODE button on theremote switch or the ON/OFF button onthe navigation system.

Redialling a number1. Press the PHONE button on the unit.2. Select REDIAL.

Receiving an incoming callAccepting an incoming callIncoming calls can be accepted by pressingeither the call accept button, the MODEbutton on the remote control, the PHONEbutton on the unit or by using the ACCEPToption in the menu.

Rejecting an incoming callIncoming calls can be rejected by pressingeither the call reject button, the CD orAM/FM buttons on the unit, or by usingthe REJECT option in the menu.

Receiving a second incoming callNote: The second incoming call functionmust be activated in your phone.If there is an incoming call, whilst there isan ongoing call, a beep will be heard andyou will have the option to end the activecall and to accept the incoming call.

Accepting a second incoming callSecond incoming calls can be acceptedby pressing either the call accept button,the MODE button on the remote control,the PHONE button on the unit or by usingthe ACCEPT option in the menu.Note: This will cancel the ongoing call.

Rejecting a second incoming callSecond incoming calls can be rejected bypressing either the call reject button, or oneof the following buttons on the unit: CD,AM/FM.

Muting the microphoneDuring a call, it is possible to mute themicrophone. Whilst muted, confirmationwill appear in the display.

SD navigation unitsPress the mute button (symbol of amicrophone with a line through it). Pressthe button once again to turn this functionoff.

CD navigation unitsPress the microphone mute button. Pressthe button once again to turn this functionoff.

Changing the active phoneNote: Phones must be bonded to thesystem before they can be made active.Note: After bonding a phone to the system,this becomes the active phone.1. Press the PHONE button on the unit.2. Using the BT SETTINGS option in the

menu, select the active phone from thelist.

298

Telephone

Debonding a bonded phoneA bonded phone can be deleted from thesystem at any time, unless a phone call isin progress.1. Press the PHONE button on the unit.2. Select the BT SETTINGS option in the

menu.3. Select the DEBOND option in the

menu.4. Select the phone from the list.

299

Telephone



Voice recognition enables operation of thesystem without the need to divert yourattention from the road ahead in order tochange settings, or receive feedback fromthe system.Whenever you issue one of the definedcommands with the system active, thevoice recognition system converts yourcommand into a control signal for thesystem. Your inputs take the form ofdialogues or commands. You are guidedthrough these dialogues byannouncements or questions.Please familiarise yourself with thefunctions of the system before using voicerecognition.

Supported commandsThe voice control system allows you tocontrol the following vehicle functions:• Bluetooth phone• radio• CD Player/CD Changer• external device (USB)• external device (iPod)• automatic climate control• navigation system - refer to separate

navigation handbook).

System responseAs you work through a voice session thesystem will prompt you with a beep toneeach time the system is ready to proceed.

Do not try to give any commands until thebeep tone has been heard. The voicecontrol system will repeat each spokencommand back to you.If you are not sure how to continue say"HELP" for assistance or "CANCEL" if youdo not wish to continue.The "HELP" function provides only asubset of the available voice commands.Detailed explanations of all possible voicecommands can be found on the followingpages.

Voice commandsAll voice commands should be given usinga natural speaking voice, as if speaking toa passenger or on the phone. Your voicelevel should be dependant on thesurrounding noise level inside or outsidethe vehicle but do not shout.

USING VOICE CONTROLSystem operationThe order and content of the voice controlsare given in the following lists. The tablesshow the sequence of user voicecommands and system responses for eachavailable function.<> indicates a number or stored name tagto be inserted by the user.

Short cutsThere are a number of voice commandshort cuts available, which allow you tocontrol some vehicle features withouthaving to follow the complete commandmenu. These are:• phone: "MOBILE NAME", "DIAL

NUMBER", "DIAL NAME", and "REDIAL"• CD player/CD changer: "DISC" and

"TRACK"

300

Voice control

• automatic climate control:"TEMPERATURE", "AUTO MODE","DEFROSTING/DEMISTING ON" and"DEFROSTING/DEMISTING OFF"

• radio: "TUNE NAME"• external device (USB): "TRACK"• external device (iPod): "TRACK"• SD card: "TRACK".

Start communicating with the systemBefore you can start talking to the systemyou first have to press the VOICE or MODEbutton for each operation and wait untilthe system answers with a beep. See(page 300).Press the button again to cancel the voicesession.

Name tagThe name tag functionality can supportthe phone, audio and navigation featuresby using the "STORE NAME" function. Youcan assign name tags to items such asfavourite radio stations and personalphone contacts. See Audio unitcommands (page 301). See Telephonecommands (page 310). See Navigationsystem commands (page 315).• Store up to 20 name tags per function.• The average recording time for each

name tag is approximately 2-3seconds.

AUDIO UNIT COMMANDSCD PlayerYou can control playback directly by voicecontrol.

OverviewThe overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.

"CD PLAYER"

"HELP"

"PLAY"

"TRACK"*

"SHUFFLE ALL"

"SHUFFLE FOLDER"**

"SHUFFLE OFF"

"REPEAT FOLDER"**

"REPEAT TRACK"

301

Voice control

"CD PLAYER"

"REPEAT OFF"

* Can be used as a shortcut.** Only available if the CD contains audio data files like MP3 or WMA.

TrackYou can choose a track on your CD directly.

System answerUser saysSteps

"CD PLAYER""CD PLAYER"1

"TRACK NUMBER PLEASE""TRACK"*2

"TRACK <number>""<a number between 1 and 99>"**3

* Can be used as a shortcut.** Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to four single digits (for example "2", "4","5" for track 245)

Shuffle allTo set random playback.


"CD PLAYER""CD PLAYER"1

"SHUFFLE ALL"2

CD ChangerOverviewThe overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.

"CD CHANGER"

"HELP"

302

Voice control

"CD CHANGER"

"PLAY"

"DISC"*

"TRACK"*

"SHUFFLE ALL"

"SHUFFLE CD"

"SHUFFLE FOLDER"**

"SHUFFLE OFF"

"REPEAT CD"

"REPEAT FOLDER"**

"REPEAT TRACK"

"REPEAT OFF"

* Can be used as a shortcut.** Only available if the CD contains audio data files like MP3 or WMA.

DiscIf you have a CD changer you can choosethe disc number.


"CD CHANGER""CD CHANGER"1

"DISC NUMBER PLEASE""DISC"*2

"DISC <number>""<a number between 1 and 6>"3

* Can be used as a shortcut.

TrackYou can choose a track on your CD directly.

303

Voice control





* Can be used as a shortcut.** Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to four single digits (for example "2", "4","5" for track 245)

Shuffle CDTo set random playback within the CDcontents.



"SHUFFLE CD"2

RadioThe radio voice commands support thefunctionality of the radio and allow you totune radio stations by voice control.

OverviewThe overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu.

"RADIO"

"HELP"

"AM"

"FM"

"TUNE NAME"*

"DELETE NAME"

"DELETE DIRECTORY"

"PLAY DIRECTORY"

"STORE NAME"

304

Voice control

"RADIO"

"PLAY"


Tune frequencyThis function allows you to tune your radioby voice commands.


"RADIO""RADIO"1

"AM FREQUENCY PLEASE""AM"2

"FM FREQUENCY PLEASE""FM"

"TUNE <frequency>""<frequency>"*3

* The frequency may be entered in a variety of ways. Refer below for representativeexamples.

FM band: 87.5 - 108.0 in increments of 0.1• "Eighty nine point nine" (89.9)• "Ninety" (90.0)• "One hundred point five" (100.5)• "One zero one point one" (101.1)• "One zero eight" (108.0)AM/MW band: 531 - 1602 in increments of9AM/LW band: 153 - 281 in increments of 1

• "Five thirty one" (531)• "Nine hundred" (900)• "Fourteen forty" (1440)• "Fifteen zero three" (1503)• "Ten eighty" (1080)

Store nameIf you have tuned a radio station, you canstore it with a name in the directory.


"RADIO""RADIO"1

"STORE NAME""STORE NAME"2"NAME PLEASE"

"REPEAT NAME PLEASE""<name>"3

"STORING NAME""<name>"4"<name> STORED"

305

Voice control

Tune name This function allows you to call up a storedradio station.


"RADIO""RADIO"1

"NAME PLEASE""TUNE NAME"*2

"TUNE <name>""<name>"3


Delete nameThis function allows you to delete a storedradio station.


"RADIO""RADIO"1

"NAME PLEASE""DELETE NAME"2

"DELETE <name>""<name>"3"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"DELETED""YES"4

"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"

Play directoryThis function allows you to let the systemtell you all of the stored radio stations.


"RADIO""RADIO"1

"PLAY <DIRECTORY>""PLAY DIRECTORY"2

Delete directoryThis function allows you to delete allstored radio stations at once.

306

Voice control


"RADIO""RADIO"1

"DELETE DIRECTORY""DELETE DIRECTORY"2"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"RADIO DIRECTORY DELETED""YES"3


PlayThis function switches the audio source tothe radio mode.


"RADIO""RADIO"1

"PLAY"2

Auxiliary inputThis function allows you to switch theaudio source to the attached auxiliary inputdevice.


"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNAL DEVICE"1

"LINE IN""LINE IN"2

External devices - USBThese voice commands support thefunctionality of an external USB devicewhich may be connected to the audio unit.


"EXTERNAL DEVICE", "USB"

"HELP"

307

Voice control

"EXTERNAL DEVICE", "USB"

"PLAY"

"TRACK"*

"PLAYLIST"**

"FOLDER"**

"SHUFFLE ALL"

"SHUFFLE FOLDER"

"SHUFFLE PLAYLIST"

"SHUFFLE OFF"

"REPEAT TRACK"

"REPEAT FOLDER"

"REPEAT OFF"

* Can be used as a shortcut.** Playlists and folders activated by voice control must be assigned special filenames.See General Information (page 318).

USB playThis function allows you to switch theaudio source to the attached USB device.



"USB""USB"2

"PLAY"3

USB TrackYou can choose a track on your USB devicedirectly.

308

Voice control



"USB""USB"2

"TRACK NUMBER PLEASE""TRACK"3

"TRACK <number>""<a number between 1 and 99>"*4

* Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to four single digits (for example "2", "4","5" for track 245)

External devices - iPodThese voice commands support thefunctionality of an iPod which may beconnected to the audio unit.


"EXTERNAL DEVICE", "IPOD"

"HELP"

"PLAY"

"TRACK"*

"PLAYLIST"**

"SHUFFLE ALL"

"SHUFFLE PLAYLIST"

"SHUFFLE OFF"

"REPEAT TRACK"

"REPEAT OFF"

* Can be used as a shortcut.** Playlists activated by voice control must be assigned special filenames. See GeneralInformation (page 318).

309

Voice control

iPod Track You can choose a track off the all titles listof your iPod directly.



"IPOD""IPOD"2



* Can be used as a shortcut.** Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to five single digits (for example "5", "2","4", "5", "3" for track 52453), to a limit of 65535.

iPod playlistYou can choose a playlist from your iPoddirectly.



"IPOD""IPOD"2

"PLAYLIST NUMBER PLEASE""PLAYLIST"*3

"PLAYLIST <number>""<a number between 1 and 10>"4

* Playlists activated by voice control must be assigned special filenames. See GeneralInformation (page 318).

TELEPHONE COMMANDSPhoneYour phone system allows you to createan additional phonebook. The storedentries can be dialled by voice control.Phone numbers stored by using voicecontrol are stored on the vehicle systemand not in your phone.


310

Voice control

"PHONE"

"HELP"

"MOBILE NAME"*

"DIAL NUMBER"*

"DIAL NAME"*

"DELETE NAME"

"DELETE DIRECTORY"

"PLAY DIRECTORY"

"STORE NAME"

"REDIAL"*

"ACCEPT CALLS"

"REJECT CALLS"


Phone functionsDial numberPhone numbers can be dialled after givingthe name tag voice command.


"PHONE""PHONE"1

"NUMBER PLEASE""DIAL NUMBER"*2

"<phone number>"<phone number>"3CONTINUE?"

"DIALLING""DIAL"4

"<repeat last part of number>"CORRECTION"CONTINUE?"


311

Voice control

Dial name Phone numbers can be dialled after givingthe name tag voice command.


"PHONE""PHONE"1

"NAME PLEASE""DIAL NAME"*2

"DIAL <name>""<name>"3"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"DIALLING""YES"4



RedialThis function allows you to redial the lastdialled phone number.


"PHONE""PHONE"1

"REDIAL""REDIAL"*2"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"DIALLING""YES"3



Mobile nameThis function allows you to access phonenumbers stored with a name tag in yourmobile phone.


"PHONE""PHONE"1

"MOBILE NAME" "<phonedependent dialogue>""MOBILE NAME"*2


312

Voice control

DTMF (Tone dialling)This function transfers spoken numbersinto DTMF tones. For example, to make aremote enquiry to your home answeringmachine or to enter a PIN number etc.

Note: DTMF can only be used during anongoing call. Operate the VOICE button andwait for the system prompt.Can only be used with vehicles installed witha dedicated VOICE button.


"NUMBER PLEASE"1

"<numbers 1 to 9, zero, hash, star>"2

Create a phonebookStore nameNew entries can be stored with the"STORE NAME" command. This featurecan be used to dial a number by calling upthe name instead of the full phone number.


"PHONE""PHONE"1

"STORE NAME""STORE NAME"2"NAME PLEASE"

"REPEAT NAME PLEASE""<name>"3

"STORING NAME""<name>"4"<name> STORED""NUMBER PLEASE"

"<phone number>""<phone number>"5

"STORING NUMBER""STORE"6"<phone number>""NUMBER STORED"

Delete nameStored names can also be deleted fromthe directory.

313

Voice control


"PHONE""PHONE"1

"NAME PLEASE""DELETE NAME"2

"DELETE <name>""<name>"3"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"<name> DELETED""YES"4


Play directoryUse this function to let the system tell youall stored entries.


"PHONE""PHONE"1

"PLAY DIRECTORY""PLAY DIRECTORY"2

Delete directoryThis function allows you to delete allentries in one go.


"PHONE""PHONE"1

"DELETE DIRECTORY""DELETE DIRECTORY"2"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"DIRECTORY DELETED""YES"3


Main settingsReject callsCalls can be set to be automaticallyrejected using voice control.

314

Voice control


"PHONE""PHONE"1

"REJECT CALLS""REJECT CALLS"2

"ACCEPT CALLS""ACCEPT CALLS"*

* use this command to turn the reject mode off

NAVIGATION SYSTEMCOMMANDSPlease refer to your separate Navigationmanual for details of the command menus.

CLIMATE CONTROLCOMMANDSClimateThe climate voice commands supports thefunctionality of the fan speed, temperatureand mode settings. Not all functions areavailable on all vehicles.


"CLIMATE"

"HELP"

"FAN"*

"DEFROSTING/DEMISTING ON"*

"DEFROSTING/DEMISTING OFF"*

"TEMPERATURE"*

"AUTO MODE"*

* Can be used as a shortcut. On vehicles fitted with an English language module the "FAN"shortcut is not available.

315

Voice control

Fan This function allows you to adjust the fanspeed.


"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1

"FAN SPEED PLEASE""‘FAN"*2

"FAN MINIMUM""MINIMUM"

3 "FAN <number>""<a number between 1 and 7>"

"FAN MAXIMUM""MAXIMUM"

* Can be used as a shortcut. On vehicles fitted with an English language module the "FAN"shortcut is not available.

Defrosting/Demisting


"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1

"DEFROSTING ON/DEMISTING ON""DEFROSTING ON/DEMISTING

ON"*

2"DEFROSTING OFF/DEMISTING

OFF""DEFROSTING OFF/DEMISTING

OFF"*


TemperatureThis function allows you to adjust thetemperature.


"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1

"TEMPERATURE PLEASE""TEMPERATURE"*2

"TEMPERATURE MINIMUM""MINIMUM"

3"TEMPERATURE <number>"

"<a number between 15 and 29 °Cwith 0.5 increments>" or "<a

number between 59 and 84 °F>"

316

Voice control


"TEMPERATURE MAXIMUM""MAXIMUM"


Auto mode


"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1

"AUTO MODE""AUTO MODE"*2

* Can be used as a shortcut. Can be deactivated by selecting a different temperature orfan speed.

317

Voice control

GENERAL INFORMATION

CAUTIONSTake care when handling externaldevices with exposed electricalconnectors (such as the USB plug).

Always replace the protective cap/shieldwhen possible. There may be a risk ofelectrostatic discharge causing damageto the device.

Do not touch or handle the USBsocket in the vehicle. Cover the socketwhen not in use.Only use USB Mass-Storage devicecompliant devices.Always switch your audio unit to adifferent source (for example theradio) before unplugging the USB

device.Do not install or connect USB hubs orsplitters.

Note: The system is only designed torecognize and read suitable audio files froma USB device that conforms to the USBMass-Storage device class or an iPod. Notall available USB devices can be guaranteedto function with the system.Note: It is possible to connect compatibledevices with a trailing USB lead as well asthose that plug into the vehicle USB socketdirectly (for example USB memory sticksand pen drives).Note: Some USB devices with a higherpower consumption may not be compatible(for example some larger hard drives).Note: Access time to read the files on theexternal device will vary depending uponfactors such as the file structure, size anddevice content.

The system supports a range of externaldevices, to fully integrate with your audiounit via the USB and auxiliary inputsockets. Once connected, control of theexternal device is possible via the audiounit.A list of typical compatible devices areshown below:• USB memory sticks• USB portable hard drives• Some MP3 players with USB

connection• iPod media players (refer to

www.ford-mobile-connectivity.com for latestcompatibility list).

The system is USB 2.0 full speedcompatible, USB 1.1 host compliant andsupports FAT 16/32 file systems.

Information on audio filestructures for external devicesUSBCreate only a single partition on the USBdevice.If playlists are created, they must containcorrect file paths referenced to the USBdevice. It is recommended to create theplaylist after the audio files have beentransferred to the USB device.Playlists must be created in .m3u format.Audio files must be in .mp3 format.Do not exceed the following limits:• 1000 items per folder (files, folders and

playlists)• 5000 folders per USB device (including

playlists)• 8 subfolder levels.

318

Connectivity

To enable voice control for customplaylists and folders, follow the procedurebelow:• Create folders named with the

structure "Ford<*>" where <*> is anumber 1-10. For example "Ford3"without an extension.

• Create playlists named with thestructure "Ford<*>.m3u" where <*>is a number 1-10. For example"Ford5.m3u" without any spacebetween "Ford" and the number.

Thereafter, custom folders and playlistswill be selectable with voice control. SeeAudio unit commands (page 301).

iPodTo enable voice control for customplaylists, create playlists named with thestructure "Ford<*>" where <*> is anumber 1-10. For example "Ford7" withoutany space between "Ford" and thenumber.Thereafter, playlists will be selectable withvoice control. See Audio unit commands(page 301).

CONNECTING AN EXTERNALDEVICE

WARNINGMake sure the external device issecurely mounted within the vehicle,and that trailing connections do not

obstruct any of the driving controls.

External devices may be connected usingthe auxiliary input socket and the USB port.See Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket(page 144). See USB port (page 144).

ConnectionPlug in the device, and if necessary secureit to prevent movement within the vehicle.

Connecting an iPodFor optimum convenience and audioquality, we recommend that you purchasea dedicated single connection leadavailable from your dealer.Alternatively, it is possible to connect youriPod using the standard iPod USB cableand a separate 3.5mm audio jack lead. Ifusing this method preset the iPod volumeto maximum and turn off any equalizersettings before making the connections:• Connect the headphone output of the

iPod to the AUX IN socket.• Connect the USB cable from the iPod

to the vehicle USB socket.

CONNECTING AN EXTERNALDEVICE - VEHICLES WITH:BLUETOOTHConnecting a Bluetooth audiodevice

CAUTIONAs various standards exist,manufacturers are able to implementa variety of profiles in their Bluetooth

devices. Because of this, an incompatibilitycan occur between the Bluetooth deviceand the system, which in some cases maylimit system functionality. To avoid thissituation, only recommended devicesshould be used.

Please visit the websitewww.ford-mobile-connectivity.comfor full details.

319

Connectivity

Bonding the deviceNote: Some audio and navigation unitshave a separate Bluetooth audio menu. Usethis to access setup and control.To connect the device to the system followthe same procedure as for Bluetooth handsfree phones. See Bluetooth setup (page293).

Operating the deviceSelect Bluetooth audio as the activesource.Tracks can be accessed by skippingforwards and backwards using the steeringwheel controls, or directly from the audiounit controls.

USING A USB DEVICEVarious icons are used to identify types ofaudio file, folders etc.

E100029

USB device is the active source

E100022

Folder

E100023

Playlist

E100024

Album

E100025

Artist

E100026

Filename

E100027

Track title

E100028

Information not available

Sony radioOperationSelect the USB device as the audio sourceby repeatedly pressing the CD/AUXbutton until USB appears in the display.After first connecting the USB device, thefirst track within the first folder will startto play automatically. Subsequently,following audio source switching, theposition of playback on the USB device isremembered.To browse the device contents, press theup/down arrow key or the OK button once.The display will show the trackinformation, together with other importantinformation described below:• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of

the display shows the current positionof the folder view.

• ">" after an entry indicates a furtherlevel down is readable (for example afolder named after an album, withindividual album tracks within thatfolder).

• "<" before the list indicates that afurther level up is readable.

• Icons to the left of track/folder textindicate the type of file/folder. Referto the list for an explanation of theseicons.

To navigate the USB device contents, usethe up/down arrow keys to scroll throughlists, and the left/right keys to move up ordown within the folder hierarchy. Once yourdesired track, playlist or folder ishighlighted, press the OK button to selectplayback.Note: If you wish to jump to the top levelof the USB device contents, press and holdthe left arrow key.

320

Connectivity

Audio controlPress the left and right arrow keys to skipbackwards and forwards through tracks.Press and hold the left/right arrow keys toenable fast rewind/fast forward throughtrack content.Press the up/down arrow key or the OKbutton to browse the device contents.Press the MENU key to enter the USBmenu. It is possible to enable shuffle andrepeat functions here with respect tofolders and playlists.Press the SCAN button to scan the wholedevice, current folder or a playlist if it is inoperation.Press the INFO button to display thefollowing:• filename• title• artist• album• track number and playing time.Repeated button presses will scrollthrough these displays.

CD Navigation unitsOperationSelect the USB device as the audio sourceby pressing the CD/AUX button untilDEVICES appears in the display. SelectDEVICES and then select USB from theavailable device list. After first connectingthe USB device, the first track within thefirst folder will start to play automatically.Subsequently, following audio sourceswitching, the position of playback on theUSB device is remembered.To browse the device contents, press theSELECT button once.

The display will show the trackinformation, together with other importantinformation described below:• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of



• "<" to the left hand side of the displayindicates that a further level up isreadable.


To navigate the USB device contents, usethe rotary scroll/select button to browsethrough lists. Push the button to expandthe contents within the highlighted playlistor folder, or to commence playback of aparticular track. Press ESC to go up onelevel.

Audio controlPress the SEEK up and down keys to skipbackwards and forwards through tracks.Press and hold the SEEK keys to enablefast rewind/fast forward through trackcontent.Rotate or press the SELECT button tobrowse the device contents.Press SHUFFLE or REPEAT buttons toenable shuffle and repeat functions withrespect to folders and playlists. Differentoptions may appear depending uponwhether or not a playlist is in operation.Press the SCAN button to scan the currentplaylist if it is in operation, or the completeUSB device or folder.

321

Connectivity

Press the INFO button to display thefollowing:• filename• title• artist• album• track number and playing time.

SD Navigation unitsOperationSelect the USB device as the audio sourceby pressing the CD/AUX button until theUSB button appears to the left of thedisplay. Select USB from the availabledevice list.Note: Some devices may be shown but notselectable, depending if the device isconnected or not.After first connecting the USB device, thefirst track within the first folder will startto play automatically. Subsequently,following audio source switching, theposition of playback on the USB device isremembered.To browse the device contents, press thescroll up or down arrow button.The display will show the trackinformation, together with other importantinformation described below:• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of



• "<" to the left hand side of the displayindicates that a further level up isreadable.


To navigate the USB device contents, usethe scroll buttons to browse through lists.Push the button to expand the contentswithin the highlighted playlist or folder, orto commence playback of a particulartrack. Press the left arrow key to go up onelevel.

Audio controlPress the SEEK up and down keys to skipbackwards and forwards through tracks.Press and hold the SEEK keys to enablefast rewind/fast forward through trackcontent.Press the scroll bar arrow keys to browsethe device contents.Press SHUFFLE or REPEAT buttons toenable shuffle and repeat functions withrespect to folders and playlists.Press the SCAN button to scan the currentplaylist if it is in operation, or the completeUSB device or folder.Press the INFO button to display thefollowing:• filename• title• artist• album• track number and playing time.

USING AN IPODVarious icons are used to identify types ofaudio file, folders etc.

322

Connectivity

E100030

iPod is the active source

E100031

iPod playlist

E100032

iPod artist

E100033

iPod album

E100034

iPod genre

E100035

iPod song

E100036

iPod generic category

E100037

iPod generic media file

Sony radioOperationConnect the iPod. See Connecting anexternal device (page 319).Select the iPod as the audio source byrepeatedly pressing the CD/AUX buttonuntil iPod appears in the display.The iPod menu list for browsing contentswill be available through the radio display.Navigation of the contents follows thesame principles as for iPod standalone use(for example search by artist, title, etc.).To browse the iPod contents, press theup/down arrow key or the OK button once.

The display will show the trackinformation, together with other importantinformation described below:• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of

the display shows the current positionof the list view.

• ">" after an entry indicates a furtherlevel down is readable (for example allalbums by a particular artist).


• An icon on the left side indicates thetype of the currently displayed list (forexample list of albums). Refer to thelist for an explanation of these icons.

To navigate the iPod contents, use theup/down arrow keys to scroll through lists,and the left/right keys to move up or downwithin the hierarchy. Once your desiredtrack, playlist, album, artist or genre ishighlighted, press the OK button to selectplayback.Note: If you wish to jump to the top levelof the iPod contents, press and hold the leftarrow key.

Audio controlPress the left and right arrow keys to skipbackwards and forwards through tracks.Press and hold the left/right arrow keys toenable fast rewind/fast forward throughtrack content.Press the up/down arrow key or the OKbutton to browse the iPod contents.Press the MENU key to enter the iPodmenu. It is possible to enable shuffle andrepeat functions here. It is also possible toenable the iPod "Shuffle songs" optiondirectly from the top level.Press the SCAN button to scan thecurrently selected tracks.

323

Connectivity

Press the INFO button to display thefollowing:• title• artist• track number and playing time.Repeated button presses will scrollthrough these displays.

CD Navigation unitsOperationConnect the iPod. See Connecting anexternal device (page 319).Select the iPod as the audio source bypressing the CD/AUX button untilDEVICES appears in the display. SelectDEVICES and then select iPod from theavailable device list.The iPod menu list for browsing contentswill be available through the display.Navigation of the contents follows thesame principles as for iPod standalone use(for example search by artist, title, etc.).To browse the iPod contents, press theSELECT button once.The display will show the trackinformation, together with other importantinformation described below:• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of





To navigate the iPod contents, use therotary scroll/select button to browsethrough lists. Push the button to expandthe contents within the highlighted playlist,album, artist, genre or to commenceplayback of a particular track. Press ESCto go up one level.

Audio controlPress the SEEK up and down keys to skipbackwards and forwards through tracks.Press and hold the SEEK keys to enablefast rewind/fast forward through trackcontent.Rotate or press the SELECT button tobrowse the iPod contents.Press the MENU key to enter the iPodmenu. It is possible to enable shuffle andrepeat functions here. It is also possible toenable the iPod "Shuffle songs" optiondirectly from the top level.Press the SCAN button to scan thecurrently selected tracks.Press the INFO button to display thefollowing:• title• artist• track number and playing time.

SD Navigation unitsOperationConnect the iPod. See Connecting anexternal device (page 319).Select the iPod as the audio source bypressing the CD/AUX button until the iPodbutton appears to the left of the display.Select iPod from the available device list.Note: Some devices may be shown but notselectable, depending if the device isconnected or not.

324

Connectivity

The iPod menu list for browsing contentswill be available through the display.Navigation of the contents follows thesame principles as for iPod standalone use(for example search by artist, title, etc.).To browse the iPod contents, press thescroll up or down arrow button.The display will show the trackinformation, together with other importantinformation described below:• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of





To navigate the iPod contents, use thescroll buttons to browse through lists. Pushthe button to expand the contents withinthe highlighted playlist, album, artist, genreor to commence playback of a particulartrack. Press the left arrow key to go up onelevel.

Audio controlPress the SEEK up and down keys to skipbackwards and forwards through tracks.Press and hold the SEEK keys to enablefast rewind/fast forward through trackcontent.Press the scroll bar arrow keys to browsethe iPod contents.Press the MENU key to enter the iPodmenu. It is possible to enable shuffle andrepeat functions here. It is also possible toenable the iPod "Shuffle songs" optiondirectly from the top level.

Press the SCAN button to scan thecurrently selected tracks.Press the INFO button to display thefollowing:• title• artist• track number and playing time.

325

Connectivity

ROAD SAFETY

WARNINGSThe system provides you withinformation designed to help youreach your destination quickly and

safely.For reasons of safety, the drivershould only program the systemwhen the vehicle is stationary.The system provides no assistancewith respect to stop signs, trafficlights, areas under construction or

other important safety information.Do not use the system until you havefamiliarised yourself with itsoperation.Only view the system display whendriving conditions permit.

Safety informationRead and follow all stated safetyprecautions. Failure to do so may increaseyour risk of collision and personal injury.Ford Motor Company shall not be liablefor any damages of any type arising fromfailure to follow these guidelines.If detailed viewing of route instructions isnecessary, pull off the road when it is safeto do so and park your vehicle.Do not use the navigation system to locateemergency services.To use the system as effectively and safelyas possible, always use the latestnavigation information. Your dealer will beable to assist with this.

326

Navigation introduction

GETTING STARTED


Note: You will be charged when sendingand receiving text messages.Note: Refer to your phone handbook for allphone functions and operation.Note: Keep the activation code (printed onthe installation guide) in a safe place.Note: Retain the activation text messagein your mobile phone inbox.

Compatibility of phonesCAUTION

As no common agreement exists,mobile phone manufacturers are ableto implement a variety of profiles in

their Bluetooth devices. Because of this,an incompatibility can occur between thephone and hands-free system, which insome cases may significantly degrade thesystem performance. To avoid thissituation, only recommended phonesshould be used.

Please visit the websitewww.ford-mobile-connectivity.com forfull details.

Installing the micro SD card

1

2

E114212

1. Remove the micro SD card from theadaptor.

2. Insert the micro SD card into the mobilephone.

Activating the mobile phonenavigation systemNote: The radio must be switched on beforeconnecting the mobile phone to the in-carGPS receiver.Note: The Ford Mobile Navigation must beinstalled and activated on your mobilephone.Note: It is possible to activate up to amaximum of three phones.Note: Detailed instructions are availableon the micro SD card and atwww.ford-mobile-connectivity.com.To connect the device to the system followthe same procedure as for Bluetooth handsfree phones. See Bluetooth setup (page293).1. Switch the radio on.

327

Navigation system

E114213

2. Switch your mobile phone on and startthe "Ford Mobile Navigation".

3. Choose "Select Destination".4. Choose "Enter Address".5. Change route options if necessary and

start the route guidance.6. The vehicle display will show the turn

information. Voice instructions areheard via the vehicle speakers.

Note: Your mobile phone will display yourcurrent position.7. You are able to exit the application and

continue your route guidance afterrestarting the application.

328

Navigation system

TYPE APPROVALSFCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICEThis device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.FCC ID: WJLRX-42IC: 7847A-RX42Changes or modifications to your devicenot expressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance can void theuser's authority to operate the equipment.

RX-42 - declaration of conformityWe, the party responsible for compliance,declare under our sole responsibility thatthe Handset Integration product RX-42 isin conformity with the provisions of thefollowing Council Directive: 1999/5/EC. Acopy of the Declaration of Conformity canbe found at:

www.novero.com/declaration_of_conformityThe Bluetooth word mark and logos areowned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and anyuse of such marks by Ford Motor Companyis under license. Other trademarks andtrade names are those of their respectiveowners.

TYPE APPROVALSiPod is a trademark of Apple Inc.

TYPE APPROVALS

E114214

© 2008 NAVTEQ B.V. All rights reserved.

329

Appendices

E114220

TYPE APPROVALSEU DeclarationHereby, Valeo declares that this shortrange device is in compliance with theessential requirements and other relevantprovisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

Certificate for United ArabEmirates

E125209

330

Appendices

ELECTROMAGNETICCOMPATIBILITY

WARNINGSYour vehicle has been tested andcertified to legislations relating toelectromagnetic compatibility

(72/245/EEC, UN ECE Regulation 10 orother applicable local requirements). It isyour responsibility to ensure that anyequipment you have fitted complies withapplicable local legislations. Have anyequipment fitted by properly trainedtechnicians.

WARNINGSThe RF (radio frequency) transmitterequipment (e.g. cellular telephones,amateur radio transmitters etc.) may

only be fitted to your vehicle if they complywith the parameters shown in the tablebelow. There are no special provisions orconditions for installations or use.

Do not mount any transceiver,microphones, speakers, or any otheritem in the deployment path of the

airbag system.Do not fasten antenna cables tooriginal vehicle wiring, fuel pipes andbrake pipes.Keep antenna and power cables atleast 10 centimetres (4 inches) fromany electronic modules and airbags.

E85998

1 2 3 4

Antenna PositionsMaximum output power Watt (PeakRMS)

Frequency BandMHz

3, 450 W1 – 30

1, 2, 350 W30 – 54

1, 2, 350 W68 – 87.5

331

Appendices

Antenna PositionsMaximum output power Watt (PeakRMS)

Frequency BandMHz

1, 2, 350 W142 – 176

1, 2, 350 W380 – 512

1, 2, 310 W806 – 940

1, 2, 310 W1200 – 1400

1, 2, 310 W1710 – 1885

1, 2, 310 W1885 – 2025

Note: After the installation of RFtransmitters, check for disturbances fromand to all electrical equipment in thevehicle, both in the standby and transmitmodes.Check all electrical equipment:• with the ignition ON• with the engine running• during a road test at various speeds.Check that electromagnetic fieldsgenerated inside the vehicle cabin by thetransmitter installed do not exceedapplicable human exposure requirements.

332

Appendices

AA/C

See: Climate Control...........................................112About This Manual...........................................7ABS

See: Brakes...........................................................166ABS driving hints

See: Hints on Driving With Anti-LockBrakes................................................................166

ACCSee: Adaptive cruise control (ACC).............182

AccessoriesSee: Parts and Accessories.................................7See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control.............183

Active suspension.........................................174Principle of Operation.......................................174

Active suspensionSee: Using active suspension.........................174

Adaptive cruise control (ACC).................182Principle of Operation.......................................182

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control.............183

Adaptive Headlamps...................................60Cornering lamps....................................................61

Adjusting the Headlamps - VehiclesWith: Adaptive Front Lighting/XenonHeadlamps....................................................59

Adjusting the Steering Wheel...................49Adjusting the windscreen washer

jets.....................................................................52AFS

See: Adaptive Headlamps...............................60Air Conditioning

See: Climate Control...........................................112Air Vents............................................................112

Front air vents.......................................................112Second row air vents..........................................113Third row air vents...............................................113

Alarm..................................................................46Principle of Operation........................................46

Alternative frequencies.............................284All except Sony and Sony DAB....................284Sony and Sony DAB..........................................284

Appendices....................................................329Arming the alarm...........................................48Arming the engine immobiliser................45

Ashtray.............................................................138Front ashtray........................................................138Rear ashtray..........................................................138

At a Glance........................................................10Adjusting the steering wheel............................14Autolamps...............................................................15Automatic climate control.................................17Automatic main beam control.........................15Automatic transmission.....................................19Autowipers...............................................................14Blind spot information system (BLIS)..........16Changing the wiper blades ...............................14Diesel particulate filter (DPF)..........................18Direction indicators...............................................15Driver alert................................................................21Electric child safety locks...................................13Electric folding mirrors........................................16Electric parking brake (EPB) ............................19Electric windows...................................................15Engine idle speed after starting.......................17Fuel filler flap..........................................................18Information displays............................................16Instrument panel overview - left-hand

drive.......................................................................10Instrument panel overview - right-hand

drive........................................................................11Keyless entry...........................................................13Keyless starting......................................................17Lane departure warning.....................................21Manual climate control.......................................17Manual transmission...........................................19Rear view camera................................................20Reverse mirror dipping........................................16Speed limiter.........................................................20Towing the vehicle on four wheels..................21

Audible Warnings and Indicators.............88Switching the chimes on and off...................88

Audio Control..................................................49Mode.........................................................................49Seek..........................................................................50

Audio distortion reduction (CLIP).........283All except Sony and Sony DAB.....................283Sony and Sony DAB..........................................283

Audio introduction........................................271Audio menu control.....................................277

Sony CD and Sony CD DAB withBluetooth.........................................................279

Audio system security................................275

333

Index

Audio troubleshooting...............................292Audio unit clock and date displays.......276Audio unit commands................................301

Auxiliary input.....................................................307CD Changer..........................................................302CD Player...............................................................301External devices - iPod...................................309External devices - USB....................................307Radio......................................................................304

Audio unit menus........................................283Audio unit operation....................................277Audio unit overview.....................................272Auto-Dimming Mirror....................................79Autolamps.........................................................57Automatic Climate Control........................115

Air distribution.......................................................117Blower.......................................................................117Mono mode............................................................117Rear air conditioning (triple-zone automatic

climate control)..............................................118Recirculated air.....................................................118Setting the temperature...................................116Switching the air conditioning on and

off.........................................................................118Switching the automatic climate control

on and off..........................................................118Windscreen defrosting and demisting.........117

Automatic Main Beam Control.................57Activating the system.........................................58Manually overriding the system.....................58Setting the system sensitivity.........................58

Automatic Transmission............................163Drive modes.........................................................164Emergency park position release

lever....................................................................164Hints on driving with an automatic

transmission....................................................164Selector lever positions....................................163

Automatic volume control.......................283All except Sony and Sony DAB.....................283Sony and Sony DAB..........................................283

Autostore control........................................2806000CD...............................................................280Sony CD................................................................280

Autowipers.........................................................51

Auxiliary Heater.............................................120Changing the remote control battery.........123Diesel auxiliary heater (depending on

country).............................................................125Feedback during starting and switching

off.........................................................................123Fuel operated heater (depending on

country).............................................................124Parking heater......................................................120Programming the transmitter........................124Remote start in combination with direct

start or timer....................................................123Remote starting...................................................122

Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket..............144Auxiliary Power Points................................138

Galaxy.....................................................................139S-Max......................................................................139

BBalance/fade control..................................277

All except Sony and Sony DAB .....................277Sony and Sony DAB...........................................277

Bass/treble control......................................277All except Sony and Sony DAB......................277Sony and Sony DAB...........................................277

Battery connection points........................252Blind Spot Monitor........................................80

Blind spot information system (BLIS).........80Detection errors....................................................82System detection and alerts............................81Turning the system on and off........................82Using the system...................................................81

Bluetooth setup...........................................293Handling of phones..........................................293Requirements for Bluetooth

connection......................................................293Bonnet Lock

See: Opening and Closing the Bonnet.......233Booster cables

See: Jump-Starting the Vehicle.....................251Booster Seats..................................................23

Booster cushion (Group 3)...............................24Booster seat (Group 2)......................................23

Brake and Clutch Fluid Check.................245Brakes...............................................................166

Principle of Operation......................................166

334

Index

Bulb changingSee: Changing a Bulb.........................................64

Bulb Specification Chart..............................73

CCapacities and Specifications................267

Technical Specifications.................................267Cargo Nets......................................................199

Luggage retention net - type 1.......................199Luggage retention net - type 2......................201

Car WashSee: Cleaning the Exterior..............................249

Catalytic Converter......................................156Driving with a catalytic converter.................156

CD changer.....................................................143Changing a Bulb.............................................64

Approach lamp.....................................................66Central high mounted brake lamp..................71Daytime running lamps.....................................66Front fog lamp and side lamp

(Galaxy)..............................................................68Front fog lamp and side lamp

(S-MAX)..............................................................67Headlamp...............................................................64Interior lamps..........................................................71Luggage compartment lamp and tailgate

lamp......................................................................73Number plate lamp...............................................71Reading lamps.......................................................72Rear lamp (Galaxy).............................................69Rear lamps (S-MAX)..........................................68Side repeater.........................................................66Vanity mirror lamp................................................72

Changing a Fuse............................................221Changing a Road Wheel...........................253

Installing a road wheel....................................255Jacking and lifting points................................253Locking wheel nuts...........................................253Removing a road wheel..................................254Vehicle jack..........................................................253

Changing the remote controlbattery.............................................................35Remote control with a folding key

blade....................................................................35Remote control without a folding key

blade....................................................................36Changing the Vehicle Battery..................252

Changing the Wiper Blades........................53Rear window wiper blades...............................54Windscreen wiper blades..................................53

Checking the Wiper Blades........................53Childminder Mirror.......................................143Child Safety......................................................22Child Safety Locks.........................................28

Electric child safety locks..................................28Manual child safety locks..................................28

Child Seat Positioning..................................24Child Seats........................................................22

Child restraints for different massgroups..................................................................22

Cigar Lighter...................................................138Cleaning the Exterior..................................249

Body paintwork preservation........................249Cleaning the chrome trim...............................249Cleaning the headlamps.................................249Cleaning the rear window..............................249

Cleaning the Interior...................................249Instrument cluster screens, LCD screens,

radio screens..................................................250Rear windows.....................................................250Seat belts.............................................................249

Climate Control..............................................112Principle of Operation........................................112

Climate control commands.....................315Climate...................................................................315

Clock..................................................................137Coded keys.......................................................45Cold Weather Precautions........................218Compact disc playback.............................287

6000CD................................................................287Compact disc changer playback.................287Sony and Sony CD DAB...................................287

Compact disc player..................................286Compact disc track compression.........288

All except Sony and Sony DAB....................288Sony and Sony DAB.........................................288

Compact disc track scanning.................2886000CD................................................................288Sony and Sony DAB.........................................288

Connecting an external device................319Connection............................................................319

Connecting an external device - VehiclesWith: Bluetooth..........................................319Connecting a Bluetooth audio device........319

335

Index

Connectivity....................................................318General Information..........................................318

Convenience features.................................136Coolant Check

See: Engine Coolant Check............................244Cruise Control................................................180

Principle of Operation......................................180Cruise control

See: Using Cruise Control...............................180Cup Holders....................................................139

Seat back trays....................................................139

DDaytime Running Lamps.............................57Diesel Particulate Filter..............................149

Regeneration........................................................150Digital signal processing (DSP).............283

Changing the DSP settings............................283DSP equaliser......................................................283DSP occupancy..................................................283

Direction Indicators.......................................62Disabling the passenger airbag................33

Disabling the passenger airbag.......................33Enabling the passenger airbag.......................34Fitting the passenger airbag deactivation

switch...................................................................33Disarming the alarm.....................................48

Vehicles with keyless entry..............................48Vehicles without keyless entry.......................48

Disarming the engine immobiliser...........45Dog Guard......................................................208

Installing the dog guard..................................208DPF

See: Diesel Particulate Filter..........................149Driver Alert......................................................190

Principle of Operation......................................190Driving Hints...................................................218Driving Through Water................................218

Driving through water .......................................218DRL

See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................57

EEco Mode.........................................................154

Principle of Operation.......................................154

Ejecting compact discs.............................2896000CD................................................................289Sony CD................................................................289

Electric exterior mirrors.................................77Electric folding mirrors.......................................78Mirror tilting positions..........................................77Reverse mirror dipping........................................78

Electric Parking Brake..................................167Applying the EPB................................................167Applying the EPB when the vehicle is

moving...............................................................168Automatic application of the EPB................167Cut in the power supply...................................169Parking on a hill...................................................167Preventing automatic application of the

EPB.....................................................................168Releasing the EPB..............................................168

Electromagnetic compatibility................331Ending compact disc playback..............290


Engine Block Heater....................................150Engine Coolant Check...............................244

Checking the coolant level.............................244Topping up...........................................................244

Engine immobiliser........................................45Principle of Operation........................................45

Engine Oil Check..........................................244Checking the oil level.......................................244Topping up...........................................................244

Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi(DV) Diesel/2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel/2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel.............................................................243

Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi(Sigma)........................................................243

Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L Duratec-HE(MI4)/2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4)..............243

Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi(MI4)..............................................................243

Entering a security code............................2756000CD, Sony and Sony DAB......................275

EPBSee: Electric Parking Brake..............................167

Exterior Mirrors.................................................77Manual folding mirrors........................................77

336

Index

FFastening the seat belts...............................31

Second row centre seat belt.............................31Fast forward/reverse..................................287

All except Sony and Sony DAB.....................287Sony and Sony DAB..........................................287

First Aid Kit......................................................219Floor Mats.......................................................144Fog Lamps - Front

See: Front Fog Lamps........................................59Fog Lamps - Rear

See: Rear Fog Lamps..........................................59Forward alert function................................187

Adjusting the warning sensitivity..................187Switching the system on and off..................187

Front Fog Lamps............................................59Front Seat Armrest......................................135Fuel and Refuelling......................................155

Technical Specifications..................................158Fuel Burning Heater

See: Auxiliary Heater.........................................120Fuel Consumption.......................................158Fuel Consumption

See: Technical Specifications........................158Fuel filler flap.................................................156

Refuelling with a fuel can................................158Fuel Quality - Diesel....................................155

Long-term storage.............................................156Fuel Quality - E85.........................................155

Long-term storage.............................................155Fuel Quality - Petrol.....................................155Fuse Box Locations.....................................220

Central fuse box.................................................220Engine compartment fuse box.....................220Rear fuse box......................................................220

Fuses................................................................220Fuse Specification Chart...........................222

Central fuse box.................................................226Engine compartment fuse box.....................222Rear fuse box.......................................................228

GGauges...............................................................83

Engine coolant temperature gauge..............84Fuel gauge..............................................................85

GearboxSee: Transmission..............................................163

General Information on RadioFrequencies...................................................35

Getting started..............................................327Activating the mobile phone navigation

system...............................................................327Compatibility of phones..................................327Installing the micro SD card...........................327

Glasses Holder...............................................142Global Opening and Closing.....................40

Global closing.........................................................41Global opening.....................................................40

Glove Box.........................................................139Cooled glove box................................................139

HHandbrake

See: Parking Brake.............................................166Hazard Warning Flashers............................62Headlamp adjustment

See: Adjusting the Headlamps - Vehicles With:Adaptive Front Lighting/XenonHeadlamps........................................................59

Headlamp Levelling......................................59Recommended headlamp levelling switch

positions.............................................................60Headlamp Washers.......................................53Head Restraints.............................................129

Adjusting the head restraint...........................129Removing the head restraint..........................129

Heated Seats..................................................134Raising and lowering the temperature

automatically..................................................134Raising and lowering the temperature

manually...........................................................134Heated Windows and Mirrors..................120

Heated exterior mirrors....................................120Heated windows.................................................120

HeatingSee: Climate Control...........................................112

Hill launch assist (HLA)See: Using hill start assist.................................171

Hill Start Assist...............................................171Principle of Operation........................................171

Hints on Driving With Anti-LockBrakes............................................................166

337

Index

HLASee: Hill Start Assist............................................171See: Using hill start assist.................................171

IIgnition Switch...............................................145Immobiliser

See: Engine immobiliser....................................45Important audio information....................271

Audio unit labels..................................................271Disc labels..............................................................271

Incorrect security code...............................275Information Displays....................................89

General Information...........................................89Information Messages................................102

Active suspension..............................................103Airbag......................................................................103Alarm.......................................................................103Automatic main beam control, Lane

departure warning and Driver alert........103Battery and charging system.........................104Blind spot monitor.............................................104Child power lock.................................................104Climate control...................................................105Cruise control and Adaptive cruise control

(ACC).................................................................105Doors open...........................................................105Electric parking brake (EPB).........................108Engine immobiliser............................................106Hill start assist.....................................................106Keyless system....................................................106Lighting...................................................................107Maintenance.........................................................107Message indicator..............................................102Message symbols...............................................102Occupant protection........................................108Parking brake.......................................................108Power steering....................................................108Stability control (ESP).....................................109Start-stop.............................................................109Transmission........................................................109Tyre pressure monitoring system.................109Viewing current messages..............................102Voice control...........................................................111

Instrument Cluster........................................83Instrument Lighting Dimmer....................137

Interior Lamps.................................................62Courtesy lamp.......................................................62LED interior lighting.............................................63Reading lamps......................................................62Vanity mirror lamps.............................................63

Introduction.........................................................7iPod connection

See: Connecting an external device............319See: Connecting an external device - Vehicles

With: Bluetooth..............................................319iPod

See: Using an iPod.............................................322ISOFIX Anchor Points....................................27

Attaching a child seat with top tethers........27Top tether anchor points...................................27

JJump starting

See: Jump-Starting the Vehicle.....................251Jump-Starting the Vehicle........................251

To connect the booster cables......................251To start the engine.............................................252

KKeyless Entry.....................................................41

Disabled keys.........................................................43General information.............................................41Locking and unlocking the doors with the

key blade............................................................44Locking the vehicle..............................................42Passive key..............................................................42Unlocking the vehicle..........................................43

Keyless Starting............................................145Failure to start.....................................................146Ignition on..............................................................146Starting a diesel engine...................................146Starting with automatic

transmission....................................................146Starting with manual transmission.............146Stopping the engine when the vehicle is

moving................................................................147Stopping the engine with the vehicle

stationary..........................................................147Keys and Remote Controls.........................35

338

Index

LLane Departure Warning...........................192

Principle of Operation.......................................192Lighting Control..............................................56

Headlamp flasher................................................56Home safe lighting...............................................57Lighting control positions.................................56Main and dipped beam......................................56Parking lamps........................................................56

Lighting..............................................................56Load Carriers

See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers.............202Load Carrying.................................................194

General Information..........................................194Loading compact discs.............................286

6000CD, Sony and Sony DAB.....................286Loading the compact disc

changer........................................................286Load Retaining Fixtures............................204

Installing the load bracket..............................207Installing the load retaining fixtures...........205Installing the luggage anchor points.........206

Locking and Unlocking.................................38Automatic relocking...........................................40Central locking......................................................38Double locking.......................................................38Double locking the doors with the key.........38Locking and unlocking confirmation............38Locking and unlocking the doors and the

luggage compartment lid with theremote control.................................................39

Locking and unlocking the doors frominside....................................................................39

Locking and unlocking the doors with thekey.........................................................................38

Luggage compartment lid................................40Reprogramming the unlocking

function..............................................................40Locks...................................................................38Lost security code........................................275Luggage Anchor Points..............................195

Galaxy.....................................................................195S-MAX....................................................................196

Luggage Covers............................................202

MMaintenance..................................................233

General Information..........................................233Technical Specifications.................................246

Manual Climate Control..............................113Air conditioning....................................................114Air distribution control.......................................113Blower......................................................................114Heating the interior quickly..............................114Recirculated air.....................................................114Ventilation..............................................................114

Manual Seats.................................................126Adjusting the angle of the seatback............127Adjusting the height of the driver’s

seat......................................................................127Adjusting the lumbar support........................127Moving the seats backwards and

forwards............................................................126Manual Transmission..................................163Map Pockets....................................................141Memory Function..........................................142

Recalling a stored seat position....................143Resetting the memory......................................143Setting a memory pre-set...............................142

Message CentreSee: Information Displays.................................89

MirrorsSee: Heated Windows and Mirrors..............120See: Windows and Mirrors................................75

MP3 connectionSee: Connecting an external device............319See: Connecting an external device - Vehicles

With: Bluetooth..............................................319MP3 display options..................................290

CD text display options...................................290MP3 file playback........................................289

Playing a multi session disc..........................289

NNavigation introduction............................326Navigation system commands...............315Navigation system.......................................327News broadcasts.........................................285


339

Index

OOccupant protection....................................29

Principle of Operation........................................29Oil Check

See: Engine Oil Check......................................244On/off control................................................277Opening and Closing the Bonnet...........233

Closing the bonnet............................................234Opening the bonnet..........................................233

PParking Aids....................................................175

Principle of Operation.......................................175Parking Brake.................................................166

Applying the parking brake.............................166Parking on a hill...................................................167Releasing the parking brake............................167

Parts and Accessories.....................................7Look for the Ford logo on the following

parts .......................................................................8Now you can be sure that your Ford parts

are Ford parts.......................................................7Personalised Settings................................100

Help screen, radio, navigation and phoneinformation......................................................100

Language................................................................101Navigation information....................................100Units of measure.................................................101

Power Door LocksSee: Locking and Unlocking.............................38

Power Seats....................................................1272-way electric seat..............................................1278-way electric seat............................................128

Power Steering Fluid Check.....................245Topping up............................................................245

Power Windows..............................................75Anti-trap function................................................76Driver’s door switches.........................................75Front and rear passengers’ door

switches..............................................................75Global opening and global closing................75Opening and closing the windows

automatically....................................................75Resetting the memory of the electric

windows..............................................................76Safety mode...........................................................77Safety switch for rear windows.......................76

Programming the remote control............35Programming a new remote control.............35Reprogramming the unlocking

function...............................................................35

RRear Fog Lamps.............................................59Rear Quarter Windows.................................79

Electric rear quarter windows.........................80Manual rear quarter windows.........................79

Rear Seats.......................................................129Creating a level load floor................................133Second row seats...............................................129Third row seats.....................................................131

Rear Under Floor Storage.........................198S-MAX....................................................................199Vehicles with a sliding loadspace

floor....................................................................198Rear view camera..........................................177

Principle of Operation........................................177Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........52

Intermittent wipe..................................................52Reverse gear wipe................................................52Washer.....................................................................53

Refuelling - E85............................................158Refuelling........................................................158Regional mode (REG)...............................284

All except Sony and Sony DAB....................284Sony and Sony DAB..........................................285

Remote control batterySee: Changing the remote control

battery.................................................................35Remote control programming

See: Programming the remote control........35Removing a Headlamp................................63

340

Index

Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............250Repeat compact disc tracks...................289

6000CD................................................................289Sony and Sony DAB.........................................289

Retractable tow ball....................................214Driving with a trailer............................................217Maintenance.........................................................217Swivelling the tow ball in.................................215Swivelling the tow ball out.............................216

Road Safety...................................................326Safety information............................................326

Roadside Emergencies...............................219Roof Racks and Load Carriers................202

Installing the crossbars...................................202Roof rack...............................................................202

Running-In.......................................................218Brakes and clutch...............................................218Engine.....................................................................218Tyres........................................................................218

SSafety Precautions.......................................155Seat Back Trays..............................................141Seat belt height adjustment......................32Seat belt reminder.........................................32

Deactivating the seat belt reminder..............33Seat belts

See: Fastening the seat belts............................31Seat memory function

See: Memory Function......................................142Seats.................................................................126Security code.................................................275Setting the clock and date on the audio

unit..................................................................2766000CD................................................................276Sony and Sony DAB..........................................276

Shuffle/random............................................2876000CD................................................................287Sony CD and Sony CD DAB...........................288

Sitting in the Correct Position..................126Sliding Loadspace Floor.............................197

Storage compartment......................................197Snow Chains

See: Using Snow Chains.................................260Speed Control

See: Cruise Control............................................180

Speed Limiter................................................188Principle of Operation......................................188

Stability Control............................................170Principle of Operation.......................................170

Starter SwitchSee: Ignition Switch...........................................145

Starting a Diesel Engine.............................149Cold or hot engine..............................................149

Starting and Stopping the Engine..........145General Information..........................................145

Starting a Petrol Engine - E85.................148Starting at low ambient temperatures

..............................................................................148Starting a Petrol Engine..............................147

Cold or hot engine..............................................148Engine idle speed after starting....................148Flooded engine...................................................148

Start-Stop.......................................................152Principle of Operation.......................................152

Station preset buttons...............................279Station tuning control.................................281

DAB service linking.............................................281Manual tuning.....................................................282Scan tuning..........................................................282Seek tuning...........................................................281

Steering Wheel Lock....................................147Vehicles with keyless starting........................147Vehicles without keyless starting..................147

Steering Wheel...............................................49Storage compartments.............................140

Front storage compartments........................140Overhead storage compartments...............140Under floor storage compartment...............141Under seat storage compartment...............140

Sun Shades.....................................................136Roof (Galaxy).......................................................136Roof (S-MAX)......................................................136Side windows.......................................................136

Switching Off the Engine..........................150Vehicles with a turbocharger.........................150

Symbols Glossary.............................................7Symbols in this handbook...................................7Symbols on your vehicle.......................................7

TTechnical Specifications

See: Capacities and Specifications.............267

341

Index

Telephone commands...............................310Create a phonebook..........................................313Main settings........................................................314Phone......................................................................310Phone functions...................................................311

Telephone controls.....................................294Remote control..................................................294

Telephone setup..........................................293Bond another Bluetooth phone...................294Making a phone an active phone................294Phonebook...........................................................293Phonebook categories....................................294

Telephone.......................................................293General Information.........................................293

TelephoneSee: Using the telephone - Vehicles With:

Navigation System.......................................297See: Using the telephone - Vehicles Without:

Navigation System.......................................295Tow Ball.............................................................211

Driving with a trailer...........................................213Driving without a trailer....................................214Inserting the tow ball arm...............................212Maintenance.........................................................214Removing the tow ball arm.............................213Unlocking the tow ball arm

mechanism.......................................................212Towing a Trailer...............................................211

Steep gradients....................................................211Towing Points.................................................231

Installing the towing eye..................................231Towing eye location...........................................231

Towing the Vehicle on FourWheels...........................................................231All vehicles.............................................................231Vehicles with 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)

Diesel (Stage V) or 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi(MI4) and 6-Speed AutomaticTransmission...................................................232

Vehicles with automatic transmission,except 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel(Stage V) or 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4)with 6-Speed AutomaticTransmission...................................................232

Towing................................................................211Track selection.............................................286


Traffic information control......................280Activating traffic announcements..............280Ending traffic announcements......................281Local or distant traffic.....................................280To adjust the preset volume...........................281Traffic announcement volume......................281

Transmission..................................................163Trip Computer.................................................98

Average fuel consumption...............................98Average speed......................................................98Distance to empty...............................................98Odometer...............................................................98Outside air temperature....................................98Tripmeter................................................................98Type 1 and 2............................................................99Type 3.......................................................................99

Type approvals.............................................329Certificate for United Arab Emirates..........330EU Declaration....................................................330FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE.............329RX-42 - declaration of conformity..............329

Tyre Care.........................................................260Tyre Pressure Monitoring System.........260

Checking the tyre pressures...........................261Setting the vehicle load....................................261

Tyre PressuresSee: Technical Specifications.......................262

Tyre Repair Kit...............................................256Checking the tyre pressure............................259General information.........................................256Inflating the tyre..................................................257Using the tyre repair kit....................................257

TyresSee: Wheels and Tyres....................................253

UUnder Bonnet Overview - 1.6L

Duratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel...................239Under Bonnet Overview - 1.6L EcoBoost

SCTi (Sigma)..............................................235Under Bonnet Overview - 2.0L

Duratec-HE (MI4).....................................236Under Bonnet Overview - 2.0L

Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel.................240Under Bonnet Overview - 2.0L EcoBoost

SCTi (MI4)...................................................237

342

Index

Under Bonnet Overview - 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel.................242

Under Bonnet Overview - 2.3LDuratec-HE (MI4).....................................238

Unloading the compact discchanger.........................................................287

USB port..........................................................144USB

See: Using a USB device.................................320Using active suspension.............................174

Selecting a setting..............................................174System malfunction...........................................174

Using Adaptive Cruise Control................183Automatic deactivation...................................186Changing the set speed...................................184Setting a speed...................................................184Setting the vehicle gap.....................................185Switching the system off................................186Switching the system on.................................184Temporarily deactivating the system.........186

Using an iPod.................................................322CD Navigation units..........................................324SD Navigation units..........................................324Sony radio.............................................................323

Using a USB device.....................................320CD Navigation units...........................................321SD Navigation units...........................................322Sony radio............................................................320

Using Cruise Control...................................180Cancelling the set speed.................................180Changing the set speed...................................180Resuming the set speed...................................181Setting a speed...................................................180Switching cruise control off.............................181Switching cruise control on............................180

Using driver alert..........................................190Resetting the system.........................................191Switching the system on and off.................190System display.....................................................191System warnings................................................190

Using Eco mode............................................154Resetting Eco mode..........................................154

Using hill start assist.....................................171Activating the HLA..............................................172Deactivating the HLA.........................................173

Using lane departure warning.................192Setting the steering wheel vibration

level.....................................................................193Setting the system sensitivity........................193Switching the system on and off..................192System warnings................................................193

Using seat belts during pregnancy..........33Using Snow Chains....................................260

Vehicles with stability control (ESP).........260Using Stability Control................................170

Vehicles without stability control (ESP)switch.................................................................170

Vehicles with stability control (ESP)switch.................................................................170

Using start-stop............................................152To re-start the engine........................................153To stop the engine..............................................152

Using the Parking Aid..................................175Manoeuvring with the parking aid................175Switching the parking aid on and off...........175

Using the Rear View Camera....................177Activating the rear view camera....................177Deactivating the rear view camera..............179Using the display.................................................178Vehicles with parking aid.................................179

Using the speed limiter..............................188Intentionally exceeding the speed

limit.....................................................................188Setting the speed limit.....................................188System warnings................................................189

Using the telephone - Vehicles With:Navigation System...................................297Changing the active phone...........................298Debonding a bonded phone.........................299Making a call.......................................................298Muting the microphone..................................298Receiving an incoming call............................298Receiving a second incoming call...............298

Using the telephone - Vehicles Without:Navigation System...................................295Changing the active phone............................297Debonding a bonded phone..........................297Debonding a bonded phone - Sony

radio...................................................................297Making a call.......................................................295Muting the microphone..................................296Receiving an incoming call............................296Receiving a second incoming call...............296

343

Index

Using voice control.....................................300Name tag...............................................................301System operation.............................................300

Using Winter Tyres......................................260

VVehicle battery...............................................251Vehicle Care...................................................249Vehicle Identification Number...............266Vehicle Identification Plate......................265Vehicle identification..................................265Vehicle recovery.............................................231Ventilated Seats............................................134

Raising and lowering the temperatureautomatically..................................................135

Raising and lowering the temperaturemanually...........................................................135

VentilationSee: Climate Control...........................................112

VentsSee: Air Vents........................................................112

VINSee: Vehicle Identification Number............266

Voice control.................................................300Principle of Operation.....................................300

WWarning Lamps and Indicators................85

ABS warning lamp...............................................85Airbag warning lamp..........................................85Blind spot monitor indicator............................85Brake system lamp..............................................85Coolant temperature warning lamp.............85Direction indicators.............................................86Electric parking brake (EPB) warning

lamp.....................................................................86Engine warning lamp..........................................86Forward alert indicator......................................86Front fog lamp indicator...................................86Frost warning lamp.............................................86Glow plug indicator.............................................86Headlamp indicator............................................86Ignition warning lamp........................................86Lane departure warning indicator..................87Low fuel level warning lamp............................87Main beam indicator...........................................87Message indicator................................................87Oil pressure warning lamp................................87Rear fog lamp indicator......................................87Seat belt reminder...............................................87Shift indicator........................................................87Stability control (ESP) warning lamp..........87Start-stop indicator.............................................87

Warning Triangle...........................................219Washer Fluid Check....................................245Washers

See: Wipers and Washers..................................51Washing

See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................249Waveband button........................................279


Wheels and Tyres........................................253General Information.........................................253Technical Specifications.................................262

Windows and Mirrors....................................75Windscreen Washers....................................52Windscreen Wipers........................................51

Intermittent wipe...................................................51Winter Tyres

See: Using Winter Tyres..................................260Wipers and Washers......................................51

Technical Specifications...................................55

344

Index

(CG3533en)

ford galaxy manual

Documents